:; 


* 
f 
A} 


ne 


+3 


« 


ae) 


¥ 


mt 


b 


rhe 


att 


a 


3 


> 


brah 


i 


ae 
as 


f° 


batt 
<a 


Sit otiehs 


; 


33 


é cite 
> " 


Higiy 
4 


Gre 


penny 
Can 


‘ 
this 


i 
ij 


& 


Peaseiiy’ 


ee 


at 
fy yt 


. 3* 
pains 


te 
- 


os 


Bey 


iH 


q° 
pata! 
q 


~ 


Sy 


etd 


at 


or 
oa 


ttle 


4 
ty 


# 


Serer 
Pears 





- .T/ 


: , > | 
rh ai b —- Te 


Ad GHINASAAd 


C<S) 


AGSUAL MAN - NOLAONTUd 


AAMUIIMIE JH91H0josYD, 949, Jo havaqny 











Po OLN LAL 


OF 


NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 





OF 


JUN 29 1953 : 
Lav oayy 
NEW TESTAMENT GREE: 





BY 


JOHN HOMER ‘HUDDIISTON, A.B. (Hanv.), 
PH.D. (Municu) 


Prorgessor OF GREEK IN THE UNIVERSITY OF MAINE 


author of “ Greek Tragedy tn the Light of Vase-Patntings,” “ Lessons 
from Greek Pottery,” etc. 


New Work 
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 


LONDON: MACMILLAN & CO., Lrp. 


1924 


All rights reserued 


PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 


CopyRIGHT, 1895, 
By MACMILLAN AND CO. 





COPYRIGHT, 1923, 
By JOHN H. HUDDILSTON. 


Set up and electrotyped. Reprinted, August, 1907; 
August, 1909; September, 1910; December, 1912; Jan- 
uary, 1914; January, 1915; August, 1916; April, 1917; 
July, 1918; August, 1919; January, December, 1920; 
May, July, 1922; May, 1923; February, 1924. 


1953-7 


PARC od ACO By 


—~>———_- 


TuHE publication of the Revised Version of our 
English New Testament, in 1881, marked the begin- 
ning of a new interest in Bible study. Since that time 
not only the English, but the Greek and Hebrew have 
been studied with a zeal quite new. ‘The sources are 
being more carefully examined to-day than ever before. 
Students are becoming more and more awake to the 
great importance of being able to judge of a certain 
passage for themselves rather than accepting without 
doubt or question whatever the authorities say in 
regard to it. 

Can anything be done to bring the language of the 
New Testament within the reach of a larger number 
of Bible students? Through the great maze of gram- 
matical difficulties that surround the language, can a 
way be mapped out along which the student may work, 
and, without sacrificing essentials, gain the same end 
that usually requires many months of hard study? 
Can the absolutely essential parts of the language, as 
used by the New Testament writers, be set forth in 
small space? ‘This little book is an attempt to answer 


these questions, and I believe that it lies within the 
Vv 


vi PREFACE. 


power of the earnest Sunday-school worker or other 
Bible student to acquire a reading knowledge of New 
Testament Greek, provided only a substantial part of 
one’s time is thus devoted for a few months. 

In my teaching of elementary classes in Garrett 
Biblical Institute, I have been accustomed to begin my 
work with the first list of verbs in Bradley and Hors- 
well’s New Testament Word Lists, Part I. All of these 
words occur several hundred times, and furnish the 
student thus at the very first with a substantial hold 
on what proves one of the main difficulties in Greek 
or any other language, —the vocabulary. The work 
was in part inductive. Those words that presented 
fewest difficulties of form, and which at the same time 
were of the most frequent occurrence, were presented 
first. ‘The second declension was introduced before 
the first, as being altogether simpler and more easily 
comprehended by those who had not made _ the 
acquaintance of an inflected language. I aimed to 
keep rare adjectives and tenses of the verb till a later 
time. The optative mood, which does not occur in 
the Johannean writings, was omitted entirely from the 
elementary work. Each lesson was accompanied with 
illustrative exercises taken as far as possible from the 
New Testament. 

The present volume has grown out of this plan of 
work. It represents the results of class-room experi- 
ence. ‘The work has been tried in manuscript form, 
both with my classes and with private students, and 
has, therefore, the advantage, so important in this 
class of books, of having been given a practical test. . 


PREFACE. vil 


Part I. includes the thirty-two lessons, which will afford 
sufficient preparation for the reading of the Greek, 
the first letter of John, the Beatitudes and the Lord’s 
Prayer from Matthew, the chapter on the Prodigal 
Son from Luke, and the thirteenth of First Corinthians. 
These selections are given in Wescott and Hort’s read- 
ing and are followed by notes and vocabulary. Of the 
epistle there is given a translation of three chapters, 
two literal and one quoted from the Revised Version. 
This translation may serve for retranslation in case 
the reading is taken up inductively apart from the 
lessons. In Part II. are found the essentials of the 
grammar, embracing, in the first part, the alphabet, 
table of consonants, vowel and euphonic changes, 
in the second part, the declension of nouns, pronouns, 
adjectives, participles, the conjugation of verbs, the 
optatives of the New Testament, a table of about eighty 
irregular verbs, and the special study in the classes of 
verbs and the most common irregular verbs. 

In all verbal forms the aim has been to confine the 
forms given, to New Testament usage. In the third 
part of the grammar the main features of the syntax 
are illustrated with quotations from the New Testa- 
ment Greek. The prepositions also are. discussed 
somewhat and accompanied with sentences illustrating 
New Testament peculiarities. 

I have made the explanations in the lessons so full 
that much progress may be made by private study, 
without a teacher. ‘The lessons as arranged represent 
but one way of applying the Word Lists. The Greek 
text, the convenient form of declensions and conjuga- 


vill PREFACE. 


tions, afford opportunity for the teacher to exercise 
his own judgment in putting the student in control of 
the elementary work. 

I wish:-here to acknowledge my great indebtedness 
to Professors Bradley and Horswell for the use of their 
Word Lists, which they so very kindly put at my dis- 
posal. Without the great labour which they had already 
performed, my work would have been either impossible 
or the labour of producing it would have been very 
greatly increased. 

I wish especially to express my great indebtedness 
to Rev. Charles Horswell, Ph.D., Professor of Hebrew 
in Garrett Biblical Institute, for invaluable assistance. 
Without his suggestion the work would not have been 
begun, nor completed without his encouragement and 
co-operation. Whatever of merit this little book may 
have, it owes much to his rare scholarship and his wide 
experience as a teacher of the New Testament lan- 
guage. Forno errors, however, which the work may 
contain is he at all responsible. For valuable assist- 
ance in correction of the proof I have to express my 
thanks to Mr. E. A. Bechtel, A.M., and Mr. W. W. 
Bishop, A.M., Instructors in Classics in Northwestern 
University. The proof has been read, in part, also, 
by Professor Milton S. Terry, D.D., Garrett Biblical 
Institute, and by Professor Henry A. Buttz, D.D., 
Drew Theological Seminary. I owe much to the 
valuable suggestions of these well-known scholars. 


J. H. HUDDILSTON. 


NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY, 
Evanston, ILt., May 29, 1895. 


PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION. 


i 


ASIDE from the corrections of typographical errors, 
few changes have been introduced in this new edi- 
tion. My. time since the publication of the book has 
been so occupied in other lines of study that it has 
been impossible for me to enlarge certain parts of 
the grammar which the favourable reception of the 
work would have warranted. 

I am under special obligation to Professor John 
Humphrey Barbour, Middletown, Conn., who has 
very kindly gone over the whole work and favoured 


me with his valuable criticism. 
J. H. H. 


BERLIN, GERMANY, 
August, 1896. 


CONTIENEL Ss 


———_ 
PAGES 
INTRODUCTION -..022 « ve-is a) a ee) ee 
BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . oO ES ae ee 
SUGGESTIONS TO THE STUDENT 5 DSF -: Sane Res XxVli | 
PART I. — LESSONS; TEXT. 
Lessons 1.-XX X10 2 Sa es I-90. 
SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION . . . - + + + «+ QI-IIO 
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS = 2y"5)oes0 st - 6 500 eee Ili 
NoTES ON SELECTIONS . . + = -; |.) oe eee ee 
TRANSLATIONS OF First EPISTLE OF Tous d mer pel Teo 
VOCABULARY OF ‘SELECTIONS >. "= 739750 75) geese ee pee 
PART II.—GRAMMAR. 

1. Writinc AND Sounp: Alphabet, Vowel Changes, 
Accent, Ete.) ©.» ta) 's)) suites 50s aerate 

2. AccIDENCE: Declension of Nouns, Adjectives, 

Pronouns, Participles; Conjugation of Verbs; 

Optatives of the New Testament; Irregular 
Verbs... +) + el) ml = a) bale gn 
3° SYNTAX «9. © gp  ©) 8 cee ae 
INDEXES . . . . . ° e . . ° ° ° . . . 223-233 


INTRODUCTION. 


ae 


My purpose is to offer here a few considerations 
on two questions. 1. Why was the New Testament 
written in Greek? 2. What are the main points of 
difference between this Greek and that of the classical 
period ? 

Every one knows that Greek was not a native of 
Palestine, but that in some way this exotic plant found 
root there, and, to the exclusion of the native language, 
became the organ of the everlasting Gospel. How 
then did this occur ? 

It will first be necessary to understand something 
about the languages which were used in the countries 
to the east from the Mediterranean, prior to and con- 
temporary with the advent of the Greek. All of this 
part of Asia, including the countries from Assyria on 
the north to Arabia on the south, had one separate and 
distinct family or branch of languages, — the Semitic. 
Of this primitive Semitic nothing is left us. Long 
before the curtain of history rises, the early language 
had assumed marked grammatical and lexigraphical 
peculiarities among the various peoples. Accordingly 
we know nothing of the parent speech except through 

x1 


xl INTRODUCTION. 


the tongues of these early nations. The Assyrians 
(whose language is known from cuneiform inscrip- 
tions) and the Aramaeans, who comprised a large 
part of the population of Assyria and Babylon and 
to whose language, the Aramaic, we shall refer later, 
represented the most northern group of the Semitic. 
South of these we find the Hebrews of Canaan, in 
whose language the most considerable portion of the 
Old Testament was written, and akin to them the Phoe- 
nicians, whose language is known to us imperfectly and 
through inscriptions only. Further south the Arabic 
and Ethiopic make up what is sometimes termed the 
South Semitic. Of these three groups, the North, the 
Middle, and the South Semitic, we shall confine our 
considerations to the first two; for here it is that we 
have to look for the language of the Jews. Their 
Hebrew was early exposed to the dialects of the sur- 
rounding tribes and especially open to Aramaic influ- 
ences on the north. Indeed as early as 700 B.c. 
we read that the messengers of the king Hezekiah 
requested the ambassador of the king of Assyria to 
speak to them in Aramaic, “for we understand z¢” 
(ii. Kings 18:26). The Jews would not long retain 
their language in its early purity beside that of another 
people who, as a conquering nation, were continually 
insinuating themselves into their life and politics. The 
result was that long before the breaking up of the 
Jewish kingdom in 586 B.c., the Hebrew had departed 
considerably from its original integrity. During the 
long years of captivity in Babylon and throughout the 
Babylonian empire, the Aramaic, which was the official 


INTRODUCTION. Xiil 


language of the Babylonian court, must have become 
quite as much a part of the Hebrews as their native 
tongue. The books of the Old Testament written after 
the exile, Ezra and Daniel, are known as the Aramaic 
books, owing to the fact that considerable portions of 
them are in tke Aramaic. We must not understand, 
however, that this large admixture of Aramaic is due 
wholly to the years of exile in Babylon. It has been 
the accepted view since the time of Jerome that in 
this period the Israelites ceased to speak and write 
Hebrew and turned to the use of the Aramaic only. 
Hence the term Chaldee, so often used to signify the 
speech of the Jews, as though the language of the 
Chaldees — the Aramaic — was introduced into Pales- 
tine by the returned exiles, and that subsequent to this 
the Hebrew died out and the Chaldee or Aramaic took 
its place. In recent years scholars have generally 
parted with this view, and have attempted to show that 
the change was more gradual. This seems by all 
means the most probable. A people retains its lan- 
guage long after its institutions and customs have 
ceased to exist. A conquering nation rarely succeeds 
in supplanting the language of the conquered. Slowly 
and gradually do the forces work that bring in the ele- 
ments of a new speech. ‘The English, for example, 
has not after five centuries entirely displaced the 
Celtic of Ireland, nor has Welsh ceased to be a very 
important factor in the literature and life of the United 
Kingdom, notwithstanding the fact that more than 
500 years have passed since Edward built his castles 
on the Welsh frontier. 


xiv INTRODUCTION. 


We must conclude therefore that for centuries the 
Aramaic gradually gained in popularity over the 
Hebrew, until the latter became at last the language 
of scholars and the learned few, while to the great 
mass of Jews the Aramaic was the only language known. 
This change must have occurred before the time of 
Christ ; for we find then that the common people no 
longer understood the Hebrew of the Scriptures, but 
used instead versions known as Targums, written in 
Aramaic. This then is the language of Palestine at 
the time of Christ, and the same which in the New 
Testament is called Hebrew. 

A great distinction, however, must be made between 
this Jewish-Aramaic and the Hebrew. The literature 
of each is sacred, but of the Hebrew we have left us 
the scant remains of the Old Testament only, while 
the former has extant a vast literature of the Talmud, 
Targums, and interpretative works, and has lived on in 
a more or less changed condition till the present time, 
and forms the basis of the language much used by the 
Jews to-day throughout the world. 

At the close of the fourth century B.c., Alexander of 
Macedon crossed the historic Hellespont, overtirned 
the Persian empire at Arbela, destroyed the famous 
city of ancient Tyre, overran all western Asia, even 
crossing into Egypt, where he founded the world’s new 
metropolis bearing his own name (332 B.c.). It is 
hard to measure the results of this conquering of the 
world. By no means the least important of the many 
that might be described was the spread of Greek 
letters and Greek civilization. ‘This nobie language 


INTRODUCTICN. XV 


of ancient Hellas, so rich and beautiful, so full of 
power and sweetness, was destined to work far greater 
results in the minds and hearts of men than the brief 
rule of Alexander and his successors. They soon 
passed away, and the Greek kingdom in Asia ceased 
to exist; but the Greek language which came with 
them still remained and spread with great rapidity 
throughout this whole territory, revealing to these 
Semitic races a new world of beauty and power. 
Although Greece soon fell under the conquering hand 
of Rome, Greek art and Greek letters took captive 
her captor. Rome was then the world, while through 
all her borders the language of Greece became the 
speech of trade and intercourse. Greek was even the 
language of the Roman court, and Roman boys were 
taught their Homer along with their native Vergil. 
The wide use of Greek at that period can be best 
compared with the English of to-day. It may be said 
with little hesitancy that, at the time of Christ, Greek 
was known in all parts of the Roman world. What 
more fitting language than this in which to send forth 
the Gospel of peace ? 

In Palestine there was of course a Greek population 
which existed alongside of the Jewish, and which 
became more numerous and distinct with the spread 
of Roman civilization. Of these two languages, Greek 
and Aramaic, we must suppose that a considerable 
part of the population knew enough for conversation 
at least. It is necessary to turn only to Alsace-Lorraine 
with its French and German, or to Wales with its Welsh 
and English, to find in modern times such a fusion of 


Xvi . INTRODUCTION. 


two tongues as must have existed in Palestine at the 
beginning of our era. 

The question as to whether Christ and his disciples 
knew and spoke Greek has been one that has long 
been debated. Some of the most illustrious of modern 
critics have been found on either side. It is not for 
me to enter upon it here, but simply to state my belief. 
It is more than probable, from what has been stated 
in regard to the two languages of Palestine at this 
period, that Greek, as well as Aramaic, must have fallen 
upon the ears of our Lord and his first followers from 
their earliest boyhood, and that all of them grew up 
in continual association with two languages. A few 
examples of this native speech are left us; Mark 5 : 41 
and Mark 7:34 may be referred to. Instances when 
we may conclude that Greek was used by Christ are, 
Mark 7:26, 27, and John 12:23. Matthew, from 
his duty as a tax-collector, would have required both 
languages, while Luke, the most cultured of the evange- 
lists, exhibits marked power in his use of Greek. There 
was but one way of reaching “all nations”’ and send- 
ing to them the new message. ‘There never could have 
been any doubt in the mind of Luke, Mark, or John 
regarding the language they should employ in writing 
their histories of our Lord’s life and works. Matthew 
appears to have written first in the Aramaic, but no 
doubt followed this immediately with a Greek version. 
A parallel to this may be observed in the case of 
‘the historian Josephus (A.D. 38-103), who wrote his 
history of the Jews first in Hebrew (Aramaic), and 
afterwards in Greek. it is not necessary to note 


INTRODUCTION. XVii 


concerning Paul that “all who are at Rome” and the 
“church at Corinth” and “the churches throughout 
Asia”’ could have been addressed in no language but 
the Greek. 

A considerable portion of the population at Alex- 
andria was Jews, for whom the Greek had displaced 
their native Aramaic, and as early as 275 B.c. they 
had so far forgotten the tongue of their fathers that 
they required a Greek translation of the Old Testa- 
ment. This was made at Alexandria by Jewish-Greeks, 
and is known as the Septuagint or the translation of 
the LXX. For the Jews scattered throughout the 
world in Cappadocia, Cyprus, Phrygia, Rhodes, Greece, 
and Rome the Septuagint became the Bible. So 
general was its use even in Palestine that the evange- 
lists quote quite as frequently from the Greek version 
as from the Hebrew. Paul, himself a Hebrew and 
reared according to the strictest sect of the Pharisees, 
often agrees more nearly with the Septuagint when he 
quotes from the Old Testament. 

After the fall of Jerusalem the Jewish population of 
Rome, Alexandria, Antioch, and other seaport towns, 
rapidly increased. Then, as now, the Jews were a 
commercial people; Greek was the one language of 
commercial intercourse. Thus we see this wonderful 
language served as acommon bond to hold together 
Jew and Gentile, Greek and Roman. Then it was 
that men were for the first time united by one speech 
and made, so to speak, into one family. With the 
overturning of old, worn-out kingdoms, and the break- 
ing down of ancient myth and fable of the pagan world, 


XVili INTRODUCTION. 


a new soil was prepared ready for new seed,— the 
Gospel of love. 

Secondly, we come to consider the characteristics of 
the Greek of the New Testament. Does it differ very 
widely from classical Greek? ‘To this the answer is 
“yes,” and we may well rejoice that it does. Had 
the Janguage as used by Plato and Demosthenes become 
the organ of the new message to the world, how dif- 
ferent would have been the effect! Imagine the 
result if the simple grace of our English Bible were to 
be replaced by the swelling periods of Milton or Bacon. 
A far simpler language was and is needed by the lowly, 
and this we shall see the later Greek to be. 

The language of the Macedonian Greeks, which was 
the same as that carried into Asia by Alexander, was 
essentially the same as that which Plato, Sophocles, 
and Demosthenes had used. From this wide diffusion, 
however, many changes were effected in the gram- 
matical structure of the language, and especially in the 
vocabulary. Much of the rigidness which had charac- 
terized it in the hands of the great Athenian writers 
was cast aside. The language was popularized, so to 
speak. This new form of the Greek was called Hel- 
lenistic Greek, and the people who learned and used 
it were known as Hellenists. We have had occasion 
already to refer to the Hellenistic Jews in Alexandria 
and other cities. 

In Palestine, however, as well as in the other 
Semitic countries, this Hellenistic Greek was greatly 
corrupted by the native tongue. Hebrew, Aramaic, 
and Syriac words were being continually introduced 


INTRODUCTION. xin 


into the Greek. To a large number of people who 
would use the Greek, it would amount to nothing other 
than a translation of their native tongue, together with 
the native idiom. ‘Their thinking was all in Aramaic, 
while their words were in Greek. ‘The literature of the 
Hebrew and Aramaic was entirely of a religious nature. 
The religious fervour of the Jews gave a strong bent to 
the tone of their language. It was the language of the 
human heart longing for the kingdom of God and 
the coming of the Messiah. ‘The words in common, 
every-day use were the same as those in which had 
been cast the revelation of God to his chosen »deople. 
Even at an early day this must have given a deep 
religious colouring to the Greek —hitherto a pagan 
language. The translation, however, of the Old Testa- 
ment did most to fix the idiom and form of the Greek 
for the expression of religious ideas. ‘Then it was that 
Greek meant something to the Jews beyond a con- 
venient means of intercourse for commercial life. 
For two centuries and a half this Greek Bible worked 
into the hearts and minds of the dispersed Jews, and 
the words that before in pagan Greece and Rome had 
meant little beyond the mortal and perishable of this 
world, took on a new meaning — fired with the flame 
of the sacred Hebrew. 

When we come to the language of the New Testa- 
ment, we have crossed a wondrous gulf. To quote 
from the words of the celebrated Dr. Schaff: “The 
language of the apostles and evangelists is baptized 
with the spirit and fire of Christianity, and receives a 
character altogether peculiar and distinct from secular 


XX INTRODUCTION. 


Greek. ... The Greek was flexible and elastic 
enough to admit of a transformation under the inspir- 
ing influences of revealed truth. It furnished the flesh 
and blood for the incarnation of divine ideas. Words 
in common use among the classics, or in popular 
intercourse, were clothed with a deeper spiritual 
significance ; they were transplanted from a lower to 
a higher sphere, from mythology to revelation, from 
the order of nature to the order of grace, from the 
realm of sense to the realm of faith.” It is worth 
while to note the word “ transformation ” in the above. 
Here is the key to the whole question. How rich this 
baptism of the pagan words has been may be seen by 
_ comparing the New Testament and the classical sense 
of such words as “ove, Saith, Lrophel, sin, glory, peace, 
Joy, mercy. 

The purity of the New Testament Greek differs 
very considerably in different authors, and indeed in 
one and the same writer we can observe two extremes. 
Luke, for example, in the first four verses of his gospel 
furnishes a specimen of as pure and elegant Greek as 
may be found on the page of any classical author. 
Immediately, however, he drops off into the vernacu- 
lar, as though aware that he is addressing the many 
and not the few. In considerable portions of his 
gospel and the Acts are to be found the harshest 
Hebraisms. ‘This is especially noticeable when he 
quotes from the Old Testament. In all the writers of 
the New Testament, the Hebrew of the Old Testament 
quotation appears distinctly through the thin veiling 
of the Greek. 


INTRODUCTION. Xxi 


Of the four evangelists Luke was the best educated, 
and therefore used the purest Greek. Matthew may 
be placed next, with Mark last. Concerning John, 
there is great difference of opinion. Some scholars 
declare his gospel the most thoroughly Hebrew of the 
four. It is said to have a Hebrew body with a Greek 
dress. On the other hand, there are those who main- 
tain for him the purest Greek. ‘The fact is, his short 
sentences would fall naturally into the idiom of almost 
any language. Paul’s Greek exhibits nearly every 
variety of classic elegance. However, it does not 
come within the scope of this article to give the pecu- 
liarities of the individual authors. 

It is necessary to speak more definitely as regards 
the linguistic differences between the Greek of the 
New Testament and that of the period of classical 
Greek, which we may consider to have closed with 
Aristotle (B.c. 384-322). 1. The vocabulary of the 
New Testament furnishes nearly 900 words that are 
not found in the classical writers. Many of these 
occur in subsequent authors, as Polybius and Plutarch 
and in the Septuagint. 2. Compound words are 
especially common. Rare combinations are used. 
The etymology always reveals the force of the expres- 
sion. 3. What is called the doctrinal sense of certain 
words, as love, hope, faith, introduces a new element 
quite distinct from anything earlier. 

Grammatically, very wide changes from the classical 
Greek may be noted. 1. The dual number has dis- 
appeared entirely. 2. Adjectives of the third declen- 
sion in -wy (-07) and -vs (-ws) are especially rare. Of 


Xxil : INTRODUCTION. 


adjectives in -ys (-és) there are but two or three com- 
mon examples. 3. The comparison of adjectives has 
been simplified, and is usually done by the use of an 
adverb, and the positive degree, except in the case 
of a few adjectives of irregular comparison. 

In the verb a great breaking away from classical 
usage is seen. 1. The optative mood is comparatively 
rare. It does not occur at all in the writings of John, 
and is found in the epistles and the Acts more than in 
the gospels. Except in the optative of wzsh or desire, 
the subjunctive regularly takes the place of this mood. 
2. In the uses of the voice and tense the changes are 
not so marked. In the subjunctive rarely any tense 
occurs aside from the present and the aorist. 3. It 
may be observed that in the verbs those in -w (-m7) 
tend to break down into the ending in -w (-0), while 
verbs in -iCw (-¢ds0) are much more common than 
in other Greek. 4. The forms in -yw (-mz) in the 
present system are comparatively rare. Hardly ever 
does the present subjunctive of these verbs occur, 
while the second aorist system has few forms in this 
mood. 

The syntax is too difficult a question to discuss here, 
and so but few points shall be presented. 1. Especially 
characteristic of New Testament Greek are the various 
uses of fva (Aina), which in classical Greek is confined 
for the most part to the introduction of f#a/ clauses. 
Of this conjunction there are no less than six well- 
defined uses in the New Testament. 2. While in 
classical Greek the conjunction ore (ost) is used 
with either the indicative or infinitive to denote result, 


INTRODUCTION. Xxiil 


and with nearly equal frequency in both constructions, 
the indicative occurs but twice in the New Testament. 
3. The participle still continues a fundamental form 
of construction, but shows signs of weakening in such 
instances as Jobn 11:1 and Luke 15:1, where the 
simple imperfect of the verb would have been expected. 
This form of expression is most common in Luke. 

The prepositions present a great variety of uses not 
inherent in the Greek word, thus betraying Hebrew 
influence. 

These are only a few of the most marked pecu- 
liarities of the language of the New Testament, but 
perhaps enough to show that it is much weakened 
and simplified as compared with classical Greek. If 
one adds to the grammatical peculiarities here men- 
tioned the strong colouring in idiom and vocabulary 
that arises from the Hebrew, a general notion may be 
formed as to the structure of this language. 

To know thoroughly the real force and value of this 
language, a wide familiarity with Semitic — especially 
Hebrew and Aramaic —is indispensable. Not only 
this, but the investigator must know Latin, of the 
influence of which I have taken no notice, as well as 
Greek from its earliest beginning in Homer. Such 
preparation as this few are able to acquire. A student 
may, however, gain a very satisfactory facility in 
handling the New Testament language, who knows 
nothing of any language except his own. Careful, 
assiduous labour for a few months will put the average 
student in control of the essentials, and this slight 
acquaintance will be found to repay one a thousand- 


XXIV . INTRODUCTION. 


fold. No one can ever attain to the ability of reading 
and understanding the grand simplicity and power of 
John’s brief sentences, ringing as they do with the 
imperishable grandeur of the Greek, without seeing 
an entirely new power in the Word. Any translation 
must ever fall far short of rendering the grace and 
force of the Greek. As a rose when plucked loses 
its sweetness and the fragrance is soon blown, so 
perishes in translation that fleeting, indescribable 
something that makes Greek the noblest of lan- 
guages. : 


The following list of books is recommended as rep- 
resenting perhaps the most helpful works for students 
of the New Testament Greek. ‘Those marked * are 
particularly valuable for the beginner. 

For assistance in making up this list the author has 
to express his indebtedness to Professor C. IF’. Brad- 
ley, D.D., Garrett Biblical Institute. He has very 
kindly given me the benefit of his wide knowledge 
of New Testament bibliography. 


Text. *The New Testament in the Original Greek 
(School Edition). Westcott and Hort. Macmillan 
& Co., New York, 1893. $1.25. 

This edition is also published with a lexicon, by the 
same publishers. $1.90. 

LEXICON. *Thayer’s Grimm’s Wilke, Greek-English 
Lexicon of the New Testament, “Corrected Edi- 
tion.” Harper & Brothers, New York, 1889. 
$5.00. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. XXV 


GRAMMAR. *Winer’s Grammar of New Testament Greek 
(Ninth English Edition). Trans. by Moulton. 
T. & T. Clark, Edinburgh, 1882. $3.60. 

CONCORDANCE. *Bruder’s Concordance of All the Words 
in the Greek New Testament (Fourth Edition). 
Leipzig, 1888. 25 M. 

A new edition of this monumental work, which will 

include the readings of Westcott and Hort, is to be 
published. 


Bagster’s Englishman’s Greek Concordance of the New 
Testament. London, 1883. £1, Is. 

*Bradley and Horswell’s New Testament Word Lists. 
Greek-English. Series I. and II. Garrett Biblical 
Institute, Evanston, Ill. 35 cents each. 

*Burton’s Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in New Testa- 
ment Greek. Chicago University. Press (Second 
Edition). $1.50. 

*Buttman’s Grammar of the New Testament. Trans. by 
Thayer. W. F. Draper, Andover, Mass. $2.75. 
Hatch’s Essays on Biblical Greek. Macmillan & Co., 

New York. $2.75. 

Robinson’s Greek Harmony of the Gospels. Ed. by M. B. 
Riddle. Houghton, Mifflin & Co., Boston, 1885. 
$2.00. 

*Schaff’s Companion to the Greek Testament and English 
Version (Fourth Edition). Harper & Brothers, New 
York, 1892. $2.75. 

Simcox’s (W.H.) The Language of the New Testament. 
Thomas Whitaker, New York, 75 cents. By the 
same author, The Writers of the New Testament. 
Same publishers and price. 

Terry’s Biblical Hermeneutics. Hunt and Eaton, New 
York. $4.00. 


XXVi BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


*Thayer’s Books and their Use, A Lecture, to which is 
added a list of books for students of the New Tes- 
tament Greek. Houghton, Mifflin & Co., Boston. 
75 cents. 

An exceedingly helpfui little volume. 

Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Eleventh 
Edition). Macmillan & Co., New York, 1390. $3.50. 

*Warfield’s An Introduction to the Textual Criticism of 
the New Testament. Whitaker, New York. 75 cents. 

Westcott’s Introduction to the Study of the Four Gospels 
(Seventh Edition, American Edition). Macmillan & 
Co., New York. $2.25. 

*Westcott and Hort’s The New Testament in the Original 
Greek. 2 vols. Harper & Brothers, New York. 

Vol. I. includes the text. Vol. II. has an Intro- 
duction to Textual Criticism and an Appendix. Price ~ 
per vol. $2.00. Complete $3.50. 


SUGGESTIONS TO THE STUDENT. 


ee 


1. All vocabularies must be thoroughly mastered. Writ- 
‘ng the words several times will greatly help to fix them in 
the mind. Pronouncing the Greek aloud is helpful. 


2. The acquisition of forms (z.e. declensions and conju- 
gations) must keep pace with the matter of a vocabulary. 


3. It is recommended that at least thirty lessons be mas- 
tered before the reading of the Greek text is attempted. 


4. Care should be taken in learning points of syntax 
that occur in the lessons. 


5. When the text is finally begun, the table of irregular 
verbs (§ 88) should be committed to memory. Also the 
verb forms in §$ go-110 should be carefully studied. 


6. When the Greek Testament is taken up, the syntax 
in Part III. may be studied to best advantage. At no time 
should the student fail to keep up the review of Part II. 


7. Finally, learn words, words, words. Only steady 
application and continual review will bring satisfactory 


results. 
XXV1i 





PART I.—LESSONS: TEXT 





john EN ICINAM We 1G e 
Ni Wee Po LAW ENG GRE BK 


——-0595,00—_——_ 
LESSON I. 
ik: VOCABULARY. 
axovw, J hear. Btw, 7 wish, will. éyw, 7 say. 
ywookw, 7 kuow. dadréw, J speak. mortevw, / believe. 
éxo, [ have. AapBave, 7 Zake. mow, J do, make. 


a. Each of these words occurs more than 200 times in 
the New Testament, and some of them I500 times. 


2. Notes on the Vocabulary. 


a. a-kov-w, a-kot-6, 7 hear; cf. ACOUSTIC. a=a in 
father ; k=hard ¢, as in can; ov is a diphthong com- 
posed of o and v (English 0 and wz) and pronounced like 
ou in group; w=6 in note. The mark (’) over the initial 
vowel of this word is called the breathing. Note the turn 
from right to left. This is called the szooth breathing, 
and it does not affect the sound of the vowel. The mark 
(‘) over the ov is the acute accent. The ending -w equals 
/ in English. 

b. yi-vii-oKw, gi-no-ské, 7 know. y=hard g, as in 
get; u=z in machine; v=n; o=s. Observe the same 
accent and on the same syllable as in dkovw. 


B I 


2 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


c. é&yw, é-chd, J have. e=e in let; x =ch, of which 
there is no equivalent sound in English. It is found in 
the German duch. Cf. chasm pronounced in a harsh gut- 
tural tone. The accent and breathing, when they occur on 
the same syllable, are written together, as here. All words 
beginning with a vowel have a breathing mark. 

d. 6é-u, thé-l6, 7 well or J wish. O= thin thin; X=. 

e. Na-Aé-w, 1a-lé-6, 7 sfeak. The accent occurs on 
what syllable of the verb so far? 

f. Xap-Ba-ve, lam-ba-no, J take. p=; B=. 

g. dé&yo, lé-gd, [ say. 

h. xi-orev-w, pi-stea-d, 7 believe. m= p; T=%; €v 
=the diphthong ew in fewd. When the accent comes 
on a diphthong, it is placed over the second vowel, as 
here. Cf. dxovw. 

Z. ToOl-€-w. poi-e-, I do, or make; cf. POET, POETRY. 
ou is a diphthong pronounced like o¢ in o7/. 


3. Topics for study. 


a. The vowels in this lesson are a, €,t,0,v,. The 
following diphthongs occur: ov, ev, ot. The consonants 
Alea a ye §=th, k=h, A=), p=mM,v=N, =f, 
PosG eis Ye 

b. In the matter of the accent of verbs the following 
must be noted. 1. The accent is always recessive, 7.é. it 
goes back as far as possible from the last syllable. 2. The 
last syllable determines the position of the accent. 3. If 
the last syllable is long, the accent always occurs on the 
next to the last syllable—the enw ; otherwise on the 
third syllable—the antepenult. 4. A syllable is long if it 
has a long vowel or a diphthong in it. 


4. In English we have the personal pronouns 
written generally before the verb and always 


PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 3 


separate from the verb. In Greek, on the con, 
trary, the pronouns are often found as an 
integral part of the verb, forming what is called 
the personal endings. Cf. -w in the verbs given 
above. In the case of most verbs the ending 
-wt of the I per. sing. pres. ind. act. is dropped, 
and the preceding vowel is lengthened in com- 
pensation. “.¢. the primary form of Aéyw is 
Néy-o-t, Of Akovw iS aKov-0-pwL: axov = stem, 0 = 
‘variable vowel, ws = personal ending. 


LESSONS 
5. PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 


Sing. Plur. 
I. A€éy-w, 7 say. I. €y-0-pev, we Say. 
2. A€y-ets,) you say. 2. A€y-e-Te, Ve Say. 
3. N€y-er, Ze, She, or zt savs. 3. A€y-ovor, they say. 


Observe from tie translation appended that 
the indicative mood has in Greek the same 
declarative force as in English. 


a. eas in deyes is a diphthong and equals ed in height. 


6. Note in the conjugation of Aéyw: 1. The 
theme Aey- appears unchanged throughout. 
2. A vowel occurs after this theme. 3. The 


is at the close of a word, but o in the middle of a word. 


4 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


vowel is o or e (often written %), called the 

variable vowel. 4. The variable vowel is fol. 

lowed by an ending, as -yev, -7e, in the plur., 

which is called the personal ending. See 4. 
How many distinct parts has Aéy-o-pev? 


7. The personal endings of the active voice, 
primary ! tenses, are seen in the following: 


Sing. 1. -pr, J. Plur. 1. -pev, we. 
2. -s, thou. Z. -Te, Ve. 
3. -ov (tt), Ae, she, zt. 3. -vor, they. 


8. The variable vowel and the personal end 
ing may be seen in the following: 


O-pt O-[Lev 
€-S €-TE 
€-OL 0-vot 


Note that o occurs before pu, prev, and vor, 2.2. 
before p and », e occurring in all other places. 


9. Certain changes take place in these primi 
tive forms, which give the following: 


-a, J. -Opev, WE. 
-es, thou. -€Te, Ve. 
-er, ie, she, it. -over, they. 


These forms must be absolutely mastered. 


1 See § 52 for the meaning of the word primary. (Where 
reference is made to the grammar, a section mark [§] precedes the 
figure, otherwise the reference is to the first part, — the lessons.) 


PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE, 5 


10. EXERCISES. 


I. Translate into English: 


/ 
I. ANapBavet, axover, OéreTe. 2. TicTEvoO, Aap- 
/ BA / / / 
Bavovot, Exovot, Trovew. 3. AauPBaveTe, Oérets, 
fi 7 
TLOTEVELS. 4. YLVWOKELS, UKOVOVGL, EyomEV, Né- 
/ 4 
yeTe. 5. OéXovEL, yLVOOKETE, TLOTEVOMEV, AKOVELS. 
, / Se 
6. AapBavels, Tid TEVETE, AKOVEL. 


II. Translate into Greek: 


1. I take, you wish, they know. 2. I have, 
ye say, they have, we say.. 3. You take, he 
hears, we have. 4. You believe, ye believe, 
they hear. 5. We know, they know, I say, they 
do.t 6. We wish, we speak,! ye do. 


Let the student analyze each verb form carefully, point- 
ing out the theme, variable vowel, and the personal end- 
ing. Apply also the principles of accent given in 3, d. 


1It is recommended that the teacher allow the matter of 
contract verbs to pass unnoticed, till the principles of contrac- 
tion appear gradually in the lessons. No harm need arise from 
the student’s writing uncontracted forms. The frequent occur: 
rence of these verhs in -ew explains their appearance here, 


6 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


LESSON III. 


THE SECOND OR O-—DECLENSION. 


11. VOCABULARY. 
aptos, bread. Xpovos, ¢2777e, CHRONO/ogy. 
Opdvos, THRONE. ayyedos, ANGEL. 
Koopos, world, COSMIC. avOpwrros, 77a71, ANTHROPO/ogy 
Alos, stone, LITHOgraphy. amdartodos, APOSTLE. 
Adyos, word, LOGIC. €pynpos, desert. 
vopos, daw, eCcONOMY. Oavatos, death, THANATOPSZS. 
oxAos, crowd. kvptos, Lord. 


romos, Place, TOPOgraphy. 


The student should learn thoroughly the mean- 
ings of the words in each vocabulary, pronounc- 
ing each word aloud, so as to be sure to get the 
proper accent. The case endings are to be abso- 
lutely mastered. Some of the words in this 
vocabulary occur 1000 times in the New Tes- 
tament. 


a. apros, ar-tds. p=r; 0o=o in on. 

6. In ayyedos the first y is pronounced like wg. This 
is always true of y when followed by k, ~. or x. 

c. In épypos, the y=, aud is pronounced like e in 
they. 

d. vin kvpios =z. There is no similar sound in Eng- 
lish. See §1. The sound approaches ¢ in key. - 


This includes all the vowels in Greek. 


THE SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. 7 


12. It 1s to be observed: :. All these nouns 
end in -os. 2. All these nouns belong to the 
O-declension. 3. They all have the acute 
accent. | 


13. All nouns in Greek come under one of 
three declensions, 5 16 and 17. The following 
is the second or O-declension : 


Sing. lure 
Nom. Aédyos, a word. Adyou, words. 
Gen. Adyov, of a word. Asywv, of words. 


Dat. Ady, Zo or fora word. dsyors, to or for words. 
Acc. Adyov, a word (obj.). Adyous, words (obj.). 
Voc. Adye, O word. Adyou, O words. 


a. The ending -w in the dat. sing. is for -o. o is 
lengthened to w, and t (zo¢a) is written underneath. This 
is called zota-subscript, and can never be wanting in the 
dat. sing. of this declension. 


14. Observe from the above that there are five 
cases in Greek: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
Accusative, Vocative. The nominative equals 
English nominative; the genitive equals Eng- 
lish possessive or the objective with of, the 
dative corresponds to the English indirect objec- 
tive, Zo or for which anything zs or zs done, the 
accusative is the English direct objective; the 
vocative, which is rarely used, is the case of 
address. Cf. § 21. 


8 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


15. In verbs we noted that the exdings are 
especially important as showing the person and 
number. So in nouns also the relation of nouns 
to each other, and to the other parts of the sen- 
tence, is denoted by the case endings. While in 
English we have to depend (for the most part) 
on prepositions such as /o, for, dy, zn, at, on, of, 
etc., to express case relation, the Greek has 
this relation expressed by the exdings of the 
several cases. 

(There are, of course, prepositions in Greek, 
but these case endings are always observed 
apart from the prepositions). 


16. Observe that the accent on Adyos remains 
on the same syllable throughout the declension. 
This is the fundamental principle of accent in 
nouns. The accent remains on the same syllable, 


af possible. 


17. Learn the declension of av@pwrros, § 23. 


a. When the last syllable becomes long, as in the end- 
ings -ov, -w, -wv, -ols, -ouvs (8, 4, 4), the accent cannot 
remain on the antepenult, but removes to the penult. 
Cf. the same principle in verbs, 3, 0. 

6. Final o, although a diphthong, is considered short 
in determining the place of accent in the O-declension. 

c. The accent of the nominative must be learned by 
observation. 


THE SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. 9 


18. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. amroctodkw, Opovwv, voor, ypdvots. 
2. avOpwirot, Koopmov, AOyot KUplov. 3. OyrOs 
> / , eg | v > / if: 
avOpwtrav, vou@ kai! dydw. 4. aTdaToNos Aéyet. 
5. amdaToXos eyes Adyov. 6. amTOaTOAOS RéyeEL 

f ? , ” 5) f , 
Noyov avOpoT@. 7. ayyerot akovovat. 8. Kodc- 

a ” yf 
fos mlaTevel. 9. AauwBaveTe ApTov. 10. dxXos 
yiwooKker. 1. avOpwrrot Eyovaot vomovs. 


II. 1. Of a man, toa throne, words of men. 
2. Angels and men, to the world, of a desert. 
3. Death of apostles. 4. He takes a stone. 
5. Words of man to a world. 6. Ye say to 
a crowd. 7. We have a place. 8. An angel 
of (the) Lord. 9. We hear law and believe. 
10. He has bread for apostles. 


LESSON IV. 


THE O-DECLENSION CONCLUDED. 


19. VOCABULARY. 

adeXds, brother. opPadpds, eve, OPHTHALMO- 
Ocds, God. logy. 

ads, People. vids, 5072. 

vexpos, deceased, NECROlogy. 086s, way. 

otpaves, Heaven. Sotdos, servant. 


1 The acute accent ("), on a final syllable, is changed to the 
grave E> when other words follow in a sentence. 


10 BSSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


olkos, House. mardiov, little chila. 
epyov, work. mAoiov, boat. 

tepov, fenzple. mpscwtrov, face. 
ipariov, garment. ocdBBarov, SABBATH. 


réxvov, child. 


90, a. ddeAdds, 4-déi-phis. d=ad; 6=Ph in Phase. 

6. In otpavos observe that the breathing occurs on the 
second vowel of the diphthong. 

c. The diphthong w, as in vids, is pronounced like wee. 
The breathing is always rough (°), z.e. the explosion of 
breath is so strong as to give an # sound. vi is, then, 
pronounced whee. 

d. Note the rough breathing on tuarvov, hi-ma-ti-6n, 
and tepov, hi-é-r6n, 600s, hé-dés. 

é. at as in waddov = az in azsle. 


21. There are two principal accents in Greek, 
the acute (“) and the circumflex ("). The acute 
can occur on any one of the last three syllables, 
while the circumflex can occur on one of the 
last two. 


22. Learn the declension of vids, soz, § 28, 
and note that in every gen. and dat. the acute 
(‘) is changed to a circumflex (°). 


23. Learn the declension of dodXos, servant, 
§ 23, and observe that the circumflex accent 
occurs on a /ovg syllable only, and when at the 
same time the last syllable is short. When the 
ultima becomes long, the (”) changes to the (’). 


THE SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. Il 


24. Nouns of the O-declension end in -os 
masc. (rarely fem.) and -oy neut. The inflection 
of neuter nouns is the same as that of masculine 
nouns, except that the nom., acc., and voc. sing. 
end in -ov, and the same cases in the plur. end 
in -a. Cf. dapov, gift, 5 93. 


29. All adjs. in Greek are declined, and agree 
in gender, number, and case with the words 
they modify. The definite article ¢#e, 0, is an 
adj. and is declined ; ¢.g. 0 do0Xos, the servant ; 
Tov Oovrou, of the servant; to tékxvov, the child; 
To Téxvo, to the child; ta téxva, the children; 
TaV NOoywr, of the words. Learn the masc. and 


neut. (o and 70) of the article, § 24. 


26. EXERCISES. 


a f A cal , 
I. 1. T@ ROY@ Kai Tots Adyols. 2. THY SoUL@D 
\ Lae / \ , tal > V4 
Kal TO Taloiw. 3. TO caBBaTov Tols avOpwrTrais. 
, a 4 
4. 0 KUplos TOU GaBBaTov. 5. 0 adeAdos yive'- 
oKeL TO TéExvov. 6. 0 aos EEL TOUS VOMOUs. 
/ 
7. NapBavete aptov Kai ipatia. 8. ol atoaTo- 
4 a . n A 
Noe akovovot TOY Taidiov.! 9g. €v (iN) TO lep@ 
, val é 
Néyomev. 10. TOV KUPLOV TOU KOT MOU YLVWOKETE. 


II. 1. In (év) the temple and in the boat. 
2. To the people and of the people. 3. The 


1 Verbs of hearing may be followed by the genitive case, as 
the case of the direct object. 


£2 FSSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 


eyes of the servant. 4. For the work and for 
the garments. 5. Ye hear the people! 6. The 
apostle knows the law. 7. I speak to the ser- 
vants, and they hear. 8. The Lord has a 
temple in Heaven. 9. We have the garments 
for the children. to. The son of God knows 
the world. 


LESSON V. 


THE PRESENT PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 


27. VOCABULARY. 
ayaa, J love. éyelpw, J raise up. 
Bodro, 7 throw. wplvw, 7 judge. 
Brérrw, 7 see. méptrw, / send. 
ypadw, 7 write, GRAPHZC. otTé\d\w, / send. 


Si8do0Kw, 7 teach, DIDACTic. cde, / save. 


a. In owlw, save, € is a double consonant, ds, and 
pronounced like dz in adze. 


28. The passive voice, as in English, repre- 
sents the subject as being acted upon. The 
personal endings of the passive distinguish it 
from the active. 

Following are the primary pass. endings : 


Sing. 1. -por, /. Plur. 1. -peOa, we. 
2. -rat, you. 2. -7e, ye. 
3. -Tar, he. 3. -vtTat, they. 


1 See footnote, p. II. 


THE PRESENT PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 13 


a. The variable vowel % is found as in the active 
voice. Before mw and vy, o occurs, and before all other 
endings ¢ is found. 


29. The following is the conjugation of the 
pres. pass. ind. of Av, / loose: 


Sing. Plur. 


I. Av-o-pat, 7 az loosed. 1. dv-6-peOa, we are loosed. 
2. Av-e, you are loosed. 2. db-e-0¥e, ye are loosed. 
3. Adv-e-rar, Ae zs loosed. 3. Nb-0-vtTar, they are loosed. 


a. Observe that the 2 per. sing. Aver is for Aveoat. 
oa is dropped, and e and ce form the diphthong e«. 1 may 
be found instead of ec. 

6b. The same principle of accent is to be noted as 
in 3, 4. at is considered short in the personal endings, 
hence the accent occurs on the antepenult. 


30. - EXERCISES. ‘ 


/ 
I. 1. Barre ANNETAL, TTEMTTELS, TWéEMTTE- 
2 
/ / / / 
aOe. 2. xpiver, Kpivetat, duddoKxo, didadoKopat. 
/ , > 4 > / 
3. AapwBavete, AauPavere, akovoval, AkoVOVTAL. 
/ 
4. aterromeOa, Br€Errovat, ypadhomev. 5. owlere, 
e 
eyelpovol, TiaTEevomeV, ypadetar. 6. of avOpwrtrot 
° \ , 
KplvovTa. 7. éyelpomeOa eis (into) Tov ovpavov. 
. na , ic / 
8. ypaderat év (in) TO voww. Q. 6 Vlogs avOparrov 
a A 4 
awverat. 10. €v Tw vaw! rAéyer Kal aKoveTaL. 
II. 0 amécToXoL €is TOY KOGMOoV oTédAOVTAL. 
‘ee 4 
12. mictevouev eis (on) Tov KUpLovy Kat owlo- 


peda. 
1 Temple. 


14 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


II. 1. He sees and is saved. 2. You believe 
and are saved. 3. We judge and are judged. 
4. Llhey sena*and are sent) 5," Hie taiseomun 
the dead. 6. It is written in the laws. 7. We 
see the brethren. 8. The son of man is judged. 
9. The Lord hears inthe temple. 1omipsnes. 
and am heard. «1. We are saved and are raised 
up into Heaven. 12. Ye take the bread. 


‘ed 


13. They know that \o7v) the Lord saves men. 


We have so far met in the vocabularies 52 words, which 
give more than 4oo different forms by their inflection. 


LESSON VI. 


IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 


31. VOCABULARY. 
ayw, lead. xaréw, call. 
Bamriftw, BAPTIZE. paptupéw, bear witness, 
éxBiw, cat. ™ SRTYR. 
taw, deve. péeAAw, a772 about. 
{yréw, seek. pévw, “EMAIN. 


For the tenses of the indicative mood see 
$$ 50 and 52. The uses and meanings of the 
various tenses will be explained as we advance. 


32. The imperfect indicative represents an 
act as golig on in time past, — continued, accus- 
tomed, or repeated action; e.g. éypadov, J was 
writing, édvov, 1 was loosing ; éBantibe, he was 
baptizing 


IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 15 


33. All active secondary tenses (§ 52) have 
the same personal endings, as follows: 


Sing. I. -v Plur. 1. -pev 
2a -S 2. -TE 
3. none 3. -v Or -wav 


34. The imperfect indicative of Ato: 


Sg. Plur. 
I. €-Av-o-v, J was loosing. €-AV-o-pev, we were loosing. 
2. €-Av-e-s, you were loosing.  &-Nb-e-Te, ye were loosing. 
3. €-Av-e, He was loosing. €-Av-o-v, they were loosing. 


35. Observe: 1. The variable vowel % as in 
inesvresentea¢ense. 2. Ihe e« before the stem 
Av. This is called augment. 


36. The secondary tenses, besides having dif- 
ferent endings from the primary, have also an 
augment. This augment is of two forms. 1. If 
the verb begins with a consonant, € is prefixed 
—syllabic augment. 2. In tue case of verbs 
beginning with a vowel, tris vowel is length- 
ened to the corresponding long vowel (except a 
gives )—Zemporal augment. In diphthongs 
made with t the first vowel is lengthened, and 
t appears as iota subscript. Other diphthongs 
do not ordinarily have the augment; ¢@.g. axova, 
hear; *jxovov, 1 was hearing; adyw, lead; hyryov, 
l was leading ; éc0iw, cat; noO.ov, [ was eating. 


16 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


ot EXERCISES. 


I. 1. Bardo, éxpive, éypadete. 2. éxpivoper, 
’ , yy ld Voy / 
nKovopmev, EBreTTOV. 3. TWiaTevduEeBa Kal eypado- 
i 
fev. 4. Hryerpes, noOleTe, eytvdoKeTe. 5. €uévo- 
b) = / > \ 4 Wd 
fev Ev TH TAOLW. O. Ayes Ta TéxVa. 7. HaOLov 
“ ” ¢ ) , ’ , \ 
Tov aptov. 8. ot amoatoro. éBamtilov Tovs 
i 4 n 
avOpwrrous. 9. eixov! tovs Sovrous ev TH Ol KO. 


II. 1. We were hearing. 2. He was be- 
lieving. 3. They were taking. 4. You were 
saying. 5. Ye were beholding. 6. They were 
raising up. 7. He was judging. 8. I was eat- 
ing the bread. 9. He was leading the sons 
of men. 10. We saw the face of the Lord. 
11. The God of Heaven saves the children of 
men. 12. Ye were remaining in the law. 


LESSON VII. 


IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PASSIVE. 


38. VOCABULARY. 

aitéw, ask for. Bewpéw, see, observe, THEORY. 
akorovléw, follow. Knptoow, preach, announce. 
yevvaw, beget. welOw, Dersuade. 

So0falw, vlorify. tmAnpow, ///, PLEnty. 


épwrdw, ask (a question). Kpdle, cry. 


1 €yw is an exception to the principle stated in 86, 2, and takes 
the syllabic augment. €exov is contracted to elxov, § 6, 7. 


IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PASSIVE. + 
a. In dofalw, glorify, occurs the double consonant €, 


from «x + o, and pronounced like 4s in rzcks. 


39. The personal endings in the secondary 
tenses of the indicative passive are: 


Stug. 1. -pyy Plur. 1. -pe@a 
2. -co 2. -08e 
3. -To 3. -vTO 


40. The conjugation of \vw is: 


Sing. — Plur. 
I. é-Av-d-pyv, 7 was being loosed. I. é-Av-6-peba 
2. €-Av-ov, you were... 2. €Av-e-obe 
3. €-At-e-To, etc. 3. €AU-0-vTo 


a. In the 2 per. sing. -ero changes to -ov, « drops 
between the two vowels, and eo contracts to ov, § 5, 7. 


Review the present and imperfect indicative 
active and passive of \va, § 56. 


41. The personal endings of the verb give us 
the following: 


a. The ferson of the verb. 

6b. The number of the verb. . 

c. The ¢ense, whether primary or secondary, and by 
this whether past or not. 

ad. The voice of the verb. 

é. The mood to some extent, as we shall see later cn. 


Cc 


18 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


42. The changes in the endings that are to 
be particularly noted are: 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 
“OWL = -W “EOL = -€ Cl -T 
“oO = -€LS “ETO = -OV 
“ETL = ~Eb 
OVOL == -OVTL 


The importance of mastering the personal 
endings of the verb, and, indeed, the whole 
matter of the verb, cannot well be overestt- 
mated. It is safe to say that the student who 
has thoroughly learned the detail of the verb 
given thus far has mastered the greater part of 
the difficulty in the regular verb, and has gone 
far towards gaining a reading knowledge of the 
New Testament. 


The student shouid now be familiar with more than Soc 
different forms. 


43. EXERCISES. 


7 


[. 1. HyeTo kal hye. 2. éBamrifero, Bamrive 
Tal. 3. edvddoKEeTo EV T@ lep@. 4. expivduEBa. 
/ > / i i > / > 
5. oTéAXeTat Kal éotéXreoOe. G6. écwbov. 7. &p 
T@® oikm eboEafero. 8. 6 KUpLos NKOVETO. Q. Ob 
4 L ws 
er. > \ > \ ” % 
aTooToNeL els TOY oUvpavov EPBNeTrOV. 10. Ta 
réxva éxpate.! 


} A neuter plural nom. takes a verb in the singular in Greels. 


FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 1g 


II. 1. We believed and were saved. 2. Ye 
were glorified. 3. He was preaching to the 
men. 4. The son of man was being glorified. 
5. I was judging and I was being judged. 
6. The world trusted in (eis) the Lord. 7. The 
angel of Heaven was heard. 8. We persuade 
the sons of men. 9g. The law was taught in the 
temple. 10. The work of man is judged. 


LESSON VIII. 


FIRST OR A—DECLENSION. 


44, VOCABULARY. 
apxh, n, eginning, ARCHAIC. éxkdnola, n, church ; cf. EC 
ypahn, 1, Scripture, writings. CLESIASTICAL. 
évToAn, 1, commandment. éEovrla, , Power. 
ton, 4, fe, ZOOLOGY. kapdla, 4, Aeart; cf. CAR- 
rapaBoAn, i, PARABLE. DIAC. 
cvvaywyn, 1, SYNAGOGUE. érrayyeAta, n, Promise. 
pavy, n, voice, PHONOgraph. olkla, 4 house. 
vx, 4, soul, PSYCHOlogy. copia, 4, wzsdom, SOPH- 
dpaptia, n, 5272. astry. 


Most of these nouns occur as many as I00 
times in the New Testament. 


a. w in Wyx7, soul, is a double consonant, pronounced 
like Zs in “ps. This now gives us all the letters in Greek. 
Learn the classification of consonants in § 2. 

6. Observe the gender of the nouns in the vocabulary 
{n what letters do the nouns end ? Cf. $$18 and 19. 


20 ‘ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


45. The following paradigms of apyy and 
copia will serve as models for the remaining 
nouns of this form: 


apxh, beginning. codla, wisdom. 
Stem apya- Stem codia- 
Sing. Plur.- =. Sing. Plur. 
N.V. 4px} apxal sodla wodlat 
G. a&px fis apx av codlas sodiav 
D. apxq apx ais copia soplais 
A. a&px hv dpxas codlay sodtas 


46. Observe: 1. The stem ends in 4@, hence 
the term A-declension. 2. The case endings 
are somewhat similar to those already learned 
in the O-declension: (@)*the dat. sing. must 
have zota-subscript ; (6) the acc. sing. ends in -p; 
(c) the gen. plur. in -wv; (@) -o. of the second = 
-at of the first, and -o:s of the second = -ais of 
the first. 3. That nouns having -y in the nomi- 
native retain -n throughout the sing., and nouns 
with sa in the nominative retain the « in all 
cases of the sing. 


47. Nouns that have the acute accent on the 
last syllable (the z/t7ma) are called oxytones ; 
e.g. apxn, Foy. Rule of accent: A// oxrytones of 
the first and second declension have the circum- 
Jlex accent in all genitives and datives. 


FIRST CR A-DECLENSION. 21 


48. Learn the fem. of the art.! » (§24), and 
compare this with the case endings of apy7. 


43. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. at dpaptiat avOpwrav. 2. 7) évtorAn 
Cons. 3. 9 €Eovcla THs éexxAnolas. 4. 0 KUpLOS 
héyet trapaBornv. 5. évTodkjv ypado. 6. év 
> a e / > / Fo hg \ \ 
apyxn o NOYyOos HKOVETO. 7. O OYAOS THY havi 
jKove. 8. al ypadhat éypadhovto. 9. ab amoaTo- 
hee THY erayyeniav Tois avOpdmos Eremtrov. 
10. €V TO KOTLM 1) apuapTia méver. 1. THY é£ov-. 

/ € CN > Q "6 BA 12 € % Md na 
ciav o vlos avOpwrov eye. . 1 dovn év TH 
éonuw éxpate. 


II. r. In the synagogue. 2. In the heart ol 
Men sen hearasvoice:, «4-6 lhe: soullis7saved. 
5. The parable was spoken in the temple. 
Smlicescht the read ofeiite tomen: 37 lhe 
church has power. 8. They were speaking 
a parable in the synagogue. g. It is written 
in the scriptures. 10. We have a promise of 
the Lord. 11. Men preached wisdom to the 
world. 12. In the beginning we heard the 
word. 


1 The forms of the article 6, 7, of, ai, are called proccitics 
(wrpo-kdlvw, lean forward), since they have no accent, and are 
pronounced as part of the following word. 

2 épnuos is a fem. noun in -os. 


22 * ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


LESSON IX. 


A-DECLENSION CONTINUED. 


50. VOCABULARY. 
ayarn, 7, love. elpqvn, 1, Peace. 
GAnGera, yn, Zrvth. nBEépa, 1, day, ePHEMERAL. 
Bacwrela, 4, k2ngdom. Odrkacca, 1, Sea. 
Yi, 1, earth, GEology. kehoadn, 4, Aead. 
yAdooa, 4, cougue, GLOSSArY. payrhs, o, disciple. 
Sikarordvn, 4, *Zghteousness.  -mpodhrns, 6, PROPHET. 
Sofa, , glory. Xapa, 1, Jay. 


apa, 4, Hour. 


Most of these nouns occur more than 100 
times in the New Testament. 


51. The following paradigms furnish models 
for other nouns of this declension : 


Séta, 4, elory. tpodytys, 6, Prophet. 
Stem dofa- Stem mpopyrta- 

Sting. Plur. Sing. Plur. 
N.V. 86 N.V. Sf N. tpopytns N. V. rpodfrar 
G. 86éns G. S0fGv GG. rpodiron G. mpodyntav 
D. 86 D. 86fars =D. rpodaqry D. rpopfrats 
A. 86€av A. 86fas = A. raobtrny A. tpopftas 

V. mpodfjra 


52. Learn pa and copia. § 22. 


FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 23 


53. Observe: 1. When e¢, ¢, or p precedes a 
of the nom. sing., a is retained throughout the 
sing.; and when other lecters precede a, as in 
dd&a, the a is changed in the gen. and dat. sing. 
ton. 2. -ac of the nom. plur., as in the endings 
of the verb, is considered short in determining 
the accent. 


54. Feminine nouns of the first declension 
end in a, a, or 7; masculine nouns, in -T7> or 
‘as. The gen. of masc. nouns is ov, as in the 
O-declension. Masc. nouns in-tns have a in the 
voc. sing. 


a. yn, 9, earth, is contracted from yea, § 6,6. The 
circumflex is found throughout. 


55. The following table shows the case end 
ings of the A-declension : 


Fem. Sing. Masc. Sing. 

N.V. or & n N. a-s n-S 

G. a-s or n-s n-S G. a-to = ov 

D. a-t or 7 n-t D. a-t n-t 

A. @-v or a-v N-v A. av n-v 
V.a a or y 


Mase. and Fem. Plur. 
N. We a-t 

. w-v for a-ev 

- a-lsS 

. a-s for a-vs 


Pon 


24 » ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


56. Observe that a/7 nouns have the same 
plural in the first declension. If 0 be substituted 
for a in this table of endings, the first declension 
will be seen to differ but little from the second. 


57. The following are the principles of zomznal 
accent : : 

1. There are three kinds of accent : the acute 
(“), the circumflex ("), and the grave (‘). 

2. The acute can occur on any one of the 
last three syllables ; the circumflex on either of 
the last two; the grave on the last. 

3. The acute can stand’on a syllable either 
long or short; the circumflex can occur on a 
long syllable only ; ze. a syllable in which there 
is a long vowel or a diphthong. 

4. The accent in the nominative must be 
learned by observation. 

5. The accent tends to remain on the same 
syllable on which it occurs in the nominative. 

6. When the aw/¢zma is short, 

a. The antepenult if accented has the acute. 

6. The penult if accented has the acute, unless it be 


long; in this case the circumflex must occur. 
c. The ultima if accented must have the acute. 


7. When the w/tima is long, 


a. The antepenult cannot be accented. 

6. The penult if accented must have the acute. 

c. The ultima may have either the acute or the cir- 
cumflex. 


FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 25 


Nouns of the first and second declensions 
include about seventy-five per cent of the nouns 
in the New Testament. The importance, there- 
fore, of mastering the vocabularies and forms 
thus far given can be easily appreciated. 


58. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. €yopuev eipnvynv xalayarnv. 2. akovopev 
avro4 THs apyyns. 3. ob mpopHntat Thy dd~av éxov- 
ow. 4. 9 dixatocvyn Kal ) adjOeva ev TO KOT LO 
Euevov. 5. HKOVOV THY ayyéXou hovnv. 6. édevye 
év TapaBorais. 7. 0 mpodytns éypadhe THY évTo- 
Ajv. 8. Tols avOpwTrols yapav éewéeuTreTEe. 9. EV 
TH adrnOeia pwévomev. 10. THY codiav év Trapa- 
Bonrats Exyjpvocev. Il. Ev TH yn Kal ev TH Oadaoon 
eddEales TOV KUpLOV. 12. Tois waOnTals ToD KUpioU 
TiaTEVOVaLV.2 


II. 1. We remain in the truth. 2. The hour 
is announced. 3. Ye have joy in your? hearts. 
4. We see the beginning of righteousness. 
5. The way, the truth, and the life. 6. Joy and 
peace, love and glory. 7. They were remaining 
in the synagogue. 8. They speak in parables. 
g. It is taught inthe Scriptures. 16. The king- 
dom of God and his? righteousness. 


1 Movable v, for which see § 11. 
2 The dative often follows ricrevw, where our de/ieve requires 


the objective case with zz. See lexicon. ~ * Use the article. 
+ From. 


26 ESSENTIALS C¥ NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 


LESSON X. 


ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSIONS. 


59. VOCABULARY. 

ayarntds, beloved. Kakés, ev7/. 

aAXos, other. Kadés, 200d. 

alavios, eternal; cf. AEON. péoos, vzzddle. 

Sikavos, rzghteous. povos, only, alone, MONO< 
éxetvos, iat one. theism. 

étepos, another. ovtos, this one. 

éoxaros, /ast. muotds, fathful. 

WStos, 072e’s OWN, IDIOM. tmpwros, first. 


60. Learn the declension of caX4os, good, iScos, 
one's own, and puxpos, small, little, § 25. 

Observe that the masc. and neut. are in the 
second declension, while the fem. is in the first 
declension. 


61. Note that when ¢ or p precedes the final 
vowel of the stem, as in isos and puxpos, the 
fem. has a in the nom. sing. Cf. 53, 1. 


62. obtos, this one, and éxeivos, that one, are 
demonstrative pronouns, but are declined for 
the most part as adjectives in -os. 

a. ovTos refers to somebody or something near at hand 


or present, while éxetvos refers to that which is more revaute 
at a distance. 





ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSIONS. 27 


63. Learn the paradigm of ovtos, § 26. 

Observe: 1. The rcugh breathing of the nom. 
masc. and fem. sing. and piur. appears in all other 
forms as tr. 2. The vowel of the penult varies 
as the vowel in the ultima. 3. The accent 
remains on the penult. 


64. All substantives used with ottos and 
éxetvos must have the article; e.g. ottos 0 advOpw- 
jos OY 0 avOpwios ovTos, this man. Observe 
that the pronoun must come Jefore the article 
or after the nom. This is called the predicate 
position. Any other position of an adj. would 
be the attrzbutive position. 


65. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. » é€oydtn npépa. 2. ovTOS 0 AéOyos. 
3. €v TO olkm@ exelv@. 4. of Sikatot Kal of KaKoL 
KpivovTal. 5. Tatdia, éryaTn wpa éaTiv. 6. 7 
evTOAN Fw aiwvios! éatwy (is). 7. of KaXOL povoL 
cwovovtat. 8. aitn éotl nmrpworTn Kal peyadn? 
évToAn. 9. éxetvos Sixaids éotiv. 10. of aAXOL 
TOUS vomous edidacKov. II. év éxelvals Tals Hué- 
pals Kakol TpopHtat nKovovTo, 


Dimer neestrst. last: and, the sast, sfirst: 
2. That disciple knows the Scriptures. 3. In 


1 An adj. that has the masc. and fem. alike. Such are called 
adjs. of two endings. e 2. Great. 





28 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


the last day. 4. His own (use art. for /zs) 
know the truth. 5. These children are saved. 
6. This is the work of God. 7. This command- 
ment I write to the brethren. 8. Beloved, we 
have another promise. 9g. On the first day he 
preached in the synagogue. 10. This one knows 
the law and the prophets. 


LESSON XI. 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND eipi, J am. 


66. VOCABULARY. 

ayabds, good. els, prep., z¢o (with acc.). 
aytos, oly. oros, whole. 

GAG, Conj., but. ott, conj., because, that. 
aités, he, himself. ov,” 

yap,! conj., for. ovk, | not. 

8é,1 conj., #zoreover, but. ovx, 

éyo, /. Tovnpds, wicked. 

ell, 7 am. ot, thou, you. 


Each of the words in this vocabulary, except 
the adjectives, occurs more than 1000 times in 
the New Testament. 


1 Words that cannot come first in a sentence are called os¢- 
positives. yap and 6é are such. 

2 ob before consonants; ov« before vowels; ody before the 
rough breathing. 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 29 


67. The personal pronouns in Greek are: 
’ / 4 > / > / > / 
eyo, 1; ov, thou; and autos, avtn, avrto, he, 
she, tt. 


68. Learn the declension of éy# and av, § 40. 

Observe: 1. That the short forms of éyo in 
the sing. have no accent. These are enclitics.} 
The meaning of the dissyllabic forms does not 
differ from the monosyllabic. The former are 
more emphatic. 

2. The endings -ov, -o. =@, and -wy, -as are 
common with the endings of the two declen- 
sions. Associate the meaning of vets with its 
initial vowel. 


69. Learn the declension of autos, § 26, a. 

Observe that, except in the forms avros, 
avuTy, sing., and auto, avrai, plur., we have the 
declension of the article o with the prefix av-. 


70. Observe the following for the uses of 
QUTOS : 

I. avtTos 0 avOpwrros Or 0 avOpwros avtos, the 
man himself. advtos is in the predicate posi- 
tion, 64. 


1 An enclitic gives up its accent for the preceding word. If 
the preceding word has the (’ ) on the antepenult or the (*~) on 
the penult, it receives an additional accent on the ultima; e.g. 
iuatidv pov, my garment, oixbs wou, my house. What is the dif- 
ference between an enclitic and a proclitic ? 


30 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


71. 1. 6 avrtos avOpwrros, the same man. 
When the article precedes adtos, the meaning 
is always the same. 

2. When used alone, as xplvovow adrov, they 
judge him, it is the simple personal pronoun of 
the third person. 


72. The use of conjunctions and prepositions 
is an important thing in inflected languages. 


I. «ai is the ordinary copulative conjunction, 
joining words, phrases, and clauses. 

2. 6€ is an adversative, du, in a mild way. 
It often has little meaning beyond and, indeed. 

3. adda is the strongest adversative, a very 
emphatic dzz. 

4. yap expresses a reason, as Kal yap axovovar 
means and (I say this) for they are listening. 

5. els, tuto, always occurs with the accusa- 
tive, and denotes motion, either expressed or 
implied. 


73. We noticed that the primary active end- 
ing -ut, aS in axov-o-u1, was dropped, and the o 
preceding was lengthened to ». There are 
some verbs that do not drop this pz, and that 
do not have the variable vowel %. Verbs that 
drop the ws belong to the w-conjugation, and 
verbs that do not drop the me belong to the 
ut-conjugation. 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 31 


These make up what are called the -conju- 
gation and the pr-conjugation. Of the latter is 
ejul, Jam. The following is the pres. ind. : 


Sing. ell, Lam. Plur. topév, we are. 
el, thou art. éoré, ye are. 
éoti, he, she, or zt zs. ell, they are. 


a. eiut is for éo-pi; ef is for éo-o/; eioi for éovo’. The 
root eg- may be compared with zs. 

6. All the forms in the pres. ind. of this verb, except «i, 
are enclitic, 68, I, note. 


74. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. éyw O€ cfu. 2. od yap el év TO iep@ 
- 1. 6ym O€ imi. 2. yap el ev TH Lep@. 
>] \ > \ ¢ lal > 
3. avTov dé éxpivopev. 4. avTOL Hels ov KpLVO- 
peOa. 5. TOUTO é€oTL TO Epyov Tov Oeod. 6. adrAA 
> / ¢ a , b] b) A \ \ 
ov AOyols vets cate be. rh &y auTe dé a1) 
= ae , > ¢ n re a wn 
aiwvids éotiv. 8. vpets éote Ta TéKVA TOU Geod. 
rd , > , Nee San ers A 
Q. 0 mpopntns €Lav. 10. Kab nine AUTM O Incods. 
e> / ” 5) > CoA , 
II. 7) adnOGeva ovK éeoTiv ev Hiv. 12. TioTEeveTE 
© baeres SELLE es ae LLCS Agen 3 / 
yap OTL ey@ eipl. 13. ery@ eipe 7 0605 Kal 9 adnOeva 
\ ¢€ / , Sid > ’ / al 
kal ) San. 14. caSPBatov dé éotw év éxeivn TH 
¢€ / 
mepa 


II. 1. But you know me. 2. I glorify Him. 
3. Moreover, we speak the truts. 4. Ye are in 
the world. 5. Darkness!isnotin Him. 6. And 
these things we write to you. 7. Jesus himself 
was not baptizing, but his disciples. 8. Beloved, 


1 hoKotla, 


32 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


we are the children of God. 9. He hears my 
words and does not do them. to. And this is 
the witness of him. 11. He himself is the life. 
12. On (év) the same day he was speaking to 
the people. 13. Thou art the son of God. 


LESSON XII. 


DEPONENT VERBS. 


75. VOCABULARY. 
GaTrepXopat, 90 away. éE€pxopar, go out. 
amrokplvopaL, auswer. EpXopar, come, go. 
yivopar, be, become. nv, Was. 
Siépxopar, go through. ota, Z know. 
Svvapar, az able, can. os, who. 
elaépxopar, enter. Topevopat, 20. 


mporépxopat, come to. 


76. Deponent verbs have the form of the 
middle, § 47, or the passive, but the sezse of 
the active. 


77. Note in the vocabulary above that there 
are many verbs that are composed of épyouar + 
something. These are compound verbs; and 
the forms amd, away, dia, through, eis, into, éx, 
out of, mpos, to, are prepositions. In this verb 
of motion the preposition, it will be seen, gives 


DEPONENT VERBS. 35 


the direction to the motion. So in most verbs 
compounded with prepositions, the idea of the 
verb is only modified by the preposition. 

When the preposition ends in a vowel, as 
amo, ova, the final vowel is dropped before a 
verb that begins with a vowel; e.g. dvépyouas 
is for dua + epyomar.! 


78. The imperfect indicative of efui, am, is as 
follows : 


Sing. FPlur. 
I. Hv (qpnv), 7 was. I. npev (ype0a), we were. 
2. qs (Wo9a), thou wert. 2. T¢, ye were. 
3. HY, he was. 3. Woav, they were. 


a. The forms in parentheses need not be learned at 
present, as they occur but seldom. xnv, 16 times; nucba, 
3 times; 76a, twice. 

79. oida, 7 know, is an irregular verb, but 
conjugated in one tense regularly, as follows: 


Sing. Plur. 
I. ola, 7 know, etc. I. olSapev, we know, etc. 
2. olSas 2. oldare 
3. olde 3. ol8acr 


80. Learn the paradigm of 6s, 7, 6, § 27. 
This pronoun it will be noticed is declined 
like the article, except initial r and the nomina.- 


tive forms 6s, 4, 0, a. 

1 On the same principle, when these compound verbs receive 
the augment the final vowel of the preposition is dropped; ¢.g. 
arooré\iw, J send, améoteddov, J was sending. The prepositions 
weol and mpé retain their final vowel. Cf. note, p. 58. 

D 


34 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 


81. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. dpets ov olSate avtov. 2. epyetar o 
\ / a? / > mm / 
Di{rumos Kal Adyer TO "Avdpéa. 3. EV TO KOTO 
> Nee / SN > > / Cee, / 
AV Kal 0 KOT LOS AUTOV OUK EAapBavev. 4. 7 EVTOA?) 
, » 
€oTiv 6 AOyos Ov axKoveTe. 5. 1) Wpa EpxKETat. 
5 / CIA 4 ’ \ > / 
6. ov ypadw vpiv btt ovK« oldate THY adyBeLav 
bd NX ¢/ 5] > / Va , TIMI AAS a 
avdvAa Ste oldaTe aUTHY. 7. 0 AkoVvwW aT apyY7s 
yuwookw. 8. Kal attn éotly 1) érayyedia iv 
> \ > / aI \ 76 ¢/ 4 e / 
autos émrayyéAreTal.! Q. Kai oldas OTL ) amapTia 
b] > A > > / > \ \ \ , ey 
év avT@ ovK éotiv. 10. éyw S€ Tov vomov oida. 
€ be eet p- > ® \ > / U 
II. 0 6€ Kalpos® éotiv év ¢ THv eEovclav KapBa- 
b \ ’ 10 v4 Ce, ? / € / 
vowev. 12. TUS YAP OVK OLOE OTL 7 ETAT NEPA 
epyeTar ;” 


II. 1. We know that we are saved. 2. Ye 
enter the synagogue. 3. They are becoming 
the children of God. ‘4. In the beginning was 
the Word. 5. The Word was with (pds, acc.) 
God. 6. The truth, moreover, is glorified in 
Him. 7. I know that His commandment is life 
everlasting. 8. What I say to you was from 
the beginning. 9. The life which we live is 
eternal. 10. On that day was the Sabbath. 
11. Whom He knows the world does not 
know. 


1 érayyéANona, J announce. 
2 See § 14 for the punctuation in Greek. 
8 Time. 


PRESENT ACTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 35 


LESSON XIII. 


PRESENT ACTIVE SUBZJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 


82. VOCABULARY. 
alpw, fake away. my, adv., zow, already. 
aphv, verily. iva, conj., 2 order that. 
arobvqrKw, Ze. pera, prep. with gen., with; 
atrorTéAdw, Send. with acc., after. 
yé, 2udeed, at least. BN, oF. 
Séxopar, recezve. viv, adv., ow. 
Sua, prep. with gen., through ; ovr, adv., not yet. 

with acc., 02 account of. Tmapakahéw, beseech. 
el, Conj., 2/. wept, prep. with gen., 
éx, prep. with gen., out of, of. concerning ; with acc., 
ért, adv., stz//, yet. around. 


ms, adv., how. 


83. The terms primary and secondary apply 
to the tenses of the indicative only. 

The subjunctive mood, as in English, denotes 
a doubt or a contingency. Unlike the English, 
however, the subjunctive in Greek is very 
common. There are but two tenses that are 
usually found, the present and the aorist. The 
perfect is very rare. 


84. The pres. subjv. act. of Avo is: 


Sing. 1. \b-o Plur. 1. d6-o-pev 
2. Avd-7s 2. Av-y-Te 
3. At-y 3. Ad-w-or 


36 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


85. The pres. subjv. of e¢ui is: 


Sing. 1. @ Plur. 1. o-pev 
2. 4-s 2. H-TE 
3-0 3. aor 


86. Note that the pres. subjv. of ecuéi is the 
same as the personal endings of the regular 
verb; and while the indicative has the variable 
vowel %, the subjunctive has the corresponding 
long vowel °/n, 


a. The personal endings are those of the primary 
active indicative. 


87. The subjunctive follows iva, 2x order that. 


Examine the following : 


epxerat iva axovy, he comes that he may hear. 
muoTevouev iva py apaptavopev, we believe in order that 
we may not Sin. 


88. Rule of syntax: Clauses of purpose take 
the subjunctive with wa. The negative 2s py. 


89. The following forms illustrate the present 
active infinitive : 


Av-etv, a&Kov-erv, €X-etv, pev-eLv, 
to loose. to hear. to have. to abide. 


-ev = ¢€ + ending -ev of pres. inf. For -eepv 
contracting to -ezy, see § 6, 7. 


PRESENT ACTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 37 


90. The participle is very common in Greek, 
and it is necessary to master its uses as soon as 
possible. -wy is the ending of the pres. act. nom. 
masc. sing.; ¢.g.: 

6 A€éywv,. the one saying, he who says. 


6 alpwv, the one taking away, he who takes away. 
6 axovuv, the one hearing, he who hears. 


The article and participle in this use are equiva- 
lent, as is seen, to a dependent clause in English. 


91. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. ovtos épyetar iva éyn Tepl THS ad 
/ > \ = \ / e lal c/ ¢€ ec BA 
Oelas. 2. apnv, aunv Ayo vplv OTL) Opa ovTYH 
> / / ¢€ lal C/ yy lal 1 lal 
€otiv, 3. déyeTar ipuds iva ett Copev.' 4. TAS 
ye OULaTat owlew ; 5. weTa TAVTA avToOls AéEyeEL. 
6. Tas dpaptias nuay aipe. 7. éx TOU Bavatou 
q . ¢€ av 
els THY Cwnv éyerpoucOa. 8. 0 wévav ev avT@ ExEL 
[ | peels Cant 9 an 1 \ 10 \ > rn 
Sanv arwviov. 9. 0 ayaTa@v* Tov adeXdov auvTov 
n , / \ 
év TH ayatn pévet. 10. éy@ O€ Epyouar iva Tov 
, 
KOCLOV cola. 


II. 1. They baptize in order that they may 
glorify God. 2. Already we become the chil- 
Gierecimtiiiiewers Yevare able to know the 
truth. 4. How can He take away our sins? 
5. Through Him they are saved and have eter- 
nal life. 6. After these things they go away 


1 For fdwpyer, § 5, 2. 


38 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


intothe desert: »7--- He comes*thateiie sum, 
save sinners (dpaotondos). 8. I am willing to 
hear the Gospel. 9s. Verily, verily the one lov- 
ing his brother is not a servant. 10. Ye are 
not able to hear my word. 11. That one was 
from the beginning and tiath is in Him. 


LESSON XIV. 


PRESENT PASSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 


92. VOCABULARY. 
apa, adv., at the same tine. —H, CONj., Or. 
avrt, prep. with gen., zzstead Kabds, adv., just as. 

of. Kavos, 7227. 
ams, prep. with gen., from.  owmds, remaining. 
domatopar, salute. ovv, adv., therefore. 
Satpdviov, DEMON. mpds, prep. with acc., Zo, 
éav, conj., 2f : toward. 
evayyédtov, cospel. mporkuvew, worship. 
evploke, find. Typéw, keep. 


93. The pres. pass. subjv. of Avo is: 


Sing. 1. b-w-par Plur. 1. dv-6-peba 
2. Adv-y 2. Av-y oH 
3. Av-y-TaL 3. Adv-w-vrar 


94. Observe: 1. The long vowel fm, as in 
the active. 2. The personal endings are the 
pass. primary endings of the indicative. 3. -y 
of 2 per. sing. is for -yaau. 


PRESENT PASSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 39 


95. The subjunctive is used in exhortation. 
Examine the following : 


evpiokwpev THY GAnOeav, let us find the truth. 
py aywopela eis THY apaptiav, let us not be led in sin. 


96. Rule of syntax: Zhe first person plural 
lof the subjunctive) may be used to express an 
exhortation. The negative is py. 


97. Examine the following: 


e€av Kpivw de eyo, if [, moreover, judge. 
€av py A€ywpev THV dAnOeav, 7f we say not the truth. 


Rule of syntax: The subjunctive follows éav 
(= 2f); the negative is pn. Cf. § 124. 

98. The pres. pass. inf. may be seen in the 
following verbs : 


Av-e-c Bat, a&kov-e-c at, kply-e-o Ban, 


to be destroyed. to be heard. to be judged. 
What is the pres. pass. inf. ending ? 


99. Examine the tollowing: 


6 Kplv-0-pevos, the one being judged. 
0 akov-0-pevos, ihe one beirg heard. 


This ending -wevos is the passive participle end- 
ing in nom. masc. sing, as -wy is in the active. 


The ending -os is declined like canos, § 25. 


40 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


What was said in 90 about the sense of the 
active participle applies equally to the passive. 


100. EXERCISES. 


, UA \ 
I. 1. dorafwpeba tods aderdovs. 2. Kalas 
a 9 / na , 
€xelvos OlKaLos eaTLY MEV OLKAaLOL NmELS. 3. EV 
rn o v \ 
TO Meow Exnpucoe NEyov OTL EpyeTal Els TA idva. 
> ¢ lal \ > >’ 
4. pevete ev €ol Kal ey@ év vply. 5. éy@ ovK eipl 
, / ie) Oe $9 a , \ 
pLovos OTL avTOS peT Emov eoTiv. 6. BXrEmEL TOV 
\ / > A 
KUPLOV EpXOMEvoY TmposS aUTOV Kal EyEeL aVT@ 
e ¢ / A / 
Otros éotw 0 aipwv Tas apaptias TOV KOoopov. 
A na ? na / / 
7. eb Duels peéveTe EV TO OVO Emov, wanTal pov 
‘ > \ , \ > / aN \ 
éote Kal yiwwoKete THY AadnOeav. 8. éav Oé 
/ b] , \ b) / / aN > \ 
Kpiva é€yo, THv adnbecav Kpivw. 9. €aVv ey@ 
> / 
dofalwo éuavtov (myself), » Sofa pov ovdév 
(nothing) éotuv. 


II. 1. Letuskeepthis commandment. 2. Let 
us receive the truth. 3. If, therefore, we are the 
children of God, let us do His works. 4. Let us 
believe that through Him we have eternal life. 
5. They were willing to receive the Gospel. 
6. He who believes is saved and has eternal 
life. 7. Let us not speak concerning these 
things. 8. A new commandment write I unto 
you. g. If we say that we have not sin, the 
truth is not in us. 10. He preaches the Gospel 
of the kingdom of God. 


THIRD DECLENSION, 4) 


LESSON XV. 
THIRD DECLENSION: NEUTER NOUNS IN a. 


101. VOCABULARY. 


aipa, 76, Glood; cf. HEMOR- otopa, 16, 220uth. 


RHAGE. capa, 76, Jody. 
OAnpa, Td, we//. vv£,1 4, 2zeht. 
Ovopa, 16, zane; Cf. NOMI- tovs, 0, foot. 

NATE. mip, 76, fire, PYROZEeChUICS. 
rvevpa, T6, SHzrit. capt, 4, flesh. 
Pipa, 76, word; cf. RHETORIC. ods, 76, ight, PHOTOgraphy. 
omréppa, 76, Seed. xelp, n, Zand, CHIROgraphy. 


102. The third declension is ordinarily called 
the consonant declension from the fact that the 
stem of the nouns usually ends in a consonant. 
A few nouns, as we shall see later, end in a 
close vowel, ¢ or v, or in the diphthong ev. 


103. It is necessary in declining a noun of 
this declension to have the stem. This is deter- 
mined by dropping the genitive ending -os. 


104. The nominative is formed from the stem 
in various ways. The xomznative, therefore, is 
not easily determined till we know the genztzve. 


1 These monosyllables have peculiarities of form which will 
be explained later. The frequency of their occurrence is the 
reason for introducing them thus early. 


42 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


105. “The declension of dvopa, name, is as 
follows : 


Sing. Plur. 

N. A. V. dvopa N. A. V. ovépara 
G. ovépatos G. ovoparov 

D. ovépare D. ovépact 


106. Observe the following : 


1. The genitive ending is -os. 

2. The dative ends in -:, as in the first and 
second declensions. Here, however, it does not 
appear as zofa-subscript, but is written in the 


line. 
3. In the plur. @ is the same as ine the 


~Q-declension, so likewise -wv. 

4. The dat. plur. ends in -o, with which 
compare -ts of the A- and O-declensions. 7 of 
the stem drops before -au. 

5. The stem is ovouat-. The nominative is 
‘he mere stem, final t being dropped. 


107. Learn the declension of vv&, night, § 28. 


108. Rule of accent: Monosyllables of the 


consonant declension accent the ultima in all 


genitives and datives. -wv of the genitive plural 


2s circumfplexed. 


1 The only single consonants that can stand at the close of a 
word in Greek are v, p, s. At! other letters which would occur 
here are dropped. 


THIRD DECLENSION CONTINUED. 43 


109. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. ta pnuata Cwijs aiwviou eyes. 2. dvopa 
Hv avt@o “lwavns. 3. ToUTO é€oTL TO TOuAd jou. 
4. ywwooKes TO OéXAnpma TOU Oeod. 5. OéreTE aye 
eb (against) nds TO aiwa Tod avOpwrrov TovTou 5 
6. oTOs éotiv 0 BarrTiloy év TvevmaTt ayio. 7. 7 
vu& épxyetar. 8. o7réppa 'ABpadu éopev. 9. 0 
Noyos cap& éyéveto (became). 10. ov TO eicEpyo- 
Mevov Els TO TOMA Kool (defiles) avOpwrrov ara 
TO eepyouevovy €k TOV aTOMATOS TOUTO KoLVOL 
avOpwrov. 1. vpmels éote TO HOS TOD KOcMOV. 
12. ef d€ 7) yelp cov 7) 0 Tovs cov cKavdanri€er 
(offend) oe Exxowov (cut off) avtov. 13. TO has 
év TH oKoTLa halves. 


II. 1. They believe on (eis) Hisname. 2. He 
baptizes you, moreover, in the holy spirit. 3. He 
is able to save by (év) night and day. 4. Let us 
believe on the name of the Lord. 5. The word 
becomes flesh. 6. These are the good seed. 
7. This is the will of God. 8. He speaks 
through the mouth of God. 9g. The bread of 
life is my flesh. 10. Verily, verily I say to you, 
he who believes on His name has eternal-life. 


44 _ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


LESSON XVI. 


THIRD DECLENSION: STEMS IN -t AND -€p. 


110. VOCABULARY. 
avip, 0, 77aN. Ktiots, 4, creation. 
avaoracts, y, resurrection. pHtnp, y, other. 
yaos, n, knowledge. TapaKkrAnots, 1, exhortation. 
Sivapis, 4, Power, DYNA- matip, o, father. 
MITE. wiotis, 4, faith. 
OAtpus, 4, ¢rzbulation. moX1s, 1, CeLy. 
kplots, 4, judgment. cuvelSnots, 1, Comsczence. 


111. Above are given the most common nouns 
in the New Testament in -is, stem in -. They 
are declined as follows: 


wots, city. 


Stem zroX-. 


Sing. Plur. 
N. ads N. V. aéAeus 
G. 1éXews G. méoXeov 
D. oder D. moder 
A. woAuw A. modes 
V. wore 


112. The following is to be noted regarding 
the declension of this class of nouns: 


I. e takes the place of the final stem vowel ¢ - 
in all cases except the nom., acc., and voc. sing. 


THIRD DECLENSION CONTINUED. 45 


2. The gen. sing. has -ws, not -os. 

3. The accent in gen. sing. and plur. is irregu- 
lar, and here the acute accent is found on the 
antepenult when the ultima is long. 

4. € unites with es of the dat. sing., and forms 
a diphthong ez. 

5. The acc. sing. adds simply -v to the stem. 

6. In the vocative the mere stem occurs. 

7. The nom. plur. -evs is for ees, § 6, 7. 


113. Learn the declension of zarnp, § 33, 
and a. 


Observe the following : 


1. The nominative ends in -np, while the 
stem ends in -ep. 

2. The gen. and dat. sing. drop this e of the 
stem, and take the accent on the last syl- 
lable. 

3. Voc. sing. has recessive accent (3, J, 1). 

4. The dat. plur. has ap for ep. 


114. Learn avyp, man, § 33. Note that when. 
ever ep of the stem would be followed by a vowel, 
6 takes the place of the e. The same peculiari- 
ties of accent obtain as in watnp, but -wv of the 
gen. plur. is circumflexed. 


46 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


115. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. éyo eye ) avactacis Kal Son. 2. 7) 
miatis cov cwle: ce. 3. €v TH SuVaper TOU TvEv- 
patos eis Vaniralav eicépyetat. 4. attn d€ éotw 
) Kpicls OTL TO das EpyeTaL Eis TOV KOTpMOV. — 
5. ypaddho én’ (on) abtov TO dvopa Tod Beod pov 
Kal TO dvopa THs TONEwWS TOV Deod ov. 6. avdpa 
ob ywwackw. 7. viv Kpiois éotiv Tob KooMov 
tovtov. 8. iets oldauev TOV TaTépa Kal TD 
untépa. 9. €v TO KOoL@ OALYLY ExeTE. 0. EAE 
yov obv avT@ Tov (where) éoTLv 6 TaTHP Gov. 
Il. 7o® Ta Epya Tod TaTpds pov. 12. &v TH 
hepa THs Kploews oper (shall have) xapav Kab 
elpnuny. 


II. 1. The faith which we have saves men. 
2. Life is in him who has the spirit of faith. 
3. This is my father and my mother. 4. He 
who does the will of God abides in the truth. 
5. We have power to become the children of 
God. 6. He is the resurrection and the life. 
7, We are raised from the dead on (éy) the day 
of judgment. 8. He who hears my word comes 
not into judgment. 9g. In that city he preached 
the Gospel. 10. For those days are tribula- 
tion 


FUTURE INDICATIVE. 47 


LESSON XVIT. 


FuTURE INDICATIVE. 


116. VOCAPULARY. 

a8ikéw, do wrong. viKkdw, Conguer. 

abtkla, n, wurighteousness. Opodoyéw, Confess. 
abdikos, n, ov, “urighteous. mepitatéw, walk. 
avaBr€érw, look up. cuvayo, gather together. 
dpvéopat, dey. UTayo, 0 AWA). 
apxopar, beg77. havepdw, make manifest. 
Bavpatw, wonder at, marvel. hoPéopor, fear. 

pioéw, ace. prrdccw, guard. 


117. The fut. ind., as in English, denotes 
what is going to take place. 
The following is the fut. ind. act. of Wo: 


SINE. Fite 
I. At-o-w, / shall loose, 1. db-0-o-pev, we shall loose, 
2. Ad-o-Ers etc. 2. Av-o-e-TE, etc. 
3. Ad-o-eu 3. Adv-c-ov-o 


118. The fut. ind. mid.! of Ave is: 


Sing. Plur. 
I. Av-or-o-par I. Av-o-6-peba 
2. Ab-o-y 2. Av-o-e-0 be 
3. Ad-o-e-TAL 3. Ab-c-o-vTat 


1 For the middle voice, see §§ 47, 48. The middle and pas: 
sive are the same in form, except in the future and the aorist, 
which we shall learn later. 


48 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


119."Observe that the future has primary 
endings, and differs from the present in the use 
of c, with which compare sa// in the English 
future. Note that o appears before the variable 
vowel %. Hence, while the present is formed 
by adding % to the stem, the future is formed 
by adding o%. ; 

Learn the fut. ind. of ecui, § 65. 


120. The future of ddccéw, do wrong, is adiKy- 
o-w; of viKdw, conguer, is vikj-ow; Of picéo, 
hate, is puoj-ow; of davepdw, make mantfest, is 
ghavepwo-cw. From these forms it can be seen 
that a short final vowel must be lengthened before 
o% of the future. «=n, a=, 0=o. 


121. The future of aya, lead, is aEw ; of adpyo- 
pat, begin, is dpEowat; of dudrdacow, guard, stem 
gurak-, durd—w. From which it is seen that 
stems in x, y, vy form with o%, &%. 


122. The future of Br™éra, see, is Brea; of 
avactpépa, turn, is avactpéyw ; Of virta, wash, 
stem wB-, is vivo. Stems in 7, 8, 6+ 0% = 
W%. 

123. The future of cafw, save, stem cw6-, is 


cwcw; of wei0w, persuade, is Teicw. From 
which observe that stems in 7, 6, @ would 


1 But a after e, «, or p is not changed to 7, but a. Cf. 58, 1. 


FUTURE INDICATIVE. 49 


hav2 simple o% in the future. The consonant 
drops before the tense sign. 


124. The various forms of future stems may 
be seen by examining the following summary : 


Vowel Stems. Mute Stems. 


- a 0 i 
x c ae % bs Labials, 7, B,P+o% =W% 
pe Palatals, Ky ¥> X +a%= E% 


2 ow 6 
aN ; by = ay Linguals, 7, 6, 0+ 0% =0% 


Other vowel stems hardly No stems end in the double 
occur. consonants €, ¢, y, nor in o. 


The future of liquid stems, A, p, v, p, will be 
explained in a future lesson. Aside from stems 
in these four letters, we may now be able to 
form the future of any regular verb in Greek. 


125. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. 4 wistis cov cwoe ce. 2. ypavo 
fa) A = € / an / 
TAUTA, TALOIa, UMiV. 3. O KOTMOS HMas pLoNnoel. 
4. Twéeurpw TOV vioy fou TOY ayaTNTOV. 5. OUTw 

/ a > 

(this) Kat 6 TaTHp o ovpavios ToLjoel Viv. 6. ako- 

ae S 
Novbnaw cot, Kupie. 7. ayamnoes Kvplov Tov 

\ ’ e/ N/ \ b) A aA lal 

Oeov év OAH Kapdia cov Kai év OAn TH YuXH cov 

\ ’ vA fal / £ ee 3 \ 
Kal év OAn TH Sravola (mind) cov: avTn éoTiv 
¢ / 9 / s € / > lal c/ > 
n TpwTn EVTOAH. 8. OMoOYNTwW aAUTOLS OTL OU 
al es / a 2) / 
ylvooKm Upas. Q. EV ExElvn TH NEPA EV TH OVO- 

1 See § 2 for the classification of consonants. 
E 


50 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


wati pov aitnoecbe, Kal ov A€éyw Luly OTL eyw 
épwticw Tov matépa Tepl Uuadv. 10. ovTa@s dé 
icovra of éryatow TpaToL. II. melcowey THY 
kapdlav nav. i2. odtws éatar Kai (also) ev 
Tals Huepats TOD viod Tod avOpwrov. 

II. 1. There shall be tribulations. 2. We shall 
do the truth. 3. He who knoweth the truth 
and doeth it shall live. 4. Ye shball.be with! 
me this day. 5. They shail hate us because 
we are not of (éx) the world. 6. We shall love 
the Lord God with all our heart. 7. I shall do 
the will of my father. 8. The son of man shall 
believe on (eés) the word. 9g. They shall bear 
witness concerning Him that He is the light. 
10. We shall seek Him. 11. There shall be joy 
in Heaven because he is saved. 12. He shall 
glorify God. 


LESSON XVIII. 


THIRD DECLENSION: MUTE STEMS. 


126. VOCABULARY. 

alov, 6, agé, ON. Kaivds, 22W. 
adAStpios, another's, strange. «pipa, 76, Judgment 
Bpapa, rd, food. olkodSopéw, buzld up. 
earls, 1, Lope. apex Burepos, elder. 
erounos, ready. okotia, , darkness. 
Sovredw, de a servant. havepds, manifest. 


Xapts, 1, 27ace. 
1 werd with Gen, 


THIRD DECLENSION CONTINUED. 51 
127. Observe the following: 


I. €Amis, hope, stem ermid-; vv&, night, stem 
vukt-; Trovs, foot, stem trod-; capé, flesh, stem 
capx-; pas, light, stem gat-; yxdpis, grace, 
stem yapir-. 

2. In all these nouns note that the stem ends 
in a mute (§ 2), and that the nominative is 
formed by adding s to the stem. For the 
euphonic changes that occur with s and the 
mutes, see 124. 


128. In aliav, age, stem awv-; Hryeuov, leader, 
stem nyewov-; and yep, hand, stem yeup-, we 
have liquid stems which form the nominative 
from the mere stem. A _ short vowel, as in 
nyewov-, may be lengthened. 


a. apxwv, prince, ruler, has the stem apxovr-, but does 
not add s for the nominative, which is the mere stem with 
t dropped and o lengthened to w. 


129. Learn the declension of ydpis, édais, 
and apywr, § 28, and aiar, § 32. 


130. When nouns with stem in 7, 6, or @ pre- 
ceded by « or v are not accented on the ultima, 
the acc. sing. has v, the mute being dropped ; 
€.g. “apis, YaplT-, acc. yapiv; but édzris, ed7L6-, 
has acc. édmida. Cf. 112, 5. 


52 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


131. .The voc. sing. is rare and is usually the 
same as thenom. édmis, however, has voc. éAzré. 


132. When -vt- of the stem would come before 
-ot of the dat. plur., both the letters are dropped 
and the preceding vowel is lengthened (0 to ov) ; 
e.g. apyev, stem apyorr-, dat. plur. apYouar. 


133: EXERCISES. 


J / / \ a A > / ' 
I. 1. evpicxers ye xapiv TapaT@ Gem. 2. avTos 
b] ’ ” / \ 1 be / / b / 
eat év TO howti. 3. vuvil dé pever TIOTIS, EATS, 
a / 
ayarn. 4. iete (behold) tas xelpads pou Kai TOUS 
/ ¢ / / / 
mosas pou OTL &yw elms avTos. 5. 0 €abiwy éx 
lal an ¢e lal 
Tovrou Tov aptou bynoet eis TOV aid@va. 6. 0 Inaods 
\ . lal 
pyetas eis THY oiKklay TOD dpxovTos. 7. ov yap 
> ig \ as > ’ ig x ‘e \ e ” 
€oTe UTO VOMOV AAN VUiTro xapiv. 8. Kal O EX@V 
\ > /> 7 > > 4 ’ a , € 
Thy érmida tavTnv em (22) avT@ TwleTAl. YQ. O 
lal la) / an 
52 S0dXo0s od péver ev TH OlKia Eis TOV al@Va, O VLOS 
wévet eis TOV al@va. 10. YapiTL? dé Peod Eipe O Eipe. 
Ald id / 5 ae / \Y .e , 
II. cov éativ ) Bacirela Kai 1) Svvapmis Kal y d0€a 
an n / \ 
eis Tos al@vas. 12. xdpis bpiv Kai eipnvn arro 
a lal / lal - lal 
Geod marpos juav cat Kupiov ‘Incov Xpictov. 


II. 1. Truth abides forever. 2. Now have we 
faith and hope. 3. I write these (things) with 
my hand. 4. The light appears in the darkness. 

1. may be added to adverbs and pronouns to emphasize 


them. The accent in all such cases is upon the ¢; ¢.g. odx Is 
often odxl; viv, vuvl. 2 Cf. § 157. 


THIRD DECLENSION CONCLUDED. 53 


5. We are saved by faith. 6. He who has love 
in his heart has grace. 7. We are not under 
the law, but under grace. 8. By the grace of 
God we are what we are. g. Behold my hands 
and feet. 


LESSON XIX. 


THIRD DECLENSION: NEUTER NOUNS, STEMS IN eo-; 
MascuLINE Nouns, STEMS IN ev-. 


134. VOCABULARY. 

&pxrepevs, 0, chief priest. iepeds, Priest, HIERArchy. 
Bactreds, 0, £72. pédXos, 76, 7zentber. 

Yyévos, Td, 1QCE. pEpos, TO, Part. 

Ypappareds, 0, scrzbe. _ ous, T6, Car. 

yuvn, wowan. TAGs, 16, sz2ltetude. 
€Ovos, 76, 2a¢z072. oKdtos, T6, darkness. 

€00s, 76, Cvsto7t, ETHICS. TéAos, 76, erd. 

€deos, T6, Pity. Vdwp, 76, water, HYDRO/ogy. 


Neuter nouns with the nominative in -os and 
the stem in -ec form an important class oi nouns 
of the third declension. The most common 
examples are given above. 


135. Learn the declension of yévos, vace (§ 30). 
Observe the following. 


1. In the gen. and dat. sing. the o of the stem 
is dropped between the two vowels, and yéveos 
contracts into yévous.. 


54 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


2. In all cases of the plur. the o of the stem 
is dropped; ryévea, yevéwv are contracted to yevn, 
yevav ; see §§ €, 8 and 6, 6. . 


136. Learn the declension of Baairevs, king 
($ 31), with which compare the vowel stem 
of mroXs. 


137. For some irregular nouns of the third 
declension, as yuvy, woman, Opie, hair, ods, ear, 
mous, foot, bdwp, water, yelp hand, see § 34. 
Only such forms are given as occur in the New 
Testament. 


138. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. aN ovm@ Td Tédos éoTiv. 2. avd Eb 
\ > / \ > / A , 

Bacirevs ‘lovéatwy. 3. TO evayyéXLov 0 KnpvtTw 
év tots Overt. 4. ovK EXELS pépos MET pod. 
5. of d€ apytepets Kal of mpecBvTepor Errercav 
(persuaded) rods bydous. 6. Eis TA EOVN TropeEvo- 
peOa. 7. ovK Eyouev Bacirhéa. 8. ev evi (one) 

, \ 1 / BA / > 4-2 Le) 
o@pmaTtt TOAAA! wérn Eyouev. Q. yapls amd ‘Inood 
Xpiotod, 0 dpyov Tov Bactrhéwv TIS ys. 10. Kal 
54 \ n°) / la) 5 i 
érraice (struck) Tov Tod apylepéws SovrAOV: HV Oe 
jvowa Ta SovAM Madryos. I1. eueddev *Inoods 
’ , € \ a wy \ > ¢e \ 
atroOvncKev uTep ( for) TL9 EOvous Kal ovy v7rép 
Tov €Ovous povov, 12. xapis, édeos, eipyvn ara 
deod tratpds kal Xpiorod *Inood tod Kupiov hyov. 


1 Many. 


FIRST AND SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE. 55 


Mistry care] HOt ilesthesdarkness., m2.eainis 
one is the king of the Jews. 3. For we know 
in (éx) part. 4. The scribes and the chief 
priests will say this. 5. They know that he 
isenotetue: king cof this world. .6, A great 
multitude will follow him (dat.). 7. We have 
a part in the kingdom of God. 8. I say to 
you brethren that the end is not yet. 9. We 
shall make him king. 


LESSON XX. 


FIRST AND SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE. 


139. VOCABULARY. 
ayiatw, sanctify. amréBavov, / died. 
Soxéw, seem, think. €Badov, 7 threw. 
Bedopar, behold. éyevounv, 7 became. 
KkaWapil{e, purcfy. elSov, 7 saw. 
kataBalvo, go down. elrrov, / sazd. 
Opaw, see. evpov, J found. 
mapadkapBave, *eCeZVve. mAVov, 7 went or came. 
tubdrdw, blind. mapédaBov, / recetved. 


140. The aorist is the most common tense in 
Greek to represent what has taken place. Thus, 
T loosed, I did loose, or [ have loosed would most 
likely be expressed in Greek by one word, é-Av-ca, 
the aor. ind. act. of Avo. 


56 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


141. The aorist indicative of Avo is: 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Sing. 1. €-v-0a é-Av-o'd-pyVv 
2. €-Av-ca-s é-Av-ow (for é-Av-ca-co) 
3. €-Av-oe €-A0-ca-To 
Plur. 1. é-db-0a-pev é-Av-od-peba 
2. é-Av-ca-Te é-Ad-ca-obe © 
3. €-Av-ca-v #-AU-ca-vTO 


a. In 2 pers. sing. ind. mid. o drops between the two 
vowels a o, and these contract to w, § 5, I. 


142. Observe the following on the formation 
of the aorist: 


1. The augment as in the imperfect. 

2. The tense suffix is ca, which changes to 
oe in 3 per. sing. act. 

3. The personal endings are secondary. v of 
I per. sing. act. is dropped. 


143. Compare the suffix oa with d or ed in 
the past tense in English; e.g.: 


3 
€-Av-cra-s é-rAnpo-cra-pev 
loose-ad-you fill - ed-we 


144. The same principles of augment are 
found in the aor. ind. as in the imperf. ind., 36, 
and the same euphonic changes with oa of the 
aor. as with o% of the fut., 120-124. 


FIRST AND SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE. 57 


145. Notall verbs have the aorist in oa, which 
is calied the frst aortst, but form the tense on 
the simple stem of the verb by the use of the 
variable vowel %. This is called the second 
aorist. 


146. The 2 aor. ind. of Radda, throw, theme 
or stem Ban., Is: 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Sting. 1. €-Bad-o-v é-Bad-d-pyv 
2. &-Bad-e-s é-Bad-ov (for é-Bad-e-co) 
3. €-Bad-e é-Bad-e-To 
Plur. 1. €-Bad-o-pev é-Bad-d-pe80 
2. €-Bad-e-re é-Bad-e-00e 
3. €-Bad-o-v €-Bad-o-vTo 


a. Note that the only difference in form between the 
2 aor. and the imperf. of the same verb is a difference ‘n 
stem; e.g. €PadX-ov, imperf., has the pres. stem Badd-, 
while €-Bad-ov, 2 aor., has the simple stem or theme, 


Baa-. 


147. Kew verbs have both aorists. There ts 
no aifference whatever in meaning between a 
first aorist and a second aortst. 


148. The following 2 aor. are given in the 
vocabulary : amro@vncKka, theme Oapr-, 2 aor. azeé- 
Gavov; yivowat, theme yev-, 2 aor. éyevouny ; 
opaw, theme 0-, 2 aor. eidov; ebdpicxw, theme 
evp-, 2 aor. evpov ; épxouwat, theme ed6-, 2 aor. 


58 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


ANOov ;.TraparapBave, theme AaB-, 2 aor. wape- 
NaBov; eizrov has no present. 

Note that the second aorist has the simple 
theme of the verb and the %. 


149. The difference in form between a first 
aorist and a second aorist may be illustrated by 
the following: 


I. dyamdw, Zove.... 1 aor. q-yamh-ca-pev, dove-d-we 
DPA GARG ee ile eae: I aor. é-AdAn-oa-v,  talk-ed-they 
3. Baddow, throw... 2 aor. ¢Par-o-pev, threw-we 
4. AapBave, cake... 2 aor. €-AaB-o-v, took-they 


In 1 and 2 the past tense in both the Greek 
and the English is formed by adding some- 
thing, — oa, and d or ed. 

In 3 and 4 no suffix is found, but the change 
is in the stem of the verb. Badd-, throw, Bar, 
threw; NapBava, take, NaB, took. 


150. EXERCISES. 


4 
1 2. éyparra 
bpiv, waidia, OTL ylwooKeTEe Tx TATépa. 3. NKOU- 
¢ ? if 
gate OTL) eoxaTn wpa épyeTat. 4. Kal ovK oidE 
lal e / e/ ¢e a ’ Ys A 
mov (where) vTayer OTL ) oKETLAa ETUPAWTE TOUS 
> \ ’ an 95 
opOarpors avTov. 5. els Ta ldva AOE Kai ot 
yA > \ ty / >] X ,’ / 
idiot avTov ov tapédaBov. 6. avTos nyatnoev 


I. 1. caOas éxetvos trepreTatncen. 


nas. 7. 0 cacducba atrayyédXopmev Kal vpiv. 


1 wept and mpé do not drop the final vowel before the augment. 


FIRST AND SECOND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE. 59 


\ \ ’ AS A ” ’ , 
8. mepi yap é“ov exetvos eypawev. 9. eOeacavTo 
é 2 / , 
& émroincev Kal éTlaTEevoay eis aUTOV. 10. Xpto- 
an / e / > 

TOS UTép HUOV aTéfaver. II. OUTOS éaTLY UTép 
e a 5 ¢ 
ov eitrov. 12. €v T@ KOop@ HV Kal O Kdcpos Ov 

, a 4 \ 73 
auTov éyéveTo. 13. 7 urn eimev OvKx éxo 
v \ 4 A b / \ bY 
avopa. 14. Kal €v T® AdXOTPi@ TioTOL OK 
evyévea Oe. 


bieets Lhey asked shim 2 They wenteand 
saw where (7rov) he was abiding. 3. The word 
became flesh. 4. He acknowledged that he is 
the Christ. 5. He bore witness, saying that he 
saw the spirit. 6. For he sent them to preach 
the kingdom of God. 7. And it came to pass 
in those days. 8. And I saw and heard. 


LESSON XXI. 


FirsT AND SECOND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE. 


151. VOCABULARY. 
GAnOivds, 7772. Stdvow, 4, 7777. 
Gvepnos, 0, wz77d. éxei, auv., there. 
dvolyw, oper. évred0ev, adv., thevce. 
atroxtetvea, Az//. émel, Conj., when, since. 
atrodvw, release. érepwtaw, ask (a question) 
apt, adv., just now.  emAyuta, y, aeszre. 
aoGevéw, a7 Sich. loxupés, strong. 
Blos, 0, /zfe. omov, adv., where. 
SuaBodros, 0, deve. Bos, 0, fear. 


Xpela, y, reed. 


60 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


152. The aor. subjv. of Avo : 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Sing. 1. Mb-o-o Ab-o-w-par 
2. Av-o-7-S Av-o-y (for Ab-oy-car) 
3. Ad-o-y Av-o-7n-TAL 
Plur. 1. \b-0-w-pev Av-o-0-pe8a 
2. Av-o-n-TE Ab-o-n-o Be 
3. Av-c-@-o1 AVv-o-@-vTaL 


153. Observe on the aor. subjv. : 


1. There is xo augment. 

2. o is the tense suffix. 

3. The personal endings are the same as in 
the pres. subjv. 

4. The aor. stem, Avo-, is the same as the 
aor. ind. stem, 141, and the euphonic changes 
will be the same as in the aor. ind. 


154. Write the aor. subjv. of zrovéw, do; dave- 
pow, make manifest; ypadw, write; meiOw, per- 
suade,; ayo, lead; apxopat, begin; Téa, send ; 
déyomat, recerve. 


155. The 2 aor. subjv. of Barro, theme Banr-, 
is — 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Sing. 1. Bad-o Bad-w-par 
2. Bad-y-s Badr-y (for Bad-n-car) 
3. Bar-y Bad-n-TaL 
Plur. 1. Bad-w-pev Bad-d-peba 
2. Badr-n-Te Bar -n-o 8 
3. BadA-w-or BaA-w-vrar 


FIRST AND SECOND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE. 61 


156. Note that the same principles are ob- 
served in the formation of the 2 aor. subjv. as 
in the 2 aor. ind. (146-147). 


157. The 2 aor. subjv. of the following may 
be conjugated: 7Adov, J came, subjv. €\0o; 
eidov, 1 saw, subjv. ido; éyevounv, I became, 
subjv. yévwuat. Observe that the augment 
does not appear in the subjv. 


158. Examine the following: 


I. mictevwper eis aitov, let us believe on Him. 
2. muoTevowper eis airov, let us believe on Him. 


Observe that there is no difference in trans- 
lation between a present subjunctive and an 
aorist. The distinction ordinarily made between 
the present and the aorist is that the present 
denotes what is continued or extended, while the 
aorist expresses a simple act without any refer- 
ence to a continuance of the same. In 1 the 
idea is Let ws continue, or keep on having faith 
wn him. In 2 the thought is Let us believe in 
him now, or get belief in him. 


159. In dependent clauses with iva, zx order 
that, and éay, zf, either the pres. or aor. subjv. may 
be used, with the distinction in 158. Zhe aorist 
subjunctive does not denote past time, but ts pres- 
ent or future with reference to the principal verb. 


62 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


160. The 2 aor. part. has the same endings 
as the present, -wv, -wevos, 90 and 99, with the 
/ €"'> / 7 AS , 
accent on-wv. o édMav, he having come; o idor, 
he having seen; 0 eitov, he having said; 6 atro- 
Oavev, he having died; 0 XaBov, he having 
recetved; 06 yevomevos, he having become. 


161. The 2 aor. inf. also has the endings ot 
the present, -evv, -cAar, 89 and 98, with (~) on the 
ultima of the active and the (’) on the penult of 
the middle. éddety, to come; tdetv, to see, etrreiv, 
to say; atro@aveiv, to die; NaBetv, to receive; 
yevéerOa, to become. 


162. EXERCISES. 


r\ y cr ¢ / ? ” ¢ 
I. €av ei T@MEV OTL ApapTiav ovK EyomEV, 7 
’ / > y” > Cone \ oe > \ 
anyGeva ovx éativ év nuiv. 2. Kal avtn éotiv 
\ la} a al 
7) €VTON) AVTOD wa TidTEVTOMMEV TO OVOMATL TOU 
cen 2 lal > lal nr e 5S > 
viov avtov, Incov Xpictovd. 3. ovtos HAGE eis 
/ Vf a Sf 
paptuplavy iva paptupion tept Tod dwtos iva 
7 na 
mavtes (all) mistevowow bt av’Tov. 4. aywopev 
\ ¢€ al C/ > / ’ > lal > X 
Kal nuels Wa aTroPav@mev eT avTov. 5. éXOwv 
i : >) lal e 4 95 an 
ovv o Inaovds evtpev avTov. 6. otk Hv éxelvos 
\ lal b] > t/ / \ la) / 
TO POS AXXN Wa paptupytn Tept Tod hwros. 
4 lal 
7. eTUpr@cEev av’TaVY Tos dhOarpods Wa p) 
lal >] an 
idwar Tols OPOarpwots. 8. Adfapos} aréOavev Kai 
fi wee cal 6 
yaipw (rejoice) 8 bas Wa mictevante STL OvK 
/ al > a 
nunv® éxei. Q. eyo od hAOov Barely eipnvnv em? 
1 Learn the capital letters, § 1. 2 See 78. 


« 


IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 63 


\ n 95 Mi a an 
THY ynv. 10. AGE oO vids TOD Beod iva AVaN TA 
yy an , > e ’ / an \ 
épya Tov diaBorXov. II. 7 émiOuuia THs capKos 
sN ¢ ’ / lal 3. lal ‘ e > / 
Kal » émiOupia Tav oPOartyav Kat 7 adrafovia 
° $ an / > 7” > n / 
(vain display) Tov Biov, 2uK EoTLV Ex TOD TrATPOS, 
ANNA €x TOD KOcpOU éotiv: Kal 0 KécpMos Tapaye- 
Tat (pass away) Kal 4) érOvpia avrod, o bé€ Tov 
\ , a a a 
TO OérXnpma Tov Geod péver eis TOY ala@va. 


LESSON XXII. 


IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT 


DECLENSION. 

163. VOCABULARY. 
a&yopatw, buy. ov8€... od8€, wezther... nor. 
adivaros, 277possible. ovre . . . ovre, weither ... 
axa0aptos, 77clean. nor. 
GwapTwrds, 6, Sz77er. mwapa, prep. w. gen., from 
atras, al. the side of; w. dat., dy 
BiBAlov, dook, Bible. the side of; w. acc., fo the 
BotAopar, wesh. side of. 
ehevBepos, free. mas, all. 
péyas, great. ToAvs, 72uCch, many. 
OTe, CONj., wher. onelpw, SOW. 


Wevorns, 0, Lar. 
164. Learn the declension of zroAvs, much, 
and péyas, great, § 36. To be observed : 


1. That both these adjectives have Two dis- 
tinct stems, a longer and a shorter form, of 
which the former is more frequent. 


64 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


2. That they are declined, for the most part, 
in the first and second declension. 


165. Learn the declension of ds, a//, § 36, 
and note the following peculiarities : 


1. The masc. and neut. are declined in the 
third declension, while the fem. is declined in 
the first declension. 

2. The stem is vavt-, and the nom. mase. is 
formed by adding s, as in mute stems. In the 
fem. nom. sing. -oa is added. Cf. 127, 2. 

3. vt- drops before s of nom. sing. and -o« of 
the dat. plur. Cf. 182. 

4. The-accent in the masc. and neut. sing. is 
that of monosyllables of the third declension, 
108, while in the plur. it is an exception to the 
rule. 


166. EXERCISES. 


I. 1. cwavra 6v avtov éyéveto.t 2. TavTa TavTa 
érddnaev 0 “Inoots év trapaBorais Tois dyXots. 
3. peyadn? cov 7) wiotis. 4. Kal éyéveto poBos 
wéyas eri? mavtas. 5. Tas 0 €v aVT@ Mévav ovy 
dpaptaver.® 6, peta TADTA HKOVoA hovijy “Eeyadnv 
dyNoV TOANOV. 7. EoTar yap Oris peyadn 
8.. ravtes bpels viol dwtos €ote Kal viol npépas. 
Q. Kal TOAD TAOS aro THs VadtNaias HKOvAOV: 


1 Cf. 48, 10, note. 2 In the pred. position, 64 % See 167. 


PERFECY INDICATIVE ACTIVE AND PASSIVE. 65 
Oncev. 10. TO aiua Inood tod viod a’tod Kaba- 
/ ct n > ' , ig / ” \ 
pier mas ato jTadons adpaptias. II. éTt Toda 
4 (eel / / \ b) \ SY 
Evo vyiv rNEeyev. 12. TavTHY THY évTOANV EXaBov 
Tapa TOU TAaTpOS ov. 13. ovTE ewe OldaTE OUTE 
TOV TATEpa [LoU. 


LESSON XXIII. 


PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE AND PASSIVE. 


167. VOCABULARY. 
dAnPds, adv., Zruly. oev, adv., whence. 
apaptdve, S272. ottw,! adv., thus. 
avaBalvo, go up. mov, adv., where. 
avabev, adv., from above. ohate, £271. 
S.abqKn, 4, covenant. rederdw, fulfil, make per- 
€optH, y, feast. fect. 
éfw, adv. w. gen., wethout.  tdos, o, frzend. 
émi, prep. w. gen., wfon; wWebdSopa, Ze. 
W. acc., 20, On, Over. ws, CONj., as, about. 
ALos, 0, 5772. iréw, love. 
168. The perf. ind. of Ave is: 
ACTIVE. ‘ PASSIVE Or MIDDLE. 
Sing. 
I. Aé-Av-Ka, 7 have loosed, dé-dv-por, J have been loosed or 
2. A€é-Au-kas etc. hé-Av-crat have freed for 
3. A€-Av-Ke hé-Av-Tat myself. 
I. Ae-AV-Ka-pev ile Ae-Ad-pe8a, 
2. Ae-AU-Ka-Te Aé-Av-0 Be 
3. Ae-Ad-Ka-ot Aé-Av-vTaL 


1 But ovrws before a vowel. 


66 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


169. Observe: 1. That the tense suffix in the 
act. is-ca, with which compare -oa of the aor. 
2. That the 3 per. plur. act. has -ov, which shows 
the endings to be primary. In the sing. the end- 
ings do not appear as primary, but are the same 
as in the aor. act. The pu, ae, etc, never occur 
here. 3. That besides the augment there is the 
initial consonant of the verb, which extra sylla- 
ble Ae- is called veduplication. 4. That the perf. 
pass. has the reduplication and the primary pass. 
endings, which are added directly to the theme 
without the intervention of any tense suffix. 


170. The following forms will indicate the 
perfect of a few verbs: 


vikdw, conguer.... Perf. Act. ve-vixn-Ka 
motevw, believe... Perf. Act. me-mlorev-Ka 
Gyamdw, love..... Perf. Act. nyérn-Ka 
airéw, ask for.... Perf. Act. yryn-Kka! 
tedeidw, fulfil..... Perf. Pass. re-reXelw-par 
yevvaw, beget..... Perf. Pass. ye-yévvyn-pat 


It is seen from these examples that a short 
final vowel is lengthened before -xa or -as, as 
before all tense suffixes, and that a verb begin- 
ning with a vowel or a diphthong cannot have 
the reduplication, but the simple augment. For 
the principles of augment and reduplication, see 
$77, 1, 2aaed 


1See 36, 2 for this augment. 


PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE AND PASSIVE. 67 


171. The perfect has many peculiarities, which need 
not concern the learner at this stage, and can well be left 
for larger hand-books or the lexicon. 


Learn the following perfects of irregular 
verbs: 


AKOUO ALI «isis 2 Perf. Act. &x-fKo-a 
yiaokw, kvow.... Perf. Act. €-yvo-Ka 
OPM See ter sate are Perf. Act. €-épa-Ka 


172. A few verbs have a second perfect in -a, 
not -ca, § 54; eg. yivouar, become, 2 perf. yé- 
yov-a ; épyopuat, come, go, 2 perf. éd-7dvO-a. 


173. EXERCISES. 


Va ¢ 4 
I. KL €v TOUTW YLVw@aKOMEV OTL eyV@KapEV 
¢) A > 
avicv, 2. oldapev OTL Eyomev A HTHKaMEV aT 
Qn an lal n c lal 
QUTOU. 3. TAVTA NEAGAHKA UVulV. 4. TAS 0 TOLOV 
\ / n an 
THV dtKaLoavny €E aAUTOD yeyévVNTaL. 5. Kal pets 
a a c \ an 
TETLOTEVKAMEV THY ayaTHY Hv exer oO Geos ev vpiv. 
¢ \ lal 
6. avtn Oé eat  Kplols STL TO Pas EAnAVOEV 
> \ / \ c / A P) x / 
€l$ TOV KOTMOV. 7. TA pHMaTA a éyw EAAANKA 
A n , A 4 
vuly mvedpa é€otiv Kal Con €otiv. 8. 0 éwpaxa- 
Mev Kal AKnKOaMEV ATTayyéAXNOpLEV Kal Upiv. 9. ev 
7 n nan , 
TOUT@ 1) ayaTrn TOD Oeod TeTEAELWTAL. 10. ypadw 
c ¢ \ ’ n 
Umiv, TaTEpEs, OTL eyV@KATE AUTOV aT apy. 
’ 4 pi x id ’ / >} ec € lal 
Ii. €v TovTm éotiv 1) ayamrn, ovy OTL pels 
\ \ 3 ¢ a ’ 
nyaTyKawev TOV Beov, AXN OTL auTOsS HyaTN- 
ral x © \ an lal 
aev nuas. 12. avTos yap o TaTnp iret vMas, 
n ff f 
OTL vpels eue TEPLANKATE KQL IETLOTEVKATE OTL 


68 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


a x na , 
éy@ Tapa tod matpos €&HdOov. 13. ~revernv 
N 
TETOLINKE AUTOV OTL OV TETIOTEUKED Eis THY “LApTL- 
‘ e e fa) a a) 
play iv mewapTupynKev 0 Geos Epi TOV viod avTod. 


LESSON XXIV. 


AORIST PASSIVE INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 


174. VOCABULARY. 


avayiwaokw, read. 
avpvov, adv., fo-0rrow. 
BrAacdnpéw, BLASPHEME. 
yeved, 4, Leneration. 
§8axn, 1, teaching. 
éyyts, adv., ear. 
ldopar, Zeal. 

Kedevw, Command. 
Avutréw, L77EVE. 


mao xa, 76, indecl., Passover. 

wey, adv., whence. 

mpwt, adv., early in the morn 
ing. 

codés, wese. 

oraupsw, crucify. 

v6, prep. w. gen. and acc. 
under. 

dovéw, call. 


175. The aor. pass. of Avw is — 


INDICATIVE. 
Sing. 1. €-d0b-On-v 

2. €AV-On-s 

3. €-Ad-Oy 
Plur. 1. €-db-0n-pev 
2. €-Av-On-Te 
3. €¢-Ad-by-cav 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Av-80 
Av-O45 
Av-6y 
Av-96-pev 
Av-04j-Te 
dv-86-o1 


176. Observe the following: 


1. The suffix for the aor. pass. is Oe, which is 
Oy in the ind., and contracts with -o, -ys, etc., 


of the subjv. with the 
and § 6, 5. 


circumflex. See § 5, 8 


AORIST PASSIVE INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 69 


2. The personal endings in the aor. ind. pass. 
are the secondary active. So likewise in the 
subjv. are found zo¢ pass., but act. endings. 


177. Before -@e a short final vowel is length- 
ened; ¢.g. movéw, do, érroinOnv; havepow, make 
manifest, epavepwOnv. 


178. A theme in a mute stem (§ 2) is changed 
before -6e; e.g. dyo, lead, iyOnv; rei0w, per- 
suade, étreta Onv. 


Ky ¥, X+ Oe = xOe 

a, B, p+ Oc = hoe 

tT, 6, 0+ Oe = ofe 
179. Some deponent verbs (76) have an aor, 
pass. Such are called passive deponents; e.g. 
Topevomat, go, émropevOnv, [ went; amroxpivomas, 


reply, atrexplOnv, I replied. 


180. In some verbs there is found a 2 aor. 
pass. with the suffix e only; e.¢. ypddo, write, 
2 aor. pass. éypadn, 27¢ was written. See 2 aor. 
pass. of dalva, § 58. 


181. EXERCISES. 


I. Kal » Son év ait@ epavepobn. 2. Kal ame 
KplOncav ot paOntal avtod. 3. Kat é&eov 
émropevOn eis Erepov Td7ov. 4. OTL eyyvs Hv oO 
TOTOS THS ToAEwWS OTrov é€aTtavpwbyn oO ‘Inaods. 
5. €av O€ Tropev0O Téurym avTov Tpos Upas. 


70 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


6. otk €€ aipatwy ovdé éx OerXnpatos capKos 
ovoe €k OeXnpatos avdpos arr éx Oeod éyevyn)- 
Oncav. 7. eis (for) TovTo éhavepwOn oO vids Tov 
Geod iva Avon Ta epya SiaBorov. 8. oldamev OTL 
€av autos havepwOn bporor (like) avto écopeBa. 
g. atrexpiOn o Inoots Kat eivev avtots TOTO éoTt 
TO épyov Tov Geov. 10. oida Tobey epyouat Kal 
Tod UTayw* vpeis dé ovK oldate TdOEY Epyomat 
) TOD UTayo. 


LESSON XXV. 


PARTICIPLES. 

182. VOCABULARY. 
apviov, 76, lamb. AoylLopar, account. 
Suvatds, Possible, able. pikpds, M2ZZ/e. 
éxXekTOs, 0, Chosen, ELECT. mavtote, adv., always. 
éveka, prep. W. gen., 0” account mdravaw, lead astray. 

of. : ™po, prep. w. gen., dé 
érravpiov, adv., on the morrow. fore. 
edxapiotéw, o2ve thanks, bless.  tedéw, finish. 
kopun, 4, v2llage. Tovottos, sch. 


xXopis, adv., as a prep. w. gen., apart from. 


183. The pres. part. of efui, J am: 


Sing. Plur. 
Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
»” > ” ” > ” 
N.V. ov ovcTa ov OVTES oOVTaL ovTa 
G. ovtTos ovans dvTos OvTav otcay dvTwy 
D. ovte ovon ove ovo ovoais ovcL 
A. ovTa ovcav ov OvTas ovcas svTa 


PARTICIPLES. 7% 


184. Observe the following : 


1. This participle is declined in three genders, 
sing. and plur. the same as was, 165. 

2. The stem ovt- becomes wy- in nom. masc. 
sing., and ovea is for évtca in nom. fem. sing. 
ie ieut. sing, 1s.the mere stem, , Cf, 106;.5. 


185. Learn the pres. act. part. of Ava, § 43. 

Note that the pres. part. act. of any verb in 
- is the present stem of the verb with the pres. 
part. of edu. 

What is the pres. act. part. of dxovw, hear, 
Ayo, SAV, Kpiva, Judge, ywwookw, know ? 


Participles are accented like adjectives, not with the 
recessive accent of verbs. 


186. Second aorist participles in -wy (160) are 
declined the same as pres. part. in -wv. 


187. The same tense signs are found in the 
participles as occur in the tenses of the indica- 


Paes Fut. Aor. Perf. 


ACTIVE. -o- -oa- eo 
MIDDLE. -0-: -0a- No sign but the accent on the penult. -[LEVOS 
PASSIVE. -Ono- -He- 66 “co we 6 és 


For the changes before tense suffixes, see 
124 and 178. 


188. Learn the aor. act. and pass. part. of 
Avw, § 43, and observe the same principles in 


72 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


the formation of the nom. sing. as in the pres. 
act. part. 

In the aor. pass. the form )vGels, which has 
irregular accent, is for Av@évTs, 165, 3. e€ is 
lengthened to e. 


189. All middle and passive participles, except 
the aorist passive, have the ending -pevos. 


Nghe Fut. Aor. Perf. 


MIDDLE. Av-0-evos dv-c-d-wevos Av-cd-evos AE€-Av-|LEVOS 
PASSIVE. Same as the middle, except the fut. pass. is Av-On- 
o0-[LEVOS. 


190. Examine the following: 


I. dmoxpleis Tatra amnrOev. 
a. Having said this) 
b. When he said this i he went away. 
¢. He said this and 


2. mopevopevor O€ Hueis Exnpvooouer. 
a. Going moreover 
b. As we advanced | we preached. 
c. While we advanced 
3. dav dé radta eOarvpaler. 
a. Seeing this (these) ) 
b. When he saw this } he marvelled. 
c. Because he saw this ) 


191. Observe in these sentences: 


1. The participle agrees in number and case 
with the subject of the verb. 


AORIST PASSIVE INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 73 


2. While the participle may be rendered into 
English by a participle (Ex. I a, 2 a, and 3 a), 
it more naturally takes the form of a dependent 
clause denoting time or cause. 

3. The tense of the participle is relative to 
the tense of the principal verb. 


192. Examine the following: 


I. Tots axovovat, to those who hear. 

2. Tepl TOU y.wwoKovTos, concerning him who knows. 
3. Tov yevvnoavta, him who has begotten. 

4. 6 yeyevvnuevos, he who ts begotten. 


193. Observe that the article with the partict- 
ple may occur in any case, and is equivalent to 
a relative clause in English. 

The participle is a most common form of verbal expres- 
sion in Greek, and to understand a few of its many uses - 
is an essential to even a meagre knowledge of the language. 
Some of the most ordinary uses have been here explained ; 
and if these models are thoroughly mastered, little diffi- 
culty need confront the learner in the narrative passages 
of the New Testament. 


194. EXERCISES. 

I. 06 plicav Tov adeAXdoy avTtod ovK eye THD 
adynOevav. 2. Tropevopevor SE KnpvoceTE éyovTES 
6Te Hyytxev! 7 Bacirela ToV ovipavav. 3. Kal 
b] / by we 5 ’ 7 an 
atroxplOévtes avT@ eimov Ouvx oidamev. 4. Trolw 
TO OéXnwa Tod TéurpavTos pe. 5. Kal éXOovTes 


1 éyyltw, near. 


74 ESSENTIALS OF NEW ‘TESTAMENT GREEK. 


, \ 3 / 5S \ / \ 4 n 
els THY olKlav Eloov TO Tratdiov peta Mapias Tis 
lal x 
untpos avtod. 6. 0 mévav ev euol Kal éyw év 
, nm ia ” \ i e / 

AUT@ OUTOS EXEL KAPaY TOAANHV. 7. O Tepras [Le 
t e a 

Sikatos eat. 8. axovoas b€ 0 “Incods ePavpa- 

an a \ 

oev Kal eimev Tois aKoAovOovdcw,! aunv eyo 

ipiv. Q. Tadta éypava tyiv wept TOV TAAVOD- 

2, ig n an ,’ la) an 3 \ 

TwV" Uuas. 10. TavTa avTOV NaNOUYTOS” TrOAAOL 

a € ¢ la) 

ériatevcav. I1. mwas 0 TloTev@v OTL “Inoods 

id la) “A an 

€otiv 0 Xpiatos €k TOU Yeovd yeyévvntal, Kai Tas 
c > la) \ / > Ag \ 

0 ayaT@v TOY yevyncavTa ayaTa* TOV yeyevyy- 

/ > > a 
pévov €& avToU. 


LESSON XXVI. 


INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 


_ 195. VOCABULARY. 

ayopa, 4, warket-place. paptupla, 1, wzt7ess. 

aypés, 0, eld. otvos, 0, we. 

StaKovéw, 77277ster. ovKért, adv., ot yet, no longer. 

SudKovos, 6, inister, DEA- oTav, conj. W. subj., when. 
CON. aroTé, AdV., ONCE, EVEr. 

Bepatredw, Heal. apoBatov, 6, sheep. 

Onplov, td, weld beast. rote, adv., then. 


paddov, adv., more, rather. rtayéws, adv., guickly. 
dhevyo, flee, escape. 


1 For the contraction eov, see § 8. 

2 For w instead of ao, see § 5, I. 

8 A participle may be used in the genitive to agree with a 
noun, pronoun, or adjective. This construction has zo gram- 
matical connection with the rest of the sentence, and is called 
genitive absolute. A conjunction, as while, when, because, must 
be used in translating such phrases into English. 

* See § § 1; 


INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 75 


196. Learn the declension of the interroga- 
tive pronoun tis, who? and ri, what? and the 


indefinite pronoun tls, some one, and Ti, some- 
thing, § 41. 


Observe the following: 


1. Both the interrogative and indefinite pro- 
nouns are declined alike. 

2. The interrogative pronoun has the acute 
on the frst syllable, while the indefinite has the 
grave on the last syllable, or, in other words, 
has no accent of its own, and is therefore an 
enclitic. 


197. Examine the following: 


av tis «3 who art thou ? 

Tis €otw 6 aVOpwros ; who zs the man ? 

tiva Cntetre ; whone do you seek ? 

ywookere Ti Teroinka, ye know what [ have done. 


BwWN & 


Note that the interrogative tis is used in both 
direct (1, 2, 3) and indirect (4) questions. 


198. Examine the following: 


1. eav py Tis yevvnOy avobev, unless one shall be born from 
above. 

2. twes d€ &€ atv etzov, certain ones of them said. 

Kai Tis avnp XwWAOs, and a certain lame man. 

4. €dy TL aitnonre pe €v THO GvOMaTi pov TOUTO ToLHTw, Lf 
you shall ask anything of me in my name, I shall 
do tt. 


Oo 


76 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


Observe that the indefinite tls is enclitic! 
when it is possible. 
These pronouns are of the most frequent occurrence in 


the New Testament, each being found several hundred 
times. 


199. The following are the infinitives of Xo: 


Eves, Fut. Aor. Perf. 
ACTIVE. Adv-euv Av-o-ev Ad-car Ae-Av-K-€-var 
MIDDLE. Av-e-c8ar Adv-ce-cbar Av-oa-cbar Ace-Av-c Bar 
PASSIVE. Av-e-cBar dAv-Oq-ce-cbar Av-Of-var Ae-Ad-c Bar 


It is to be observed that the ending ae is 
everywhere sort in the infinitive, and that the 
infinitive in -vac has irregular accent, as well as 
the perf. pass. in -c@au. 


200. The infinitives of ecui, am, are etvat, pres., 
and é€cecOa, fut. Of oida, J know, the infinitive 
is evdévar, to know. 


201. EXERCISES. 


/ \ Cilia lal Us b A \ 

I. Te d€ tiv Soxet; 2. éav tis ayaTa Tov 

/ lal \ n 

KOTMOV, OVK EaTLY 1) aydTN TOU TraTpos eV AUTO. 

= \ 

3. €av Tt aitopcOa Kata (according to) rb béXnua 

lal lal an ‘ 

aUTOU akovel IuaV. 4. elSomév TiVa év TO dvdmaTl 

gov €xBadXovta daimovia. 5. Ti OérXeTE Troijow 
[s an > \ be Se na 5 ’ yy 

upiv ; 6. atroxpiOels dé 0 Incods eizrev ovK oldate 
¥: ’ ra rd an \ , / > 

TL aitetaOe. 7. vets S€ Tiva pe NéyeTE Elvar; 


1 See page 29, note. 


FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. is) 


atroxpOeis 6 Llétpos Néyes avT@ XV ef 0 Xpioros. 
8. ayarntol, viv téxva Oeod éoper, Kal ovo 
, / f2°39 Ig oyA ee 94 nA 
epavepwOn Ti ecopeOa. oidapev OTL Eav havepwO7 
/ ’ Ag? / wd > / kg ube’. 
dmotot avT@ €aopueVa OTL oWopeba (shall see) avTov 
Kalws é€oTiv. 9. Kal Tropevouévwy avtav! év TH 
re a phates \ TEN ’ / 

06@ elmév Tis mpos avtov ’AxorovOncw cot. 
10. Otay yap acbeva Tore duvatos Eipe. 


LESSON XXVII. 


FUTURE AND AorRIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 


202. VOCABULARY. 

atroxtelve, £271. ofelho, ought. 
Sikrvov, Td, 72e7. TATKXW, SUEr. 
éxtelva, stretch out. meipatw, cept. 
érralpw, raise up. twrovcvos, *7ch. 
émitipaw, rebuke. TOTHpLov, 76, CUP. 
Kabifw, szt. oTpatTiorys, 0, soldier. 
pakpd0ev, adv., from afar. catnypla, yn, salvation. 
vupdlos, 0, brzdegroom. Ppdvipos, wzse. 


203. The future of péva, remain, is: 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
Sing. 1. pevo (pev-é-w) pevodpar (ev-é-o-pa ) 
2. peveis  (pev-€-ets) peval (pev-é-n)), § 6, 5 
3. pevet (pev-€-er) pevetrar (pev-é-e-TaL) 
Plur. 1. pevotpev (pev-é-o-pev)  prevovpeba (pev-e-6-pe00) 
2. pevetre  pev-€-e-Te) pevetoOe  (pev-é-e-oe) 
3. pevotor (pev-é-ov-ct) pevotvrar (pev-é-o-vrar) 


1 See footnote 3, page 74. 


78 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


Observe: 1. That pévq is a liquid verb (theme 
ending in A, w, v, or p). 2. The suffix for the 
future is not o%, but «%. 3. This short vowel 
contracts with the variable vowel. See § 5, 7 
and: 8o"976)) 74S. 7552) ° 4 = Wien ones omen. 
uncontracted syllables has an accent, the con- 
tracted form must have an accent — the circum- 
flex when possible. 


204. This contraction may be seen more 
sumply if represented thus<—-e% = "Yi st7.2.0u 
occurs before mw and v, and e in all other 
forms. 

The present and imperfect indicative of themes 
ending in e have the same contraction as the 
future of liquid verbs. Learn duréo, § 59. 


205. The fut. ind. of aipw (ap-1), take away, 
is ap@; Of atoctéXX@ (atroated-1), send, is atro- 
aTEN@ ; Of eyelpw (evep-), raise up, iS éeyepa@; of 
emrayyéedro (eTTayyer-), promise, is érayyer@; of 
aToxTelvw (atroxtev-), Rill, is atroxtevo. 


206. Rule: The future of all liquid verbs ts 
formed by the suffix e%. 


207. The aor. ind. of pwévm is epevv-a, subjv. 
Melv-@, part. pwelv-as, inf. petv-ar. 


1 See § 82, 3 and 4. 


FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 79 


The aor. ind. of érayyéAXo Is Ernyyetd-a, Subjv. 
€mayyeiA-w, part. éayyeid-as, inf. érayyetA-ac; 
Kplv@, ind. éxpiv-a, subjv. xptv-w, part. xptv-as, 
inf. xpiv-ac. 


208. Rule: Zhe aorist active and middle of 
liquid verbs have no o, but form the aorist by 
lengthening the last vowel in the theme to the 
corresponding long vowel. e, however, changes to 
el, and a to n (except before «, t, or p). Cf. 53, 1. 


209. EXERCISES. 


> rn id e\ a ) , \ > / 
I. aTogTEAEl 0 vios TOU avOpwrou Tos ayyé- 
Nous avTov. 2. Kal avtTn éotlv 4 érrayyeria 
* A \ la) \ \ 
(promise) iv avTos éernyyetNato auty thy Son 
yf c \ lal n 
ai@vioy. 3. 0 éyelpas Tov “Incoby Kal amas ovv 
an Ta 9S \ / la) 
"Inoov! éyepet. 4. Hpav Tov Kvpiov éx Tod mVN- 
/ 2 \ ’ » lal by4 : ,’ if 
wclov? Kal ovK oldamev Tov EOnKav (laid) avrov. 
e n € , 
5. 0 deyomevos Upds ewe SéyeTal, Kal 0 Eme Sexo- 
X 
pevos SéyeTat TOV amooTeiAavTa pe. 6. Kalas 
’ \ > / ’ N / ES \ 8 > , 
Ese ATETTELNAS ELS TOV KOTMOV KaYwW” aTETTELNA 
la / ¢ 
avTovs eis TOV KOopoV. 7. €av ev vmiv peivyn O 
an J, an an nm 
aT apxYns nKovaaTe, Kal Upmels Ev TW Vi Kal (also) 
an A \ a , 
éy Tw TaTpl mevette. 8. Ota TovTO Kal 1 codia 
nan n 5S ’ lal 5 ’ \ Pl 
Tov Geov eitrev “AmrooTEA® els avTovs mpodytas 
, 9S » 
Kal amrooToXous. 9. HV O€ eyyvs TO Taaxa, 1 


1 See § 28, a. 2 tomb. 3 See § 13. 


80 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 


éopty Tv “lovdaiwv. érdpas ovv Tods dpOarpovs 
6’Inoods kal Oeacdmevos OTL TOAUS ByNoS EpxXETat 

\ > \ 4 \ / / > ld 
mpos ayTov Neyer mpos Pidturrov IloGev ayopa- 
cwpev aptous iva paywat (cat) ovTot ; 


LESSON XXVIII. 


PRONOUNS: REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL. 


210. VOCABULARY. 

dvarimre, recline, fall down. kabapos, purified. 

yépo, 2/1. Kpatéw, ov asp. 

SévSpov, Td, tree. paKkaptos, Llessed. 

Sadpov, 76, g2ft. proQds, 6, Azve, pay. 
Amite, hope. puothptov, 76, MYSTERY 
eteoti, 2 2s lawful. ods, Zhy. 

Ouvola, n, Sacrifice. dpovéw, think. 

ixaves, szfficzent, able. wore, CONj., So that, and soo 


211. Learn the declension of the reflexive 
pronouns €uautod, myself, ceavtod, thyself, éav- 
tov, himself, § 40. 

Observe: 1. These pronouns occur in the 
oblique cases only. 2. They are formed from 
the personal pronoun and the intensive avzos, 
éuavtrov=éu+avtod; ceavtov=ce+avTov; éav- 
trov=é (pron. not found in N. T.) +avrod. 


212. éavtrod is often written in a shorter form 
avTOv, aUTa, etc. 


This latter sense at the beginning of a sentence. 


PRONOUNS : REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL. 81 


213. Examine the following : 


. €yO papTvp® wept euavtov, J bear witness concerning 
myself. 
2. eyo dofalw euavrov, J glorify myself. 
3. am euavtod ov AaAO, J speak not of myself. 
4. Ti X€yers wept ceavTov, what sayest thou concerning 


thyself. 
3. doace atrov év éavta, he will glorify Him in himself. 
6. avrol ev €avtots oTevacopev, we ourselves groan within 
ourselves. 


In all these examples the pronoun refers back 
to the sudject of the sentence, hence the term 
reflexive. 

Note that the 3 per. pron. éavtots may refer 
(as in Ex. 6) to other than the 3 per. 


214. The reciprocal pronoun addjror, of one 
another, is found in dat. addr)Xo1s, and acc. aAAn- 
Nous. ploovalw addAnXovs, they hare one another. 


215. EXERCISES. 


/ \ a ea, \ar3 a 

I. Tiva ceavTov Troveis; 2. avTos dé ‘Inaods 

/ a / 

OUK émiaTevoEev avTOV avTois. 3. of pabnral 
gov Tolovar 0 ovK e€ect Trovety év caBBaTe. 
4. WoTE jrapTupelte EavTois OTL viol éoTE THY 
3 aA 

ghovevadvtwv! tovs mpodytas. 5. am éuavtod 
5) Suh € \ \ ” \ 5) 
ovk é€dnd\vGa. 6. 0 yap Tatnp exer Swnv év 


1 govedw, slay. 


82 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


éauTO. 7. €av elr@pev OTL dpwaptiay OUK EXOMED, 
éavTous TAav@uev Kal 7 ad eva OUK €oTLV ev 
yee 8. édrris 5 Breropévn ovK éoti EXTIs, 

0 yap Prerev ris édaifer; 9. apy apnvy Neyo 
Tol; €AV fy) TLS ryevun 7 dvabev, ov duvatat idety 
TN Bacirelay TOU Oeov, TO ryeyevnLevov eK TH 
TapKos caps coTLY, Kal TO yeyevynuévov EK TOU 
TVEVMATOS TVEDLd ETL. 


LESSON XXIX. 


IMPERATIVE Moon. 


216. VOCABULARY. 

amokahimrw, reveal. Karas, adv., well. 

Bacrate, Zouch, bear. krdalw, weep. 

Yapew, 72a77Y). peravoew, repent. 

yvaortds, known. mAHV, Conj., and as a prep. W. 
Svo, wo. gen., except. 

els, 0702. onpepov, adv., to-day. 
éLaxioros, least. réroapes, SOUP. 

Kabdtep, even as. tpets, Ziree. 

kakds, adv., 2/, badly.  sorepov, adv., afterward. 


217. The pres. imp. of vq is: 


ACTIVE. MIDDLE and PASSIVE. 
Sing. 2. dA0-€ dv-ov 
3. Av-é-Tw Av-€-0 Bw 
Plur. 2. d0-e-re dv-e-0 be 
3. Av-6-vrev or Av-€-c Boy or 


Av-€-TaCTAaVv Av-é-c bwrav 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


83 


218. The endings of the imp. are: 


ACTIVE. 
Sing. Plur. 
2. O TE 
3. Tw vT@v Or 
TWO Ay 


MIDDLE and PASSIVE. 


SNL. 
2. 00 


3. c8w 


Plur. 


obe 
o8wv or 
clwcav 


a. 6 of the act. is regularly dropped in verbs like Avw. 


b. Xvov is for Av-e-co. 


219. Examine the following : 


akovetw, let him hear. 
py Oavpalere, marvel not. 


Rule: Zhe tmperative 1s used to express a 


command. The negative ts 


aie 


220. Learn the aor. imp. act., mid., and pass. 
of Avo, § 56, and the 2 aor. act. and mid. of 


Nelo, § 57. 


a. ov in the aor. act. is an irregular ending. 
6. Gin aor. pass. becomes te to avoid a combination 


of rough! mutes. 


221. ovdels, no one (ovdé, nor + eis, one), is 


declined as follows: 


ovdels ovdepnla 
ovdevds ovdeutas 
ovdevi ovdenig 
ovdéva ovdepiav 


Cf. eis, § 39. 


1 See § 2. 


ovdév 
ovdevds 
ovdevi 
ovdév 


84 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


222. EXERCISES. 


sane an 
I. ANéyee av’t@ Widimmos Epyov Kai ioe. 
2. petavoeite Kal muoteveTe év TH evayyenio. 
/ \ \ / lal an 
3. mopevOntt mpos TOV adv. 4. KANWS ToOLELTE 
a a la) e > na i > an 
trois picodaw buds. 5. 0 dé Incods eirev avr@ Tit 
/ > 4 10 \ ) G6 AD \ e € / 
we Nevers ayabov; ovdels ayabos et” p2 Eis 0 Oeds. 
s > 7 , 
6. of 88 wdduw (again) éxpaEav Statvpwcov avtov. 
7. 0 €yav wTa® axovew akoveTa. 8. 0 Geos Pas 
a > / 
éott Kal oKkoTla OvK EoTLV ev AUT@ OvdEMia.* Q. ETL 
lal / > > / 
TOANA exw Lpiv Aéyerv, ANN’ ov Suvacbe Bacracer. 
lal > n 
10. mavra & av’tov éyéveto, Kal ywpis avTov 
> Ps Hah eg : / C/ \ a 
éyévero ovdé &v. 11. pi) Kplvete va gy KpLOijre. 
> t n / 
12. 6 muaTos év éXayioT@ Kal Ev TOANM TLOTOS 
> SEneuts ? / ” \7 >> Ba 
éoTiv, Kal 0 év éXayloT@ AdLKOS Kal EY TOARD 
> \ / / a 
ddixds eoTuv. 13. pn Oavpatere, aderHol, Ei poet 
n ¢ , 
UMas O KCOMOS. 


LESSON XXX. 


ADJECTIVES IN -ov AND -eo.— COMPARISON. 


223. VOCABULARY. 
&AnOHs, “re. yapos, 0, vzarriage, PolyGAMY. 
aobevis, weak, sick. . Seapds, 6, chain, bond. 
adppwv, foolish. Simkw, persecute, pursue. 


1 The neuter 7/ often has the sense of why. 
bt jg 8 See irregular nouns, § 34. 


# See § 142. 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 85 


povoyevns, only begotien. oKavdarile, cause to stum- 
oAlyos, few, OLIGarchy. ble, SCANDALIZE. 
meptoods, abundani. TREX, 12/72. 

wANpys, fll. vyins, whole, healthy, Hy- 
MPOTEVXH, H, Prayer. GIENE. 


bYpirros, Azghest. 


224. Learn the declension of daddys, true 
(§ 35), with which compare yévos (§ 30). Ob- 
serve that there are but two endings—the 
masc. and fem. being alike. 


a. -eis of the acc. plur. is irregular. 


See § 35 for the declension of ddpav. 


225. Examine the following adjectives : 


Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
I. toxupds, tox vpd-Tepos, (to xvp6-taros), 
StY Ong. strong-er. strong-est. 
2. acbevas, ao Qevéo-repos, (axr0evéo-tartos), 
weak. qweak-er. weak-est. 
3. codds, TOdO-TELOS, (cope-taros), 
wise. WISse-1. Wwise-St. 
_ 4. véos, VE®-TEPOS, (ved-TaTos), 
young. young-er. young est. 


Observe: 1. That in all these examples some- 
thing is added to make the degrees. -repos = 7 
or ey and -tatos = st or est. 2. These are added 
directly to the stem. 3. When the penultimate 
vowel is short, as in 3 and 4, the o of the stem 
becomes @ before -repos and -tatos. 


86 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


226. The suffixes may be -twy (declined like 
appwv) and -tctos, but mostly in the irregular 
adjectives. See § 37, 2, and learn the adjectives 
in § 38. 


227. Examine the following adverbs: 





Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
kakas, badly. XEtpov ( ) 
Kkaddas, well. KaAALOv (kdd\Atorra) 
TaXéws, guickly. TAX LOV (TaXLrTa.) 


It is to be observed: 1. The positive of the 
adverb ends ins. How different from the gen. 
plur. of the adj.? 2. The comparative of the 
adverb is the neut. sing. acc. of the adjective. 
3. The superlative of the adverb is the neut. 
plur. acc. of the superlative of the adjective. 


228. Examine the following: 


peilova ayarny Tavrns ovK oldapev, greater love than this 
we know not. 


Rule: Lhe comparative degree ts followed by 


the genitive case. 


229. EXERCISES. 


I. ovTos O€ éotiv TARpHS yYdpiTos Kal adnOelas. 
2. oldapmev OTe adnNONS ci. 3. 6 SE drlcw! pov 


1 After, Adverbs of position are followed by the genitive. 


REGULAR VERBS IN pt. 87 


epyomevos iayupdtepds frou éotiv. 4. adpor, 
TAUTN TH VUKTL THY WuYXNY GOV aiToOvaL aT Gov. 
5. 0K é€ativ Oodros pelSov Tod KUplov avTOU ovbE 
aToaToNos pelfov Tod TéurpavTos avTov. 6. Kal 
dofa év wwWiotos. 7. ef ewe ediwEav, Kal tpas 
dumEovolv* ef TOV AOYOY Lov ETHPHAAV, Kal TOV 
UMETEPOV THPHTOVELY, adAAA TAVTA TaVTA ToLN- 
GOvaty Els UMAS OLA TO OVOMEA [LOv, OTL OVK OldacLY 
Tov Téuavta pe. 8. LaBBatov ear, cai ovK 
éfeoTiv cot adpar Tov KpaBattov (bed). ds 6é 
atexplOn avtolts 0 Tolncas me UYyLh exElvos Mot 
eirrev “Apov Tov kpaBatrov cov Kal TepiTarel. 


BESSON XXX 
REGULAR VERBS IN pu: didwpt, g7ve. 


230. Of the two conjugations in Greek (see 
73) the verbs in -w are by far the more common. 
Still, those that have the older endings -wzs, -s, 
etc., form a very substantial part of the ordinary 
verbal forms; 2g. adinw, forgive; Setxvupt, 
show, Sidmpmt, give; eipi, am; torn, set; 
duvumt, swear; TiOnu, put, place; dnt, Say. 
These words, it is easily seen, are naturally of 
very common use. Hence they are among the 
old verbs of the language, and may be called 
strong verbs, having, as they do, the strong 
endings. 





88 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


231. The conjugation of these verbs differs 
from the conjugation of the verbs in -o, in two 
systems only—the pres. and 2 aor. systems. 
In these two systems the verbs in ps have no 
variable vowel %, but the endings are added 
directly to the theme, § 85. 


232. Learn the principal parts of ddepe 
(§ 88) and the pres. and 2 aor. systems, act., 
§§ 62 and 63. (The mid. and pass. of these 
systems are very rare.) 


233. The most important compounds of didapu 
are with the following prepositions, vrapa, a7, 
eri. 

234. Observe the following on the forms of 
the verbs in pe: 


I. The old endings pu, etc., occur. 

2. -aov ends the 3 per. plur. primary. 

3. -cav, and not »v, is found in the secondary 
tenses 3 per. plur. 


235. Note the following in d/dapu: 

1. The present system has a reduplication, 6:-. 
2. édidoupv like édirour, § 59. 

3. «a! occurs for ca in the aor. ind. act. 

1 Three verbs in Greek have this peculiarity in the aor. act. 


ind., dplnu, aor. dpjxa; didwm, acr. Edwka; ThOnm, aor. 
EOnka. 


REGULAR VERBS IN pe. 89 


4. For the contraction in the 2 aor. subjv., 
dd@, dons, etc., see S$ 5, 12, and 8, 5. 
5. Ocvvat, 2 aor. act. inf., is for do-evas. 


236. Learn the principal parts of adimm 
(a7ro + int, stem €), forgive, § 88, and the con- 
_jugation, § 66. 


237. The pluperf. act., which is a rare tense, 
has the suffix «ec; and being a secondary tense, 
secondary endings occur. See § 77, latter part. 


238. Translate the forms of ainwe and didapu 
in §§ 96 and 101. 


LESSON XXXII. 
REGULAR VERBS IN pu: orn, TiOnpe. 


239. Examine the following: 


adinus (stem €), ad-i-y-pme didwpt (stem 60), d/-dw-t 
torn (stem ora), t-oTn-pL TiOnus (stem Oe), Ti-On-pt 


Observe that in all these verbs there is a 
reduplication, in which the vowel is 4 fatnt 
is for ol-oTnpe. 


240. So likewise in some verbs in o — 


yi-(y)v0-oKw yi(y)vo-pat 
(yv9) (yev) 


go ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


This form of reduplication has to do with the 
present system only. 


241. Learn the principal parts and pres. and 
2 aor. systems of fornus and TiOnpu, §§ 62 and 63. 


242. The most common compounds of teTnps 
are with ava, cata, éri, é&, cvv, amo, avTi. 

T/Onus is most common with él, mapa, and 
T pos. 


243. Translate the forms in §§ 105 and 108. 


244. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
det, zt 2s necessary éfeott, it ts lawful. 
Soxel, zt seems (best). perel, 2¢ concerns. 


perapere, tt repents one. 


vt pe bet rovety ; what must I do? 
det buds yervnInvar avobev, ye must be born from above. 


Observe that de? takes the accusative and the 
infinitive. 


SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 


eee 


FIRST EPISTLE OF JOHN. 


5 co, 
O HN AII APXH®, 6 AKNKOGA[LED, O 
e , “Aw 3 ~ e “a aA 5 4 

EwpaKkapev Tots ObOahpots Nuov, 0 eOeacd- 

\ e ~ e “a 5 4 QA 

peda Kat at KElpes NuUaV ebnradyoapr rept 

Tov hoyov THs CwHs,—Kat n Carn épave- 

» ye \ ant 

pabn, Kal EWPAKAfLEV KL LAPTUPODLEV KL 

amTayyeANopev vw THY Conv THY aiwvioy 

NTLS nV pos TOV TAT Epa Kat epavepoby 

A a \ 
npiv,— O EW PAKA[LEV Kal akKnKOaLEV amrary- 
aA ty) E A 
vehAopev Kal UW, Wa Kal VUELS KOWwViaV 
¥y +e 7d la \ e , See e 

eynte pe? nuav: Kat 7 Kowwria dé 7 NLE- 

lal x x lant A 

TEpa [ETA TOV TATPOS KAL ETA TOV VOU 

lal A aA \ A 

AUTOU “Inoov XpioTov" Kat TAVTA ypadopev 

nels Wan Yapa Huav’ W TETANPOLEVn. 
\ y¥y Y e > J - A > 4 

Kat €oTw avrn 7 ayyedia Hv axnKoaperv 

aT avuTov Kal avayyé\Nopev vty, OTL O 

Beds pos €OTW KAL OKOTLA OUVK e€oTLW eV 

> “ > ? 3 XN ¥ y 
QUT OD ovoEia. Eav et@pev ore Kol- 
1 Suav. 


gI 


g2 


IO 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. Loe) me 


> wn \ > “ 
VOVLAY EXOMEV [LET QUTOU Kal €v TO TKOTEL 
“ QA al 
TepiTatapne, wevddueOa Kat ov Trocodpev 
\ > 4 AN \ > ~ \ 
Tv adjfevay’ edv d€ ev TO hott TepiTa- 
la ¥ > la) , 

TOMEV WS AUTOS EGTLW EV TO aT, KOLWO- 
, » > > , \ \ ‘2 
viav eyouev pet adANA@Y Kal TO aipa 

> al la lat A / e “A > 
Inoov Tov viod avrod Kabapiler nuas azo 
5-= ¥ Y 
Tans apaptias. “Kay eiropev ore apap- 
5) \ A \ 
Tiav OVK EYomEV, EavTOVS TAaVOpE Kai 7 
> ‘4 > + > e “~ aes £ la 
ahyfeva ovk eat ev nuty. €av Gpooya- 
la > \ 
fev TAS apapTias Nu@Y, TLaTOS EoTW Kal 
, g A A \ ¢ , \ 
dikavos Wa adn yutv Tas apaptias Kal 
kabapion jas and maons adicias. *Kav 
pion pas 7” (as. 

» y > ¢€ is , 
ELTMMEV OTL OVX YuapTHKaper, Wevornv 
al » aw 
TOLOvLEV AUTOV Kat O AOyos avToV OvK 
» > a “4 “A 
EOTW EV YELL. Texvia pov, TavTa 

Vd e “A Y \ ¢ , ‘\ be i 
ypapw vuw wa pr apapryte. Kal éav 
¢ , e B) 

Tis GpapTn, TapaKdyTov Exouev pos TOP 
A lal \ 
Tatépa Inoovv Xpiorov dikasoy, Kat. avToOs 

\ A lal an 
Nag L0s COTW TEPL TOV ALapTLOV HUY, Ov 
ee ear , a , ries. \ \ \ 
TEPL TOV NLETEPMV O€ ovovy” aha Kal EPL 
Y nn r Me 
odov Tov Koopov. Kat €v trovTw ywooko- 
Y > ; 
fev OTL €yveKapev avTor, Edy Tas evTOAAs 
~ lan Ly, ¥ 
avTov Tnpapev. O hé€ywy OTe “EyvoKa av- 
\ \ \ \ A \ A 
Tov Kal Tas EvTOhas avTOU fy THPaV er 


‘ 1 udvev. 


II. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 


> , ‘A > Ms e = / b) 
aoTns €oTW, Kal €v TovT@ 7» adnOera ovK 
E - Os 0 apy ) aUvTOV TOV AO i\n- 
EOTLW* OS TNpYH avTov Tov oyov, ary 

~ > , € > / lal lal , 
Bas €v TOUTW y Aydt TOD Deod TETENELwTaL. 
"Ev TOUT@ YLVOOKOLEY OTL EV AUT@ ETLEV* 
¢ , > OY -~ Z > - \ 3 ”~ 
0 héywy ev avT@ peve deter Kabws Exet- 
, \ la) 
VOS TEPLETATNOEV KAL AUTOS TEpLTATEL. 
a / b) > Ny a , 
yarnror, ovk evTohny Kawny ypadw 
e La 2 3 > Ss bas a ¥ > > 
up, ALN evToAnv Tahavav Hv ELYETE ATT 
2 A ¢e 3 \ e /, b] ¢ , 
apyns: y evtolyn n Tadara E€oTL O Oyos 
aA > , i > \ \ / 
ov nKovaaTe. Tahu EevTO\nY KawyY ypadw 
A 7 A \ A 
bw, 0 eat adyfes Ev avT@ kal ev vp, 
gy ff X las 
OTL 1) OKOTiA Tapayerat KaL TO Pas TO 
e lA “~ 
adynOuwov 7dn haiver. O Neyav ev TH 
\ Ss \ N 5) N 3 an an > 
putt evar Kal TOV adEAPoY avTOV pLTaV ev 
a g + a“ 
_T) OKoTia EOTW EWS apTL. O ayaTaV TOV 
cia t c 
> Ne o) abe: A x Ud »,! , 
adehhov avTov ev TO PwTi mEeveL, Kal OKAY- 
dahov €v avT@ ovK eoTw:! 6 O€ pLo@Y 
\ > \ > ‘a! > ~ , 3 \ \ 
TOV adEAhOV abTOV Ev TH TKOTiA EoTW Kal 
a \ i A 
€v TH OKOTLIA TEPLTTATEL, KAaL OVK OldEV TOU 
¢e / yY ec , 3 / Ny > 
UTayeL, OTL) TKOTLa ETUpPAWOEV TOUS OPOah- 
fLovs avTov. Tpadw vty, TeKvia, OT 
5 , e “a e ¢ , \ \ »” 
adéwvra, vw at duaptias dua TO ovopa 
nA 4 
avToU: ypadw vty, TATEpEs, OTL EyvaKaTeE 

5 lal lanl o 

TOV aT apyys’ ypadhw vw, veaviokot, OTL 


zt > yy > > cal 
OUK E€OTLY EV QUT. 


o3 


5 


'fe) 


II 


12 


13 


94 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [ 1. 


14 VELKYKATE TOV Tovypov. eypaia vty, 
TaLoia, OTL eyvaKaTE TOY TaTépa: eypaa 
lal ¢ > lal 
DALY, WATEPES, OTL EYVMKATE TOV aT APY7S* 
eypaa vw, veaviokot, oTt loyupot eae 
\ ¢ / “~ lal 5 e “A - \ 
Kal 6 Noyos [Tov Oeod] ev vuty pever Kal 
\ nA 
Is VEVLKHKATE TOV TOoVypoOV. M7 ayamate TOV 
Lal 
KOOMOV pNnde TA Ev TH KOT MH. dy TIS 
AYATA TOV KOT }LOV, OVK EOTW 1) AyaTN TOD 
~ g an ~ 
16 TATPOS EV AUTM* OTL TAY TO EV TO KOT HO, 
lat A ~ 
n emifuuta THS TapKos Kal 7H emiBupia TOV 
las \ la 
of0arpav kat 7 adalovia tov Biov, ovK 
EOTWW EK TOU TAaTpds, AAAa EK TOU KdOT[LOU 
17 €OTLV* KOLO KOT[LOS TapayeTaL Kal H ETl- 
/ > A e \ ~ \ , nw 
Pupia | avtod]|, 6 d€ rowdy To OéAnpa Tod 
Jeod péver els TOV alova. 
Ot 5 es Y 3 7 . \ 
18 Ilauta, €xyaty wpa €oriv, kai Kalas 
NKOVTATE OTL AVTLYPLOTOS EPXETAaL, KaL VOY 
avTiyptatou TOANOL yeyovacw: bev ywo- 
Y gy nw 
19 OKOMEV OTL EXYATH wpa eoTiV. EE HuaV 
eEnOav, add’ ovK Hoav €€ Hnuav: é€i yap 
e€ npav Hoar, pewevyKeroav av pe? Huav: 
> aay “A 7 5 5 \ , 
ahd’ wa havepobdow ort ovK eloly mavtes 
La 7 “~ an 
20 €€ HUY. Kal YuEls Ypiopa eYETE ATO TOD 
Y a 
21 ayiov: oldaTte TavTes—' ovK eypaa buy 


1 kal ol6are wavra. 


Ir. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 


9 ¥ uA 
OTL OVK OLOaTE THY ahyjOeLav, GAN OTL OLOaTE 
> re \ ¢ ~ “~ b] “~ 2 oe 
QUTHV, KaL OTL TAaV Wevdos ex THS adyOeElas 
> ¥ , 93 ¢ , > \ 
OUK EOTL. Tis €oru & WevaTns Eb 7) 
4 > la y 
0 apvovmevos oTt Inaovs ovK EoTW O xpr- 
OTOS; OUTOS ETTW O aVTiypLOTOS, 6 apVvov- 
fevos TOV TaTépa Kal TOV VOY. Tas O 
> 4 \ en > \ \ a A 
GpVvovjLevos TOV VLOV OVOE TOV TaTépa EyveEL’ 
c c ~ \ en \ \ , ~ 
paopokoy av TOV VLOUPKGL TOU STAT EAD EXEL. 
~ } > / b) > A > Cra 
Tes 0 NKOVOAaTE aT apyNs, EV VULW [eE- 
fil ¢ lal A 3 a) 
VETW* EQV EV VILL LEN O aT apyYNs nKOU- 
e A lal lal lal 
CATE, Kal veils ev TO Via Kal [ev] TH 
~ Y \ 
TATpl PEVELTE. KAL AVTN EOTLY Y ETTAyye 
“A / it odes 
hia HY avTos enyyelAaTo Hut, THY Conv 
x SMe i A Cara \ 
THV AL@VLOV. Tavra eypaiba vty tept 
lal Ve ~ ee: to 
TOV TAAVOVTMV VAS. KAL VLELS TO Yplopa 
a > / > > > ae / > Lt a. | \ > 
0 ehaBeTE aT aUTOU pEvEL EV VULLY, KAL OU 
, » Y 5 , ¢ A > > 
xpeiav eyere Wa Tis OiddoKN vas: GA 
la , ¢ la 
@S TO avTov xpiopa diddoKer vas Trepl 
, x 
TavTwv, Kal adyfés EoTtw Kal ovK EoTLY 
la \ rd c la 
Wevdos, Kat Kalas edidakey vpuas, pévere 
an \ A an 
év avT@. Kat vuv, TeKvia, MEVETE EV AUTO, 
y XN a lal 
wa eav pavepwOn cyome tappnoiav Kat 
a as > la A 
pn aloxyvvOapev amr avTov & TH Tapovota 
la) \ ia) 4 id 
avTov. €ay EldnTe OTL Oikaids eat, ywor 


1 §uds, d\AG TO. . . Wetdos: 


95 


22 


23 


24 


25 


26 
27 


28 


29 


£ 


99 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [ 11. 


74 1 A € A \ 5 , > 
OKETE OTL TAS O TOLWYV TYV LKALOOUVYYV e€ 


AUTOD yEeyeVnTat. 
+ “ \ 5 A vA e ~ ¢ 
ldere soTamyny ayamyny dédaKxey Huw 6 
9 la la , 
maTnp wa Téexva Yeod khybaper, Kat eoper. 
A A Y 
Oud TOUTO O KOT MOS OV ywWaoKEL Nas OTL 
> ~ ant 
ovK €yvw avTov. “Ayamntot, vv Téxva Beov 
> , x A > 1 la > , 
éopev, Kal ovmw ehavepdlyn ti eoopeba. 
Oloa 9 9X An y aap ad pp Sa 
pev oTe €av havepaly oporor avT@ Exo 
4 5 , > \ / > ‘\ 
peOa, ore oboueBa adtov Kaos EoTw. Kal 
la od \ / > ~~ 
Tas 0 €xov Thy é\Tida TavTnY ET avT@ 
\ > a , 
ayviler €avTov Kalas Exetvos wyvos €oTW. 
an la \ ¢ >. 
Ids 6 mow THY apapTiay Kal THY avoplav 
la \ 
TOLEL, KAL 9) apapTia €oTW 7H avoyla. Kab 
ya Y b] lat > / Y AX ce 
oloare oe exetvos ehavepabn Wa Tas apap- 
+ \ “~ 
Tias Opi Kat Gpaptia EV QUT@ OUK ECT. 
TAS O EV AUTO pévov ovX apaprave TAS 
O apapravov ovy EdpaKkeyv avTOV OVdE € eyvor 
kev autov. Texvia, pydels TAavATH vas * 
6 Tolwv THY SiKalocvyny Sikaids ETTU, 
Kabws exewos dikaids €oTW* 6 TOL@Y THV 
c , > la / > £ 4 b) > 
duaptiav ex Tov dvaBodov EoTiv, oTL am 
> “A ¢ , e , b) lal 
apyns 6 diaBoos apapTaver. Els TOUTO 
> i ¢ ex “A wn 4 , \ 
ehavepoby 6 vidos Tov Geod wa ion Ta 
¥ ‘a , A ¢ 
epya Tov dvaBoXov. Ilas o yeyevyy- 


1 kal. 


ill eo SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION, 


peévos €x TOV Yeov apaptiay ov Tovet, OTL 
TTEPLA AVTOV Ev aAVT@ pévEr, KaL OV dvva- 
TOL apapTavew, OTL Ex TOV Deovd yeyerynran. 
ev TOUTM avepa Eat Ta TéKVA TOV HeEod 
\ \ - a /, ~ ¢ \ 
Kal Ta TéeKva Tov dtaBddov: mas oO py 
TOLOV OLKALOTUYNY OvK EaTLW EK TOV HeEod, 
\ ¢ \ EY “~ +. | 3 \ 5 nT Y 
Kal 0 fy ayaTav TOV adeApov adToV. OTL 
avTn €oTW 1 ayyedia HV NnKovoaTe am 
> A Y > A“ 3 Vd > \ 
apYys, Wa ayaTapnev addndovs: ov Kabas 
Katy €x Tov Tovnpov nv Kat exhagkev Tov 
s \ > la \ / , y 
adehpov avTov: Kal yapw Tivos exha€ev 
yg a iy) 
QUTOV; OTL TA Epya AUTOV TOVNpPA Hv, TA 
\ A 5 A > “~ - 
d€ Tov adeddov avtov Sikaua. 
\ , >) , > “~ ¢ “A ec 
M7) Bavpalere, adedot, el prover vas Oo 
/ e la 4 Y 
KOOPLOS. mets oldapey oTe petaBeBrKa- 
pev ex TOV Yavarov ets THY Cayv, OTL aya- 
“A XN 5 4 ¢ \ > “A / 
TOPEV TOUS AEAHOUS* 6 pL) AyaTTOV pEveEL 
> -~ , “~ ¢€ “ XN 5 XN 
év T@ Oavatw. Tas 6 pic@y TOV adedpov 
avrov avOpwroKtovos €oTiv, Kal oldaTeE OTL 
mas av@pwroKktovos ovK exer Cany ata@viov 
&V AUT@ Levoucay. “Ev TOUT@ eyvoKka- 
[LEV THD ayaTyY, OTL EKELVOS UTEP NOV THV 
X > pls \ e A > / 
puxnv avrov eOnKkev: Kal ypets opethomev 
ce \ “~ 5 ~ \ i] \ a aA 
Urep Tav adekdav Tas Yuxyas Oetvar. ds 
6 av eyn Tov Biov Tov Kdapov Kat Gewpn 
H 


SH 


IO 


LE 


13 
14 


16 


t7 


98 


18 


19 
20 
Zt 


22 


23 


24 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [11., IV 


TOV ddehpov avTOoU Xpetay eXovTa Kal 
Keio TO. omhayxva avTOv at avTou, 
TOS 1 ayaa tov Oeod peéever &V avo ; 
Texvia, py dy ar pev hoyw poe TH 
yoroy ahha eV py? kat adylea. 
"Ev TovT@ yordpela 0 OTL €K THs adn Getas 
eone, Kal ey poo Ve QUTOU meiropey 7™y 
Kapoiay npov OTL €av Karaywaokp 7peev 
n Kap0ta, OTL petlow €otiv 6 Oeds TIS 
kapdias 7 nyeev Kal ywaokel mavta. Aya- 
mnTo, eav Kapdia BY Karaywarky, Tap 
pyotav exowev mpos Tov Oedr, Kat 0 ay 
ALT [LEV hapBavower ar avTov, OTL TAS 
EvTONAS aUTOV Tnpovper Kal TO dpeora 
EVWTLOVY AVTOV TrOLOU LED. Kal avTn €oTLV 
n evrohay avToU, va TuTTEDT OPEV TO OVO- 
aa tov viod ad’rod "Inaod Xpiorod Kat 
ary amr pey adAnhovs, Kabas eOwKEV eHTONNY 
myer. Kal O Tpav TAS EVTOAAS AUTOD EV 
avuT@ peéver Kal avTos €v avT@: Kal e&v 
TOUT@ OO ey OTL LEVEL EV HLLY, EK TOU 
TVEVP.ATOS ov new EOWKED. 

"A-yamnrot, py TaveTt TVEY LATE TLOTEVETE, 
GAG Soxdlere Ta TrevpaTa El EK TOU 


1 Tig TEVWUEV. 


Iv. ] SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 


lanl , Y \ aA 
Beod éotiv, ort Todo Yevdorpodytar e&e- 
> 3 
An\vOacw Els TOV KOT POV. Ev rovr@ 
yWOOKETE TO TVEVLA TOD Heod: TAY TYEDLA 
ane ely >) ‘a X 3 Ages 
0 omodoyer Inoovvy Xpiorov ev oapKt €dAy- 
wn A \ “ la 
\vOora' €x Tov Heod eoTiv, Kal TAY TVEDLAO 
A ~) ec Ag XV >) la 5 wn A 
O py Oporoyet” Tov “Inaovv ex Tov Oeov 
¥ N AlN? an 
OUK E€OTLY' KQL TOUTO €OTW TO TOU aVTI- 
A y ¥ \ “~ 
XploTov, 0 AKNKOATE OTL EPYETAL, KAL VUV 
> a) / > \ nO y “A b] 
€y T® KOTOMM EOTW ON. [els EK 
A la , \ , 
tov Oeov éoté, TEKVia, Kal VEVLKHKATE at- 
4 yY iC > \ 3 b) e A x ¢ >] “~ 
Tovs, OTL pEellwy EoTW O Ev VW 7 O EV TO 
/ >" 3 ~ / 3 , \ 
KOO P@! avToL eK TOU KOapOU Elo: dla 
nw la) , nw Ay AS 
TOUTO EK TOU KOT OV AahovoW Kal O KOT [LOS 
aUT@V aKover. Nets EK TOU Heov éeopev: 
e \ e lal \ 
0 ywooKav Tov Oedy aKover NU@V, OS OUK 
yy rn A A 
eat é€k Tov Oeov ovK akover Nuav. €k 
an A 3 
TOUTOV ywooKoLEY TO TVEVLA THS aAN- 
\ | ~ Be 
Jeias Kat TO TvevpLa THS TAaVNS. 
> - = “~ >] , yY e 
Ayamytolt, ayatapev add\ydovs, oTt Y 
b) / lal lal \ nw ¢e ) lal 
ayatn ex Tov Geod €oTiv, Kal TAS 0 ayaTTaV 
nA an \ \ 
ex TOV Deov yeyevyntar Kal ywooKe TOV 
¢ \ lan ¥ \ 
Jedv. 0 py ayarav ovK eyvw tov Oedr, 
Y e€ \ >) / b] -, 3 , | 
oTu 0 Deos ayarn éotiv. €v TovTw edave- 
4 e 5 4 “~ “ > ] e “~ yY \ 
paly  ayamn tov Geovd ev nuw, ore Tov 


1 é\ndvdévar. 2 dvew, 


roo ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [Iv. 


Io 


II 


13 


14 


15 


16 


a7 


~ “A c 
vlovy avTOV TOV povoyevn améaTahKEev O 
\ y > A 
Beds_eis TOV Kocpov iva Chowper Ov avTod. 
\ / 4 A 
év TOUTW ETL 1 AYaTY, OVY OTL NMELS NYa- 
- \ / > Fe 4 = \ > oe 
myHKapev TOV Dedv, aN’ OTL adTOs HyaTNHTEV 
~ \ \ la \ 
Nas Kal aTETTELAEV TOV VLOV AVTOV Lac MoV 
\ lan) ant lal > 
TEPL TOV ALAPTLOV NULOD. Ayamyrot, 
> Ly, ae \ / e A \ e “a 
el ovTws 0 feds nyatnoEey Nas, KAL TMLELS 
dpeihopev dddydovs ayarav. Oedv ovdets 
t 
, Z 3N > “~ > - 
moore TeMéatar: €av ayatanev addyXous, 
~ \ lanl 
0 Geos ev Hpiv péver Kal 7 ayamrn avTov 
TETENELWPLEVY) EV HILLY EGTLV. EV TOVT@ YWO- 
yY “A \ 
OKOLEV OTL EY AVT@ PEVOMLEY KAL AVTOS EV 
A g A la 2 
HLL, OTL EX TOU TVEVpaTOS avToU dédaKeEV 
A \ A \ A 
nw. Kat quets treOeanefa Kat paptupov- 
4 \ > 
fev OTL O TaTHp aTéoTahKEev TOV VLOV Ta- 
Ta ‘a aN \ g 
THPa TOV KOTpOV. Os e€av Oportoynay OTL 
4 oe / > ¢ ex a a 
Inoovs [Xpiords| éotw 6 vids Tov PGeor, 
ec ‘\ > b} ~ , \ bY \ > wn Lal 
0 eds Ev atT@ pever Kal adTos EV T@ Hew. 
\ a > \ 

Kat nets eyvdkapev Kal TETLOTEVKALEV 
% > , aA ¥ e \ ] e A c 
THY ayaTyy nv exer O Beds Ev Nutr. O 

> , x , “~ > , 
Jeds ayarn EoTLy, Kat O péevav Ev TH AyaTTY 
ev TO Jew péver kai 6 Oeds ev adr@ | péver | 
D Od I S D [péve]. 

airy , r / e > / A? e a 
vy TOUT® TETENELWTAL N ayaTn pe? Har, 
Y , » > ‘ao ¢e , A 
iva Tappnotay eywpev ev TH NEPA TIS 

, yg A > Le 

Kplioews, OTL KaBws EKElWos ETT Kal Els 


Vee SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. IOt 


> \ > “A , , 53 5 
Eopev EV TH KOTM@ TOVT@. doPos ovK 
¥  ] aA > ie be] > e or 3 , 
eoTw €v TH ayamy, ald y TehELa ayaTy 
e€w Badrer Tov hoBov, ore 0 PdBos Koda- 
¥ ¢€ \ / 5 , 
ow exe, 0 O€ hoBovpevos ov TeTEheiwTaL 
’ ~ > , c. -~ > ~ Y 
ev TH ayatyn. Hpets ayaraper, ore avros 
lal , las 2S » Y 
TPOTOS HYATNTEV NUAS. EaV TLS ELT OTL 
5 lan \ , \ \ b] N > fn 
Ayar@ tov Oedv, Kal Tov adedddyv avtov 
pon, WevoTns E€oTiv: Oo yap pH ayamTov 
\ b) \ > rN AX C7 x N a 
TOV adeAPov aUTOV OV EdpaKev, TOV Hedv dv 
b) A 
ovY EWpakeV ov OVvaTaL ayaTay. Kal Tav- 
2 \ ) b> a Ly, 
THY THY EvTOAnY EXOMEV AT aVTOV, Wa O 
b ] lal x \ > lay \ \ 5] \ 
ayarav Tov Oeoy ayaa Kat Tov adehpov 
aUTOU. 
A ¢€ yY a “ 3 Q 
Ilas 0 motevwv ott ‘Insovs €oTw o 
\ 5 “ las A lal 
Xpiotos €k Tov Oeov yeyevyyntat, Kat Tas 
0 adyaT@y TOV yevrYyoavTa ayaa TOV 
> an 
yeyerynuevov €€ avTov. €v TOVTM ywo- 
4 > A Aw a 
CKOLE OTL ayaTamnev TA TEKVA TOU GeoD, 
y A \ 
orav Tov Oedv ayaTane Kat Tas EevTodas 
A A g , “J > te 
QUTOUV TOLOLEV’ AUTH yap EoTL H ayarryn 
“a wn LY \ an wf 
tov Geov va Tas evTohas avTov THPOpED, 
‘\ e 3 ‘ “9 a A CY > , 
Kal at evTodat avTov Papetar ovK Elo, 
yY A \ , =) lay A la 
OTL Tay TO YyeyevvyLEvov EK TOU Jeov vuKa 
\ , Y 3 e Z e 
TOV KOGMOV. KaL avTN EoTLY Y ViKn 7 
2, XN , he la 
VUKYTATA TOV KOTLOV,  TiTTLS YU@Y* TIS 


18 


19 
20 


21 


102 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [v. 


Io 


II 


I2 


13 


5 \ ¢€ aA \ , > \ ¢ 
esti [d€] 0 viKay Tov Kdocpov el pH O 
9 b A > \ ¢€ eX A 
TisTevav OTL Incous éaTiv oO vLoS TOU 
Png a + > ¢ > \ > Y 
Jeov ? Otros éotw 6 e\Oav bv BdarTos 
\ od > ~ Ld + > “~ 
Kat aysatos, Inoous Xpiotos: ovK ev TH 
56 / 1 3 > > “a 50 \ > ~ 
voate “ovov’ ahdX Ev T@ VOATL Kal EY TO 
AiYLATL’ KALTO TVEVULA EXTW TS LapTUpOvY 
4 \ ~ f 3 > e 4 aA 
OTL TO TVEUpLA EoTW 1 adnyOeLa. OTL TpEts 
\ “A \ A \ N 
Elolv Ol papTUpoUrTEs, TO TYEULA Kal TO 
g \ \ ®e \ “ \ Y 
vdwp Kal TO aipa, Kal ot TpEls Els TO EV 
> > \ , lal 
elow. €l THY papTupiay Tav avOpad rev 
ff ¢ 4 “ A“ / 
LapBavoper, 7 paptupia Tov Deov peilov 
? Y Y \ A“ a 
ETL, OTL AUTN EOTW 7 fLapTUpla Tov Deov 
Y Q Lal e lal Lal ¢ 
OTL PELAPTUPNKEV TEDL TOV VLOU AUTO. O 
> \ e lal “~ x 
TLsTEVaV Els TOV vioV TOV Deov ever THY 
, | e “~ 4 % ~ 
papruplav €y avT@™: 0 py TicTEvwY TO 
an , / 4 
Jeg” Wevatnv Treroinkey avTov, OTL ov TETI- 
> \ “4 aA 
OTEUKEV Els THY fLapTUpPLay HY jwEe“LapTUpy- 
¢e S \ “ “ A \ 9 
kev 0 eds rept Tov viod avbrov. Kal avTn 
> \ ¢ , yY \ » Ds ¥ 
cOTW Y mapTupLa, OTL CwHv aidvioy EdwKEV 
0 Geds yyutv, Kal avtn n Car ev TO VIO 
S New, Kat avTn 9 Con ev 7 vie 
> ~ > , ¥ 2, en yy \ 
avTov e€oTlV. O EXwWY TOV vVLOV EXEL THY 
, ¢ \ Y \ en “A “A \ 
Conv: 0 yn Exwv Tov vidv Tov Deod Thy 
\ > ¥ aie + ¢ A 
Cony ov« eye. Tavta eypawa vw 
y Se y \ ¥ 39 A 
wa e«lonTe oTt Cwny eyere al@rioy, Tots 


1 udvy. 2ai7gG|t...t 


v. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 103 


> XN + a (eto lal 
TMLOTEVOUTL ELS TO OVOMLA TOV VLOV TOU 
lal A Y ‘\ ¢ at ¥ 
Jeov. Kat avTn €oTW 7» Tappyoia Hv EXo- 14 
\ , 4 , > 
HEV POS aVTOVY, OTL Edy TL alToucOa KaTa 
» / > -~ > , ¢ “ \ aeN 
TO Oéd\ynpa avrov akover Nnua@v. Kat eav 15 
Y¥ Y 3 , 4 an aA aX > / 
oloapey OTL aKOVEL YUoV O €ds altrapeba, 
Yy Y » \ =) , aA b) 
OlOapEV OTL EXOMEY TA AITHMATA A HTHKA- 
> > “ ) , ¥ E) 
pev ar avrov. “Kav tus ton Tov adehpov 16 
A e , ¢ . \ 
avTOU amapTavorTa apaptiay px mpos Oa- 
\ , “A A 
vatov, airnoe, Kal dOa@oer avT@ Cwnr, Tots 
¢ , \ \ , y 
duaptavovaw py mpos Oavarov. €eoTw 
¢ , \ / ‘\ , 
auaptia mpos OGavarov: ov meEpt exewns 
4 Y =) / as 3 , ¢ 4 
héyw va Epwtnon. Taca adikia apaptia 17 
, \ » c , - \ , 
éoTiv, Kal €oTW apaptia ov mpos Bavarovr. 
¥ y A e , 9 an 
Oidapev OTL TAS O yeyevYNMEVOS EK TOU 18 
al CY ¢ , b] b ) e \ 5] 
Beod ovy apapraver, aN’ o yervybets ex 
lal an a) Y \ ¢ XN 
Tov Yeov Tynpet avTdov, Kal O TOVNpOS OvX 
4 a ¥ 4 “A an 
GQNTETAL AUTOV. oldapevy OTL EK TOU Heod 19 
s c 4 y b) a A 
Eopev, KaL O KOTpLOS OAOS EV TH TOVNPw 
A ¥ A Y e ew la nw 
KEtTaL. oloamevy O€ OTL 6 Vlos TOV OHeov 20 
4 \ l4 en 4 4 V4 
NKEL, Kal S€dwKEY Nuly Sidvovavy Wa ywWo- 
\ / , 5) > la 
okonev tov adyxPwov: Kal eopev Ev TO 
> ve Tes en > lau) fa) A 
anv, €v T® vi@ avTov Inaov Xprote. 
t l t 6 
Qf > e b) \ \ \ \ rd 
obTos eat 6 alynOwos Feds Kat Con aid- 
, , € ‘ b) \ la 
vos.  Texvia, duragate é€avTa amd TOV 21 
> , 
ElO@AWD. 


104. ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
MAT. 5: 3-12. 
e ‘ m , 4 la) 

3 MAKAPIOI of rraXol T@ TVEvpaTL, OTL AVTMY 

: e / an la 

éotw 7 Bacieta TOV ovpavar. 

rd e an y \ . 

4 pakapvot ol TevOotvTEC, OTL GUTOL Tapakhy- 


OnCovrat. 
5 pakdprot ob paeiC, OTL AVTOL KANPOVOPHCOLCL 
THY YTV. 


, e la \ “A \ 
6 pakdpior ol mewavTes Kal dubovtes THY 
Sucavocwvyv, OTL avTol yopTaacbyaov- 
TOL. 
, ¢ 3 , 4 > 9 3 ? 
7 pakdplor ot eenmoves, OTL avdror edenOy- 
COVTAt. 
, e A , 4 > \ 
8 wakaptot ot KaBapol TH Kupdta, oT. avToL 
tov O<dv ovsovTat. 
/ e > , > > x ea 
9 aKapLor ol Eipyvotro.ot, OTL | avTot| viol 
Jeovd Kd\ynOnoovrat. | 
/ ¢ - yY , 
10 pakapior ot Sediwypevor evexey Sikavowv- 
yys, oT. avTav eat 7» Bacrteia Tov 
ovpavar. 
, } > Y > I e ~ \ 
11 Lakdplor €oTE OTaV GvELiTwoW Bas Kal 
SuoEwow Kal elmwow Tay Tovnpov Kal 
12 Uw? evdopevolr EveKEY Eo" YalpeETE 
\ 5 A y c \ ¢ “~ 
kal ayahhuarbe, OTe 0 pobds ver 
ToNvs ev TOLS OVPAVots* OUTwS yap €dia- 
‘\ \ \ la 
Eav Tovs TpopyTas ToOvs TPO VLaV. 


SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. TO5 


MAT. 6:9-I5. 
Y > A 
Ovtws otv tpocevyer Oe vets 
/ ¢ A € b] A > ~ 
Ilatep nuwy o ev ToLs OVvpavots* 
e 4 \ »” , 
AytacOyrw TO ovoud cov 
ée\Gatra n Baoireia cov, 
“e \ , G 
yevnOytw 70 Oéd\ynpa cov, 
e > b] A ib ge See A 
@S €V OUPaVM Kal El yns° 
% ~ ¢€ “ \ 
Tov aprov nav Tov €mLovoLov 
dds WKLY OHMEpoV * 
+S ies fs Nee a € A 
Kal apes nuty Ta. Operlnuata Nuar, 
¢ \ e€ “ 5 - ia) 3 V4 
@S Kal NMELS adyKapey ToLs Oder€Tats 
e la 
av: 
\ \ E 4 e la > / 
KQL [LY ELTEVEYKNS NAS ELS TELPAT LOD, 
ANAA pUTAL NAS ATO TOV TOVYPOD. 
> \ \ 3 “a lal 3 / XN 
Eav yap apyte tots avOperows Ta Tapa- 
a N lan) 
TTOLATA AUTOV, APHTEL KAL VW O TATHP 
e “A c 5 a +N \ \ > A a 
Dav 6 ovpavios: €ay O€ py ade Tots 
> rd be! , > -~ b) \ 
avOpero.s [Ta TapatTopata avtov |, ovde 
\ A 
0 TaTHpP Vuaov adjnoe Ta TAapaTToOMaTa 
UPOV. 
LUKE: CHAPTER I5. 
> \ ates 5) / , e 
Hoay d€ ait@ éyyilovres mavtes ot 
nA Q A 
TEM@VAL KAL OL apLapTwAroi aKoVvELY avTOD. 
\ , ‘ yY ~ \ e 
kat dveydyyvlov ot te Papirator Kat ot 


tO 


Il 


12 


13 


14 


aS 


106 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.  [XvV. 


aN 


io 


II 


12 


ypamparets Néyovres OTL Otros apapTo- 
hovs POT OEY ETAL Kat ouverOier avrots. 
> mA, \ > \ \ \ , 
elev O€ TpOs avTovs THY TtapaBohnv Tav- 
Y 4 yy 5 € “~ YyY 
tTyv héyav Tis avOpwiros €€ vpav eyov 
€ \ , Vee , > Se a 
ExaTov TpoBaTa Kat amok€aas €€ avTav ev 
ov KaTaheimer TA EveVHKOVTA evVea eV TH 
5 , i a e. 5 \ oo > | \ Y 
EPL KAL TOPEVETAL ETL TO ATOAWAODS EWS 
evpn avTo; Kal evpav emitiOnow emt Tovs 
@MOVS AVTOD yaipwy, Kal €ADav Eis TOV OlKOV 
la \ / \ \ , 
guvKahet Tous diAous Kal TOUS yeElToVas, 
héyav avtots Yvwvyapnré prow OTe evpov Td 
A / \ 5 /, , e nw 
TpoBatov mov TO aTtohw ds. éeyw vu 
So La ao ~ 
OTL OUTWS xXapa Ev T@ OUPAV@® e€oTaL eT 
EVL ALAPTWAM preTavoovTL emt €veEvy- 
KOVTa €VVEA OLKALOLS OLTLVES Ov X petav 
» , my , \ \ 
Eyovow peTtavoias. ~“H tis yur dpaywas 
Y» , 5% 5 4 A , 
EXouTa déka, eav aToh\eon Spay pnp ptar, 
\ Y 
ovyl antes AVYVOV Kal wapot THY oiKlap 
kat Cyrev emyseh@s €ws o8 Eevpn; Kal 
evpovoa ouvKadet Tas ditas Kal yeltovas 
héyovoa LuvydpyTé prow OTe ebpov Ti 
Spaypyv nv amo\era. ovTws, Léyo vp, 
yiveTat Yapa EVvOTLOV TOV ayyéhov Tov Feod 
ETL EVL GPLAPTWA@ [LETAVOOVITL. Kizev 
oe” A } > Ov e , \ 4 
€ Avlpwrros Ts ELYEV OVO VLOUS. KGL ELTTEV 


Xv. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 107 


¢ oe > “A A“ , , , 

6 VEOTEPOS a’ToV TH TaTpi IIdreEp, dds pot 
‘\ > , td ~ > Lg e \ a“ 
TO emiuBaddov pépos THS oVoias: 6 O€ SuEt- 
ev avtots Tov Biov. Kat per ov Todas 
nLepas Tuvayayov TAavTA’ O VEWTEPOS VLOS 
aTEOnpNnoTEV Els YOpay prakpav, Kal €KEL 
dueckopmicev THY ovolav avTov Cav ace- 
Tws. OaTavnoavTos S€ avTov TavTa éye- 
veTo AYLOS LaYUPA KATA THY Kapa exeivny, 

+ 5 A 
Kal avTOs NpEaTo vaTEpero Oar. Kal Tropev- 
\ > , con lal wn A , 
Beis ExohAHOn Evi TOV TOohITaY THS Yopas 
exelvns, Kal eTeppev avTov Eis TOUS aypovs 
avtov BocKew xoipovs: Kat emreO¥per yop- 
tacOnvar ék TOV KEpatiovy av noOLov ot 
a x 5) \ 2510 > ~ > e x 

Xotpou, Kal ovdels EdidoU adT@. Eis EavTOV 
d€ EhOav ey dcou picbior Tod tatpds 
[Lov TEpLaoevovTaL apTwr, eya Oe yng aE 
amoh\upat* avactas Topevoouat Tpos TOV 
TaTépa ov Kal ep@ avT@ _— Ilatep, nuap- 
TOV ELS TOV OVPAVOY Kal EVMTLOV TOV, OVKETL 
> A » ~ ene 4 , 

Ett a€tos K\nOyvar vids Gov: ToinoTOV peE 
< Y ~ , \ -) \ 
OS €Va TWV po Oiov gov. Kat avaotas 
nOev mpos Tov marépa éavTod. eT dé 
avTOU pakpay améyovTos eldey avToVv 6 
Tap avTov Kal €oTayyvicbn Kat dpa- 


1 Gravta. 


13 


14 


15 


16 


Ly 


18 


19 
20 


108 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.  [XV. 


2I 


22 


23 


24 


25 


26 
27 


28 


29 


\ > , ae Ye “4 > a) \ 
Lov eTEeTETEV ETL TOV TPAYHAOY avTOD Kal 
/ > , 3 x ¢e en > ~ 
karepidnoe avuroy. eimev O€ O vids avT@ 
Marep, 9 mpaprov Els TOV OVpavoY Kal evo- 
TOV Gov, OvKETL Ett Atos KyOHVAL vids 
gov [+ mointov pe as eva Tov picbior 
gov]. eizey dé 6 tatnp pds Tods Sov- 
Movs avrod =Tayv éfevéyxate aorohyy tH 
, N\' 8 4, > / \ , 4 
TpPOTYV Kat EvVOVTATE aUTOV, Kal Sore Saktv- 
Mov els THY XELpa adTOD Kal UTodypaTa. €is 
Tous 7ddas, Kal dépere Tov [Loayxov Tov 
/ - \ , > mN 
ourevrov, Gioate Kat hayovres evppavla- 
[LEV, OTL OUTOS O Vids pov veKpds FV Kal 
avelnoer, Hv aTo\wdas Kal evpéOy. ' Kat 
¥ > 4 > \ ¢ en 5 lal 
npsavro evppaiver Oar, nv S€ 0 VLOs avToD 
0 mpea Burepos € €v aypo: KaL WS €PXOpevos 
nyyire ™ olkia, HKOVT EV Tuppavias Kal 
XOPav, Kat TpocKaheoapevos eva TOV Tat 
4 ~ > 
dav éruvOdvero Ti dv ein TadTa: 6 dé elmev 
avT@ OTL “O adedhds Gov HKEL, Kal COvcEV 
c ty 
0 TaTHP Tov TOV fLOTYXOV TOV CLTEUTOD, OTL 
¢ , 5 x > 4 > 4 \ 
VYLALWOVTA GAUTOV amehaScv. apyialn dé 
\ > as BS] A 
Kal ouk 1Oedev eicehfetv. 6 Oe Tarn p av- 
TOU ee Dav TmapeKan EL avTOV. 0 O€ aTOKpI- 
eis civev TO TatTpt adrod “ISod tocasra 


1 &tnoev. 


xv. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 10g 


»¥ , \ > Vs 5 / 
ern SovAEVW Got Kal OvdeTOTE EVvTOAHY CoV 
la \ > \ = Sal y y 
TmapndOov, Kat euol odSéroTe Edwkas Epl- 
1 Y % a“ 7, 5 “ 
dov' wa peta TOV hilwy pov evppavba: 
ore O€ 0 vids Dou OdTOS 0 KaTtahaydv Gov 
\ , \ 9 lanl > Yy > al 
Tov Biov peta” Topvav HOE, Evcas adra 
TOV oLTEVTOY LOTKXOV. O O€ EiTEY AvT@ 
Téxvov, oD TavToTE pLeT E00 El, KaL TAVYTA 
‘i: > * , 3 > “~ \ \ 
Ta eua oa eorw: evppavOnvar dé Kat 
an + y ¢ b) , e& 
xapnvar ede, Ort 0 adekpds Gov oOvTOS 
\ > Ney \ 9 \ \ 
VEKPOS HV Kal ECnoev, Kal aTrohkwas Kat 
evpeUn. 
TOC ORM RCHAPTER of 3. 
“Hav tats yhaoooats Tav avbpdrav har@ 
Kal TOV ayyéehov, ayamnv Oe py) EVO, yeyova 
\ 3 lan x v4 ») , 3\ 
XahKos nYov 7 KvuBaov ddadraloy. Kav 
exw mpopy7eiav Kal €i0@ Ta pvoTHpLa 
TAVITA KaL TAaGaY THY yao, KaY exw 
Tacav THY TiaTW waTE Opn pEeOLoTaveL, 
> \ <a 2)? p) x 
ayatnv o€ py exo, ovlev ci. Kav po- 
plow TAVTA TA UTAPYOVTA [LOV, Ka TAPAd@ 
TO COMA [LOVv, Wa Kavyyowpal, ayamyVv é 
\ ¥ Oe 2 las ¢€ 3 / 
LN EX, ovdev @phe\ovwar. H ayanyn pa- 
KpoOupet, ypyoTeveTar, n ayamyn ov Cydot, 
OV TEPTEPEVETAL, OV PUTLOVTAL, OVK ATXN- 


1 éplguov. 2 rap. 


32 


110 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [ XIII. 


povet, ov Cynret TA EavTHs, ov Tapokvverat, 

600 doyiteTar Td KaKdv, OV yalper Em TH 
-] / 4 \ “A 3 , , 

7 adukia, ouvyaipa dé TH alnfeia: TavTa 
OTEYEL, TAVTA TLOTEVEL, TAVTA EhTriCel, TAVTA 
¢ , ¢ > , > , 7 ¥ 

8 Uropever. “H ayamy ovdémore Timrer. €tTE 

A ¥ 
dé mpodytetar, KatapynOnoovTar: ete 
VAOTOAL, TAVTOVTAL* ELTE YYMOUS, KaTAp- 

9 ynOnoeTtar. €K pepovs yap ywooKopev 

10 Kal Ek LEpous TpoPpynTevomev* OTav de EMO 
alee Ppopynrevoy. n 
\ \ 3 / , 
TO TENELOV, TO EK fLEpovs KaTapynOnoerat. 
Y ¥ / 3 , e , b) , 
11 OTE NUNV VHTTLOS, EhaAOUY ws VTLOS, Eppo- 
VouV WS VYATLOS, EdoylCouynv ws VYATLOS* OTE 
yeyova avnp, KaTHpPynKa Ta TOU VyTiOV. 
l4 XN A be: / > bo 
12 Brérope yap ape Ov eodmtpou ev aiviy- 
pati, TOTe O€ TPOTWTOV TPS TPdcwTO?V* 
¥ 
apTl ywooKkw eK jLépous, TOTE OE ETLyVa- 
13 Touat Kalas Kat éereyvacOnv. vuvi dé 
ever Tiotis, ehtis, ayatyN: Ta Tpia TavTA, 
peilov 5€ TovTwY 7H aydrn. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


2 See 
acc. = accusative. masc. = masculine. 
act. = active. mid. = middle. 
adj. = adjective. neut. = neuter. 
aor. = aorist. nom. = nominative. 
Peg Boe moemsgch d wis Cor opt. = optative. 
a6 = confer, compare. part. = participle. 
dat. = dative. pass. = passive. 

CL. = exempli gratia, for peti. == Derect, 

the sake of ex- pers. = person. 

ample. plur. = plural. 
jem. = feminine. poss. = possessive. 
ile TCU. pred. = predicate. 
gen. - = genitive. prep. = preposition. 
imipers. = impersonal. Pres, s= present. 
ind. = indicative. prin. = principal. 
indecl, = indeclinable. pron. = pronoun. 
indir. = indirect. Vila) — velative. 
inf. = infinitive. Ses = scilicet, under- 
imp. = imperative. stood. 
imperf. = imperf. sing. = singular. 
K.T.X. = kal Ta Aourd, et Ce- subj, = subject. 

tera. subjv. = subjunctive. 
lit. = literally voc. = vocative, 


N- Osis ray 


ao es 


THE First EPIstLE OF JOHN. 
CHAPTER I. 


1. O HN AIl APXH3 =o wv am apyns. The breath- 
ing and accent are not written on capitals. 6, the antece- 
dent of the rel. pron. is often omitted. dxyxdaper, 2 perf. 
act. ind. of dxove, prin. parts §88. A few verbs beginning 
with a, ¢, or o have what is called Aztc reduplication ; 
z.€. a reduplication which is the first two letters prefixed to - 
the theme. a&xyKox = &k-hkov-a, v is dropped between two 
vowels. éwpaxapev, learn prin. parts of dpdw, § 88. This 
verb most commonly has both the ¢esporal and syllabic 
augment. ddOadpots, $157. yuav, lit. of ws. The pers. 
pron. is often used for the poss. pron. é~yAadyoar, Wndra- 
daw. ys the art. may be used with ads/ract nouns in 
Greek, and ofttimes with concrete nouns, where it cannot 
be translated. 

2. Observe the change in tenses, aor., perf., pres. For 
Tv repeated after Cwnv, see 64. pds, § 159. 

3. Kat vyly, also to you, not as in Eng. 4o you also. 
exnte, § 119. pe’, $12. 

4. 7 wetAnpwpern, perf. pass. subjv. See Avw, $56. The 
perfects made thus from etpt, az, and the perf. part. are 
called Zertphrastic forms. 


Ii2 


NOTES. Lr 


5. €otwv, note the accent. Always emphatic when on 
the Zenult. ovd_euia, for the double negative, see § 142. 

6. €av, $124. elev, learn prin. parts of byl, § 88. 

8. €avrovs, for the 3 pers. used for the 1 pers. cf. 218, 
latter part. 

9. ay, 2 aor. act. subjv. of ddtyut, § 66. For the sense 
of the aor. here and in xaOapioy, see § 114. 

Io. For the two acc. cf. § 161. 


CHAPTER 2. 


I. Texvia is voc. ju) auapryre, for neg. see $119. The 
verb is 2 aor. act. subjv. of dpapréve, learn prin. parts § 88. 
See § 83, r for ciass of verbs. 

2. ov movov... GAG Kat, not only... but also. 

3. €yvwKapev, prin. parts of ywdeke. 

4. py Typov is equal to a condition, if one does not 
keep, hence the neg. yy, § 187. 

5. os 0 dy typy, $126. dAnOas, for the formation of 
adverbs, cf. 227. 

6. pevewy, the inf. depends upon Aéeywv. See § 181 for 
the inf. in indirect discourse. adrds, intensive. Te plTra- 
trey, after ddeiAe. 

7. €ixere, what tense? 87, 9, note. 

g. eivat, cf. note on v. 6. 

12. apewvrat, see under adinut, § 66. The perf. denotes 
the completion of the act, and equals here “stand forgiven.” 

13. TOV =avTov. dv Tovypov, note the gender. The 
art. and an adj. are thus often used substantively. 

15. py, $188. ra, z.e. the goods or affairs of the world. 
The general use of the neut. is to be noted. 

16. wav 70, explained by the following clauses. 

18. Kal vdv, even now. ‘yeyovaci, 2 perf. act. of ylvopa. 
Theme yew changes to yov. Cf. 2 perf. of Aetrw, § 57. 


I vr 


[14 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


19. e&pA\Oav = é€-AAOov, prin. parts of ~pxopa:. The 
I aor. vowel a often appears in the place of the 2 aor. 
variable vowel %. ei yap... pel yuav, for the condi- 
tion, sée § 122 and § 123, latter part. qdavepwHdow, 175 
and 176. 

22. ei pn, unless, except, as one word. 

23. Kal, also. 

24. tpels O K.T.r. = TotTO év piv pevérw 6 NKOVoaTE. 
This is acommon construction in John. Not only does the 
relative clause come before the principal clause, but to 
make the expression more emphatic a personal pronoun 
(not used except for emphasis) is thrust before the rela- 
tive, whose antecedent is dropped. pecvy.. . wevetre, for 
the fut. and aor. of liquid verbs, see 203-208. 

25. éemnyyeiAato, ém-ayyéAXopan. 

26. tov 7AavwvTwv, 192, 193. 

27. TO xpiopa, subj. of weve. Cf. note on v. 24, above. 
eha Pere, prin. parts of AapBave. zavrwy is neut. aird, 
masc. 

28. ox@per, 2 aor. act. subjv. of éxw, § 88. ux), why not 
ov? am avrod, z.e. shrink in shame from him. 

29. «idnre, learn the subjv. of ofSa, § 68. 


CHAPTER 3. 


I. Udere, cf. 2 aor. of dpdw. ddwxev, how different from 
the aor.? kAnO@per, prin. parts of kadéo. eyve, prin. parts 
of ywaokw. The long vowel w appears in the 2 aor. ind. 
where in other verbs we find %. 

2. écopefa, fut. of elpt, $65. aird, $153. dyopeba, see 


5- apy, atpw. For the class of verbs, see § 82, 4. 
7. poets, why not odSels? § 138. 
8. eis TovTo, for this (purpose). 


NOTES. T15 


12. Katy, Hebrew names of places and names of per- 
sons, unless given a Greek ending, are indeclinable. rod 
Tovnpov, masc. erage, cpatrw (cday-), § 82,2. ypu, 
an improper prep. for sake of. 

14. peTaBeByxapev, peraBatve, prin. parts of Balva. 
peré has the sense of over, a change from one place to 
another. Note the strong antithesis between the gen. 
with é« and the acc. with els. 

I5. pevovoay goes with Cayv. Review pres. act. part. 
of Avw, § 43. 

16. €Oyxe, § 63 and 285, 3, note. Learn prin. parts of 
TiOmpe. Oeivar = Oc-€var, 2 aor. act. inf. The 2 aor. always 
has the szple theme of the verb. 

17. os 8 dv éxn... Oewpyy . . . krelorn, § 126. 

18. dyara@pev, for the mood, see § 118. 

19. yvwooueba, ywdoKw. aidrod, for the gen. see § 152. 
npov, § 151. 

20. peilwv, see péyas, § 88. THs Kapdias, § 150. 

22. 0 dy, cf. ds dv, above. évebmtov abrod, § 152. 

23. dvouart, $155. édwxev, see note on €Onke, above. 

24. ov where we should expect 6. The relative is often 
attracted to the case of its antecedent, when the latter is in 
the gen. or dat. case. 


CHAPTER 4. 


I. eeAyrAVOaow, 2 perf. of pxopar. Cf. yeydvacr, 
igi tie 5: 

2. €nAvOora, 2 perf. part. Cf. NeAuKds, § 48. For the 
participle in indirect discourse, where éet and the indica- 
tive are more common, see § 136. 

3- TOV dvTixpioTov, $147. dxykdare, cf. note on I Jn. 
ig 
4. 6 év tiv, a substantive expression. Note the wide 
use of the article in Greek. 


116 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


5. avrav, § 148. 
9. Tov povoyevy, cf. a similar use of the art. and adj. in 
I Jn. 3:42. dméoraXkev, prin. parts of eré&do. Cyowper, 
how different in meaning from f@pev? Cf. 157. 
II. dyamayv, see § 59 for the inf. of contract verbs. /ofa- 
subscript is regularly omitted here in classical Greek. 
12. TeOcarat, Oedopar, § 77, 4. 
15. os eav, § 126, latter part. 
19, ayar@uev, not ind. 
20. ein, see under yp, in table of irregular verbs. 
21. dyad, ind. or subjv.? § 59. 


CHAPTER 5. 


TOV YEevVVHTUVTG ... TOV yeyevvnEVOV, 192, 193. 
oTav ayara@pev, § 127. 
3. Bapetat, nom. fem. plur. Ad)js. in -vs are rare. 
4. Y vikn Y viknoaca = 4 viKhoaca vikn, the victory 
which has conquered. See aor. act. part. of Ava, § 43. 
6. 6 €AOwv, he who has come; iit. the (one) having 
come. paptupovv, -vpéov. Cf. Ada, § 43. 
8. ev, els, § 39. 
10. avT@ = €avTe. 
13. Tots miotevovowy, goes back to tytv. Observe the 
tense. 
14. airwpeOa, the mid. how different from the act.? 
I5. éadv oloapev, a rare construction, § 124. 6 éay, cf. és 
£OV, 50. |, atid cs 
16. tidy, opdw. 
18. yevvnGets, cf. aor. pass. part. of Ave, § 43. 
20. iva ywwoKopev, note the mood. § 119. 
21. dvAdgate, pvdratrw (pvdax-), § 82, I. éavTa, 218, 
latter part. Why neut. gender? 


Ww = 


NOTES. 117 


MAT. 5: 3-12. 
THE BEATITUDES. 


3. paxdptot is in the pred. position, 64. aidradv, § 147. 

4. mapaxAnPycovtat, wapakadéw. See the fut. pass. of 
dw, § 56. 

9. vtot is pred. 

10. dediwypévor, perf. pass. part. of Bidkw. «, x change 
to y before p. 

II. xa’, against. wevdouevor may be trans. as an ady. 


Mat. 6: 9-15. 
THE LORD’S PRAYER. 


Q. marep, note the case. 6=osel. ayiasOyTu, dyrdtw 
(dyva5-), see 178 and the aor. pass. imp. of Avo, $ 56. 

Io. €\Patw, note the use of the imperative mood in 
commands. For the a in this form, cf. note on 1 Jn. 2: 19- 
yernOyrw, yiwouar. eri, see under prep. § 164. 

II. dds, see 2 aor. act. system of SiSopr, § 63. 

12. ages, see 2 aor. system of ddinut, § 66. ols ddet- 
Aérais, indir. obj.; sc. Ta dhedhpara. 

13. py eioeveyKys, prin. parts of dépw. For the con- 
struction, see $117. ptoar (pvopar), aor. mid. imp. Tod 
7ovnpov may be either neut. or masc. as in I Jn. 2: 13. 

14. apyre, see under adinpe. 


LUKE 15. 


THE PRODIGAL SON. 


i. noav 8 aitd eyyilovres = Hyytlov 8€ airs. This 
use of the part. with etyé is a common form of participial 


118 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


expression in the New Testament writers. Perhaps more 
emphatic than the simple imperf. of the verb would be. 
avTo@, § 154. 

2. ovvecbier, note the force of evv-- What case follows 
this prep. ? 

4. exatov, § 39, a. droX<oas, prin. parts of ardAAvpe. 
d7oAwdds, pres. pass. sense. evpy, prin. parts of evploke, 
§ 128, for mood. avro, z.e. mpéBarov. 

6. ocvvxapyte, 2 aor. pass. imp. of cvvxatpw. Cf. same 
of daive, § 58. 

7. €otal, § 65. el, because of. peTavoodvTt, peravoew. 
pera gives the idea of turning about from one stand to 
another. 

8. dpaxuy, was a Greek coin worth about 18 cents. 
ovxi/, 133, I. 3, note. oapot, for the irregular contraction, 
cf. SyAdw, § 59. ws ov, SC. Xpdvov. 

Io. Tov ayyeAwr, § 152. 

12. vewrepos, see § 37, 1 and note. emt BaddXov, neut. 
part.; sc. por. duetAev, dz-vided ; prin. parts of ea? Biov, 
here, means of life, portion. 

13. cuvayayov, svvayo. The Attic reduplication is 
regularly found in the 2 aor. of this verb. See note on 
1 Jn.1:1. Prin. parts of dy. 

14. damravyoavtos avrod, gen. abs. 194, 10, note. éve- 
veTo, ylvopar. 

I5. mopevdeis, 179 and 190. éxoAA7Oy, lit. to be glued, 
fastened ; found in the pass. only in the New Testament, 
and with the reflexive sense jozn one’s self to. 

16. éreOiper, erbvpéw. wy, see note on I Jn. 3:24. 
yo8ov, observe the nice use of the imperf. 

17. eis... €AOwv, just as in English. dprwv, § 149. 
Apo, § 157. aroAAvpau, the action is going on. 

18. dvaoTas, see 2 aor. system of tornp, § 63. z2p0, a 
fut. with no pres.; see under onpl. xyaprov, duaprave. 


NOTES. I19 


19. tolynoov, aor. act.imp. dpapuwy, prin. parts of tpéxo. 
errerrecey, eri-tintw. 

22. ékeveyxare, éx-pépw. évdvoare, cf. ENDUE. w7r0dy- 
para, lit. bound (8€w) underneath (v6). 

23. daydvras, prin. parts of ér8iw. eippavOaper, ed- 
dpaive, for the class of verbs, see § 82, 4. 

26. cupdwvias, SYMPHONY. For the case, see § 148. 
Ti av in Tadta, what this zs. ety is the opt. of eipt. For 
the forms of the opt. in the New Testament (and the uses 
of this mood), see §§ 70, 71. The optative is used instead 
of the indicative in indirect question when certaznty does 
not exist in the speaker’s mind. 

27. amédaPev, note the force of dé, back. 

28. 7OeXov, so always in the New Testament for €@edov. 

29. idov, opdw, 2 aor. mid. imp. €éry, éros. mapndOov, 
observe the force of the prep. as in ¢rans-gress. 

30. xatahayov, devoured, squandered. 

31. oais pred. édet, imperf.; see 2443 sc. w€ or thas as 
subj. of the infinitives. 


1 Cor. 13. 


LOVE. 


I. yeyova, ylvopar. 

2. kav = kal éav, §18. «id0, see under ofa, § 68. preO- 
otavety, § 134. 

3. Ta UrdpxovTa = Ta Ovra; ze. all that ts, all the 
things I have. rapa80, see 2 aor. act. of &(Swpr, § 63. 

4. fydot, cf. Syrda, § 59. 

7. oréye first means ¢o cover; then to cover and thus 
keep off what threatens. Hence, hold off against, endure. 

8. mavoovrat, in the act. to stof some one; in the mid 
to stop one’s self. Hence, cease. 


120 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


II. npnv = yv, mid. end. -yyv; for act. -v. Note the 
imperf. tense. See 78. 

12. énvyvwoopal, émiywookw ; éri adds the idea of wel 
or thoroughly. 

13. peilwv, greater; therefore, the greatest. For the 
case of TovTwv, see § 150. 

KAVXHTwWpAl, V. 3, is an aor. mid. subjv. A doubtful 
reading where some editors give a passive form: kav@y- 
cwpat (-couat) from Kaiw, burn. 


PiGieRAL UR ANSEALION. 


es 


Tue First EPIsTLe OF JOHN. 
CHAPTER If. 


1. That-which was from beginning, that-which we- 
have-heard, that-which we-have-seen with-the eyes of-us, 
that-which we-beheld and the hands of-us handled, con- 
cerning the word of-the life, — 

z. And the life was-manifested, and we-have-seen, and 
we-bear-witness, and we-proclaim to-you the life the eter- _ 
nal which (771s) was with the Father, and was-manifested 
to-us, — 

3. That-which we-have-seen and have-heard, we-pro- 
claim also to-you, that also you fellowshin may-have with 
us: and the fellowship truly the our with the Father and 
with the Son of-him Jesus Christ: 

4. And these-things write we that the joy of-us may-be 
(having-been-filled) full. 

5. And there-is this the announcement which we-have- 
heard from him and re-announce to-you, that the God 
light is, and darkness not is in him at-all. 

6. If we-say that fellowship we-have with him, and in 
the darkness we-walk, we-lie and not we-do the truth: 

7. If however in the light we-walk, as he is in the light, 
fellowship we-have with one-another, and the blood of- 
Jesus the Son of him cleanseth us from every sin. 


i2% 


I22 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


8. If we-say that sin not we-have, ourselves we-deceive, 
and the truth not is in us. 

9. If we-confess the sins of-us, faithful he-is and 
righteous*that he-may-remit to-us the sins, and may-cleanse 
us from all unrighteousness. 

10. If we-say that not we-have-sinned, a liar we-make 
him, and the word of-him not is in us. 


CHAPTER 2. 


1. Little-children of-me, these-things write-I to-you, 
that not ye-may-sin. And if any-one sin, an Advocate 
we-have with the Father, Jesus Christ righteous : 

2. And he propitiation is for the sins of-us; not for 
the our and only, but also for whole the world. 

3. And in this we-know that we-have-known him, 
if the commandments of-him we-keep. 

4. The-one saying that I-have-known him, and the 
commandments of-him not keeping, a liar is, and in this- 
one the truth not is: 

5. Who however (dv) keeps of-him the word, truly in 
this-one the love of-the God has-been-perfected. In this 
we-know that in-him we-are : 

6. The-one saying in him to-abide ought just-as that- 
one walked also himself to-walk. 

7. Beloved, not commandment new I-write to-you, 
but commandment old which you-had from beginning: 
the commandment the old is the word which ye-heard. 

8. Again, commandment new I-write to-you, which- 
thing is true in him and in you, because the darkness is- 
passing-away, and the light the perfect already shines. 

9. The-one saying in the light to-be, and the brother 
of-him hating, in the darkness is until now. 


LITERAL TRANSLATION. 123 


to. The-one loving the brother of-him in the light 
abides, and offence in him not is. 

11. The-one but hating the brother of-him in the 
darkness is, and in the darkness he-walks, and not he- 
knows where he-goes, because the darkness blinded the 
eyes of-him. 

12. I-write to-you, little-children, because are-remitted 
to-you the sins on-account-of the name of-him. 

13. I-write to-you, fathers, because you-have-known 
the-one from beginning. JI-write to-you, young-men, be- 
cause you-have-conquered the evil-one. 

14. I-wrote to-you, little-children, because you-have- 
known the Father. I-wrote to-you, fathers, because you- 
have-known the-one from beginning. I-wrote to-you, 
young-men, because strong you-are, and the word of-the 
God in you abides, and you-have-conquered the evil-one. 

15. Not love-ye the world, nor the-things in the world. 
If any-one love the world, not is the love of-the Father in 
him. 

16. Because every-thing the in the world, the lust of- 
the flesh, and the lust of-the eyes, and the vain-glory of- 
the life, not is out-of the Father but out-of the world is. 

17. And the world is-passing-away, and the lust of-it: 
the-one but doing the will of-the God abides into the age. 

18. Little children, last hour is; and just-as ye-heard 
that antichrist is-coming, even now antichrists many have- 
become; whence we-know that last hour is. 

19. Out-of us they-went-out, but not were-they out-of 
us; if for out-of us they-were, they-would-have-remained 
(dv) with us: but that they-might-be-made-manifest that 
not are-they all out-of us. 

2o. And you anointing have from the Holy-One, you- 
know (you) all. 

21. Not I-wrote to-you because not you-know the truth, 


124 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


out because you-know it, and because every lie out-of the 
truth not is. 

22. Who is the liar, if not the-one denying that Jesus 
not is the Christ? This-one is the antichrist, the-one 
denying the Father and the Son. 

23. Every-one the denying the Son, not-even the Father 
has: the-one confessing the Son also the Father has. 

24. You that-which you-heard from beginning, in you 
let-it-abide. If in you abide that-which from beginning 
you-heard, also you in the Son and in the Father shall- 
abide. 

25. And this is the promise which he promised Rog 
the life the eternal. 

26. These-things I-wrote to-you concerning the-ones 
deceiving you. 

27. And you the anointing which you-received from 
him abides in you, and not need have-you that any-one 
may-teach you; but as the of-him anointing teaches you 
concerning all-things, and true is, and not is false, and 
just-as it-taught you, abide-ye in him. 

28. And now, little-children, abide in him; that if he- 
be-manifested, we-may-have boldness, and not may-we-be- 
ashamed from him in the presence of-him. 

29. If you-know that righteous he-is, you-know that 
every-one the doing the righteousness, out-of him has- 
been-begotten. 


TRANSLATION (Revisep Version). 
CHAPTER 3. 


1. Behold what manner of love the Father hath be- 
stowed upon us, that we should be called children of God: 
and (such) we are. For this cause the world knoweth 
us not, because it knew him not. 


TRANSLATION (REVISED VERSION). 125 


2. Beloved, now are we children of God, and it is not 
yet made manifest what we shall be. We know that, if he 
shall be manifested, we shall be like him; for we shall see 
him even as he is. 

_3. And every one that hath this hope (set) on him 
purifieth himself, even as he is pure. 

4. Every one that doeth sin doeth also lawlessness : 
and sin is lawlessness. 

5. And ye know that he was manifested to take away 
sins; and in him is no sin. 

6. Whosoever abideth in him sinneth not: whosoever 
sinneth hath not seen him, neither knoweth him. 

7. (My) little children, let no man lead you astray: 
he that doeth righteousness is righteous, even as he is 
righteous : 

8. He that doeth sin is of the devil; for the devil 
sinneth from the beginning. To this end was the Son 
of God manifested, that he might destroy the works of 
the devil. 

9. Whosoever is begotten of God doeth no sin, be- 
cause his seed abideth in him: and he cannot sin, because 
he is begotten of God. 

10. In this the children of God are manifest, and the 
children of the devil: whosoever doeth not righteousness 
is not of God, neither he that loveth not his brother. 

11. For this is the message which ye heard from the 
beginning, that we should love one another: 

12. Not as Cain was of the evil one, and slew his 
brother. And wherefore slew he him? Because _ his 
works were evil, and his brother’s righteous. 

13. Marvel not, brethren, if the world hateth you. 

14. We know that we have passed out of death into 
life, because we love the brethren. He that loveth not 
abideth in death. 


126 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


15. Whosoever hateth his brother is a murderer: and 
ye know that no murderer hath eternal life abiding in him. 

16. Hereby know we love, because he laid down his 
life for us: and we ought to lay down our lives for the 
brethren. 

17. But whoso hath the world’s goods, and beholdeth 
his brother in need, and shutteth up his compassion from 
him, how doth the love of God abide in him? 

18. (My) little children, let us not love in word, neither 
with the tongue; but in deed and truth. 

Ig. Hereby shall we know that we are of the truth, and 
shall assure our heart before him, whereinsoever our heart 
condemn us; 

20. Because God is greater than our heart, and know- 
eth all things. 

21. Beloved, if our heart condemn us not, we have 
boldness toward God; 

22. And whatsoever we ask, we receive of him, because 
we keep his commandments, and do the things that are 
pleasing in his sight. 

23. And this is his commandment, that we should 
believe in the name of his Son Jesus Christ, and love 
one another, even as he gave us commandment. 

24. And he that keepeth his commandments abideth 
in him, and he in him. And hereby we know that he 
abideth in us, by the Spirit which he gave us. 


VOCABULARY OF THE SELECTIONS FOR 


TRANSLATION 


INTO ENGLISH. 


ee 


a&yahAtdopar, Je glad. 

dyad, to love. 

ayamrn, y, Jove. 

ayamrntés, beloved. 

ayyeAla, 1, message. 

ayyedos, 0, Messenger, AN- 
GEL. 

ayiate, fo hallow. 

aytos, holy. 

ayvitw, purify. 

ayves, Pure. 

aypds, 6, feld. 

adeXds, 0, vother. 

a8tkla, y, wurighteousness. 

aipa, 76, blood. 

alvuypa, T6, @ dark saying, 
ENIGMA. 

alpw, to fake away. 

aloxtvopat, Zo be ashamed. 

alréw, Zo ask for. 

airnpa, Td, request. 

alov, 6, age, EON. 

alovios, elernal. 


aKkovw, fo hear. 

Grafovia, n, vazuglory. 

drAaddlw, to clang. 

GAHVera, 4, Cruch. 

GANOHs, rie. 

GAnOuvds, true, real. 

aAnPas, adv., truly. 

GANG, CONj., duet. 

&AAHAwV, One another. 

Gpaprdave, 70 S77. 

awaptwrds, 0, SZ77Er. 

Guaptia, 1, 5272. 

av, added to temporal and 
relative conj., not trans- 
latable ; see Greek index. 

avayyéAdw, fo declare. 

avalaw, Live again, revive. 

a&vnp, 0, 77an. 

avOpwros, 6, 77an. 

avOpwroKxrovos, 6, #urderer. 

aviornpt, fo raise up. 

dvopia, 1, dawlessness. 

avtlxptoros, 0, ANTICHRIST. 


127 


128 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


aktvos, worthy. 

amrayyéAAw, fo announce. 
améxw, fo be away. 

amd, prep. w. gen., from. 
arofnpéw, fo 20 abroad. 
atrokplvopat, 20 answer. 
a&trokapBdave, fo take back. 
amréhdupt, Zo loose, destroy. 
atocté\i\w, fo send away. 
amrropat, £0 touch. 

arte, to light. 

apertés, Pleasing. 
apvéopar, Zo deny. 

apti, adv., ow. 

aptos, 6, dread. 

apxy, n, Ceg7nning. 
apxopat, Zo begin. 


aoxnpovevo, Zo act unseemly. 


acatws, adv., dssolutely. 


avtTds, airy, adtd, he, she, zt. 


avtod, of himself. 
adinps, Zo forgive. 
Badr, fo cast. 

Bapis, -eta, -¥, Zeavy. 
Baowrela, 4, kzugdom. 
Bios, 0, /é/e, sustenance. 
Brérrw, Zo see. 

Booke, fo feed. 

yap, conj., for. 
yeltov, 0, xezghbor. 
yevvaw, Zo beget. 
yivopa, Zo be, become. 
yivaoka, Zo know. 
yAdooa, 1, congue. 





yvaous, y, knowledge. 

ypappartets, o, clerk. 

yeah, fo write. 

SaxtvALov, T6, /71ger7NyY. 

Samavaw, Zo expend. 

8é, conj., and, but. 

Set, impers., z¢ 7s wecessary. 

Sua, prep. w. gen., Zrough: 
acc., ou account of. 

Statpéw, Zo divide. 

SiaBodos, 0, devz. 

Stayoyyile, fo murmur. 

Stdvoia, 4, 777772. 

StacKkoptife, Zo scatter. 

Si8acKe, Zo teach. 

SlSwpr, Zo e7ve. 

Sixasos, 2st. 

Sukacocvvn, 4, Justice. 

Supa, fo thirst. 

Sidkw, to persecute, follow. 

Soxipate, fo prove. 

Sovrctw, Zo be a servant. 

SodXos, 0, servant. 

Sivapar, Zo be able. 

Sto, ‘wo. 

éav, Conj., 2f. 

éavtod, of hiniself. 

éyy({w, fo come near. 

éyo, /. 

at conjig ef 

elSwdXov, T6, IDOL. 

elutl, am. 

eltrov, 2 aor., / said. 

elpnvotroids, Deacemaker. 


VOCABULARY OF THE SELECTIONS. 


ets, prep. W. acc., z#fo, zn. 

eis, pla, Ev, ove. 

eloépxopat, 0 enter. 

elrdhépa, fo bring in. — 

elre, whether. 

ék, prep. w. gen., out of. 

éxaroy, indecl., ome hundred. 

éxet, adv., there. 

éxeivos, Zhat one. 

exhépw, fo carry out. 

eheéw, 20 show mercy. 

eheqpov, merciful. 

édtris, 4, Lope. 

éuds, 772). 

eprpoo bev, adv., before. 

év, prep. w. dat., 27. 

évdte, Zo Put on, ENDUE. 

évekev, prep. W. gen., 07 ac- 
count of. 

évevkovTa, 777¢cLly. 

évvéa, 722722. 

évToAn, 4, Commandment. 

évomiov, adv., before, in 
face of. 

e€, cf. ék. 

ef€pxopat, 20 20 out. 

érrayyedla, y, Promise. 

érayyéAAopat, 20 Promise. 

émi, prep. W. gen., wfon 3 w. 
dat., 07; w.acc., fo, on. 

éemBddrdw, falling to, com- 
ing to. 

émiywooKw, Zo know well. 

émOupéw, 20 desire. 


K 








129 


érOupla, 4, desire. 
éerunimtw, Zo fall down. 
éxiTiOnpr, to place upon. 
épyov, 76, work. 
Epnpos, n, desert. 
Epidos, 4, 42d. 
€pxopar, 70 come, go. 
€p, shall say. 
épwtdw, fo ask. 

éoBiw, Zo eat. 
ExomTpov, TO, 7277/07. 
erxartos, ast. 

eros, 76, Year. 
evploKw, fo find. 

ébn, he said. 
edppatve, to eladden, rejoice 
éxo, fo have. 

€ws, conj., until. 
ta, fo Live. 

{nAow, Zo envy. 
{ntéw, Zo seek. 

Con, 4, “fe. 

q, CONJ., or. 

mon, adv., zow. 

WKw, at Come. 

TNHEpa, 1, Zay. 
NPETEPOS, OUP. 

nxéo, fo sound. 
Qavartos, 6, death. 
Bavpatw, fo marvel. 
Bedopar, Zo behold. 
OeAnpa, +6, qwe7l. 
Gro, Zo wll. 

96s, 0, God. 


130 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 





Gewpéw, 0 observe. kplots, 4, Judgment. 

80, fo sacrifice. KtpBadov, T6, CYMBAL 
*Inoots, 0, Fesus. Aadéw, fo sheak. 

tAacpés, 0, Dropitiation. AapBave, fo fake. 

tva, conj., 27 order that. Aéyw, Zo say. 

loxupds, strong. Ausds, 6, Auger. 
kabapi{w, Zo purify. Aoyllopar, Zo judge, think. 
Kabapds, Dure. Adyos, 0, word. 

Kas, CONj., even as. Aixvos, 0, damp. 

kal, conj., ad, also. Ato, Zo loose, destroy. 
Katy, 6, Caz. pakaptos, dlessed, happy. 
Kalvos, 2¢W. paKkpobupéw, Zo suffer long. 
kakds, evil, bad. pakpds, long, far. 

Kkarhéw, fo call. paptupéw, to bear witness. 
kapdia, 4, Zeart. paptupla, n, wel7ess. 
kata, prep. w. gen., against; | peOorave, fo remove. 

w. acc., through. pellLov, oveater. 
katayivorkw, fo condemn. pévo, fo remain. 
katadeitra, fo leave behind. pépos, T6, Pare. 
katapyéw, fo bring to nought. | pera, prep. w. gen., wth, 
Kkatadiréw, fo kiss. Ww. acc., after. 
kates Olw, to devour, sguan- | peravoéw, Lo repent. 

der. peTavoa, n, repentance. 
kavxdopnar, fo boast. petaBalve, fo cross over. 
Ketwat, fo lze, recline. pr, rot. 


kepariov, 76, the fruit of the | pn8é, wezther, nor. 
Carob tree, used for the | pndels, 20 one. 
swine, also by poor peo- | pioéa, Zo hate. 


ple. Lit., a “ttle horn. ploBros, Azreling. 
KXelw, fo shut. prods, 0, Azre, pay. 
kAnpovopéw, fo znherit. povoyevys, only begotten. 
kowwvla, 4, fellowship. povos, alone, only. 
Kodacis, 4, Punishment. pooxos, 6, calf. 


Koapos, 6, world, COSMOS. pPuvoripiov, T6, MYSTERY. 


VOCABULARY OF THE SELECTIONS. 


veaviokos, 6, young man. 

vekpos, dead. 

véos, young. 

vytios, young child. 

vikdw, 20 conquer. 

vikn, 4, victory. 

viv, adv., zow. 

o0ev, adv., whence. 

ola, 7 know. 

oikla, y, ouse. 

olkos, 6, Louse. 

odos, whole. 

oporos, lke. 

oporoyéw, 20 confess. 

overSilw, Zo revile. 

Ovopa, T6, 2AULE. 

Opa, fo see. 

opyite, fo anger, arouse. 

Opos, 76, mountain. 

Os, 7, 0, who. 

OOTIS, NTIS, 6,71, Whoever. 

Ore, CONj., when. 

étt, conj., Jecause, that. 

ov, 700. 

ovdé, zecther, nor. 

ovdeis, 720 one. 

ovSérore, adv., ever. 

ovKért, adv., xo longer. 

ovrw, adv., wot yet. 

ovpavds, 0, heaven. 

otpavios, Aeavenly. 

oioia, yn, substance, prop- 
erty. 

ovtos, this one. 


13% 


ovTw, adv., thus. 
opertérns, 6, debtor. 


_ opetAnpa, +6, debt. 


ofelru, Zo owe, be indebted. 

opbadyds, 0, eve. 

Oona, shall see. 

madstov, +6, child. 

tais, 0, n, chzld. 

mevaw, Zo hunger. 

tTaXavds, old. 

maduv, adv., again. 

tmapapoAH, 71, PARABLE. 

Tapayouar, 20 pass away. 

Tapadidwop., fo deliver, give 
up. 

TmapaKkahéw, Zo Summon, Com- 
Sort. 

TapaKAnTos, 6, advocate. 

Twaparrapa, 76, trespass. 

mapepxopar, to pass by, 
omit. 

mapofvvopnat, fo be provoked. 

Tapovola, 1, Dresence. 

tmappynola, n, doldness. 

was, al. 

matnp, 0, father. 

welOw, to persuade. 

twéutro, Lo send. 

mevOéw, O72eVe, MOUYN. 

Teiparpos, 0, Lem ptation. 

mepl, prep. W. gen., concern: 
mg; W. acc., around. 

tmepit@atéw, fo walk. 

Tepiroevopar, Lo abound. 


132 


meptrepevopar, 20 
boast. 

aintw, fo fall. 

mirtevw, Lo believe. 

miotis, n, farth. 

motés, faithful. 

Twavaw, cause to wander. 

wavy, 1, Wandering. 

wAnpdw, fo fill. 

arvedpa, 76, SHzrit. 

movew, Lo do, make. 

moXitns, 0, c7l7zen. 

mos, 71UCh, Many. 

movnpos, wicked. 

Topevopat, 20, Conte. 

mépvos, 0, fornicator. 

moaos, How great. 

motatés, what sort of. 

mov, adv., where. 

movs, 0, foot. 

apavs, ventle. 

amperPurtepos, elder. 

apo, prep. w. gen., before. 

apoBarov, 76, sheep. 

ampés, prep. w. acc., 20, 
towards. 

mpooSéxopar, 20 receive. 

tmpocevxopar, Zo offer pray- 
ers Lo. 

mporKkadéw, £0 SUMMON. 

Tpdcwtov, TO, face. 

mpopytela, 1, Prophecy. 

tTpopnytys, 0, PROPHET. 

apatos, first. 


vaunt, 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


awvvOdvopat, fo learn, en- 
guire. 

aTwXos, 0, beggar. 

motrote, adv., ever. 

mas, adv., how. 

propa, Zo deliver. 

capdw, fo sweep. 

capt, 7, flesh. 

otpepov, adv., to-day. 

oitevtos, farted. 

okdvSarov, 16, cause for 
stumbling. 

okotia, y, darkness. 

oKOTOS, TO, darkness. 

aos, thy. 

omdayxvitw, to have com: 
passion. 

omhayxva, Ta, compassion 
bowels. 

oméppa, To, sced. 

oToAn, y, 70be, garment. 

ov, thou. 

cuppovia, 1, 7722S7C. 

cuvaye, to collect. 

cvverOlw, fo cat with. 

cvvkaréw, Zo call together. ° 

cuvxatpw, fo rejoice with. 

ohatw, fo slay. 

cdpa, To, body. 

cwTHp, o, SAVvi0Ur. 

raxv, adv., guzckly. 

rexviov, 10, little child. 

téxvov, To, Child. 

téhevos, Perfect, mature. 


VOCABULARY OF THE SELECTIONS. 


tedecow, fo perfect. 

teovys, 0, collector of taxes, 
publican. 

Typéw, fo keep. 

rion, Zo put, place. 

tis, tl, who? what? 

Tis, Tl, Some one, certain 
one. 

Tosrottos, S0 721UCch. 

TPAaX AOS, 0, 72¢CK. 

tpets, tela, three. 

Tpéexo, LO v1. 

tuprow, fo make blind. 

vytatve, Zo be well, strong. 

tdap, To, water. 

vidos, 0, S07. 

uTaye, fo go. 

imapxe, Lo be. 

umép, prep. w. gen., Sor. 

vrodypa, To, sandal. 

vTopéva, fo endure. 

votepéw, Zo lack, want. 

daive, to show, appear. 

havepos, Plain, manifest. 

havepow, make manifest. 

hépw, bring, bear. 

piros, 0, frzend. 

hoPéopar, Zo fear. 

ofos, 6, fear. 

dpovéw, Zo think. 

dbvi\accw, to guard. 


ere: 


dvolopar, to be puffed up, 
inflated. 


das, to, light. 

Xa&Akos, 0, dvass, bronze. 

X%p4, 1, 70. 

Xalpw, Zo rejoice. 

Xaptv, used as prep. w. gen., 
for the sake of. 

xelp, n, Zand. 

XoOtpos, 0, szvz7e. 

Kops, 0, dancing. 

xopratw, to be filled. 

Xpela, y, weed. 

Xpnorevopar, Zo be kind. 

Xplopa, to, anointing. 

Xpirros, 6, Christ. 

XSpa, yn, country. 

Webdopnar, e,to speak falsely. 

Wevdorpodytys, 6, false 
prophet. 

WetSos, 7d, Me. 

Wetorns, 6, Zar. 

Wnraddw, Zo touch, handle. 

Wuxh, H, soz. 

Wopite, ezve in small parts. 

ade, as follows, thus. 

Gpos, 6, shoulders. 

apa, n, Zour. 


as, aS. 
wapecéw, 0 owe, be in 
debtea to. 





PART II.—GRAMMAR. 





Ll. WRITING AND SOUND. 


ALPHABET. 


§ 1. Greek is written with twenty-four letters. 


Form. 


Dene RK SMPOOMNAZSr>AHOMNEDOeP 


Qa 

B 

ry 

} 

e (short) 
C 

n (long) 
6 & 

l 

K 

¥\ a 
fe 

Vv 

c 

o (short) 
T 

p 

oS 

5 

Vv 3 

X 

W 

w (long) 


NAME. 


ava 
ne 
Yopnpia. 
deATa 

€ Widov 
Ciro. 
nTa 
Onta 
i@Ta 
Karo. 


alpha 
beta 
gamma 
delta 
epsilon 
zeta 

eta 
theta 
zota 
kappa 
lambda 
mu 

nu 

oe 
omtcron 
pi 

rho 
sigma 
tau 


upsilon 
phi 
cht 
pst 


omega 


LATIN. 
a 


b} 


( 
vs 

i 
ph 
ch 
ps 
O 


as in father 


as in get 


as in met 


as in they 
as in thing 


as in machine 
ork 


as in example 
as in obey 


French z or 
German z# 
as in phase 
as in chasm 
as in Zips 

as in fone 


1 Letters without equivalents are pronounced as in English. 
2 ¢ in the middle of a word; s at the close. 


137 


3 See 11, 2 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 


138 


“2p ySiLSu UL PuNOS JUSTeAIMDS OU SEY AD _ 


2902 0 2 D ysyjsuq se * » «agorduz “Ir (AM al) © ii v 


9 € z I OAS ee ee 
dzoi8 P7227} 1170 [20 }Y82ay o[SZ2v yst|suq ur se poounouoad ‘sSuoyiydip +agorg ‘ao ad av 10 13 170 
9 $ v € z I >. Sin oe eae 


:SMOT[OJ Sv SSuwOYZYGIp WAIOJ pure OUT] JY} 19}Fe STAMOA 
95079 94} YyM suIquios Kay} “wago o1¥ DUT] 94} D1OJOG S[OMOA OY TL “F§ 
ar|mokoanv 
“STAMOA AO NOILLOVULNOS) 


mk vo ‘s7amoa suo, uado 


a D ‘s7amon SUOT 
0 > v0 ‘syamor p4oys uIGQ a 


0 ‘S790 J4OYS 
‘JOYS SOWIJaWOS ‘SuOT SoWIjOWOS Iv A 7 “MW $ Suo] sAeM[e © ‘h 
‘q1oys skemye oie 0 9 asay1 JO. a 7 ‘m ‘0 ‘9 “M aIB S[OMOA DUT ‘E § 


“STAMOA JO AIEV 


ku 
a 1 ‘s79an20% 9S019 pea 
0123 


yaSuv (SQ-[23-Bue) SoyrrAv -F7 Su ay] poounouosd st X 10 ‘A ‘y a10jaq A pv 











Selo Si SV yy |S X K ~ » syeyepeg (A) 
0Q 10 QD 5 2 fa) Q 2 srensuiy 41 0 Vv oO 
Sp 10 ‘spf ‘su wo ft p “ sfeiqey w 
| | | *sTeseNy ies 
*SLNVNOS ‘ysnoy “eIPPI]T “Yours ‘spinbry "JUETIQIS 
-NOd) ————_—— ae aide 
ic tt Seley @ § “SALNYL “STHMOAINAS G § 


“SLNVNOSNO’) HO WIdV.T. 


139 


CONTRACTION. 


(=lio) ao=a03 m=a00 D=lin D=190 
; i ; “ * :poddoip st [amon 
puosss oy} 7 Jou JI {ydisosqns se pourejzoI st 7 st yt Jt “Suoyjydip oy} 
JO [OMOA PUOdS 9Y} PUL ‘5770202 JO UOTJOVIJUOD OF SALT BY} 0} SUIPIOIIV 
p9}0¥1}]U0D OI OM} DY} “[2AMOA JSIY OY} DYITUN st [aMOA oy} Udy 8 § 
10 = 100 19 = 133 710 = 700 
: & : : paqiosqe SI [OMOA 
oy} ‘oylfe ore Suoy Arp oy} Jo [MOA 4s1y 9} pue fOMOA dy} UIYMA “YZ § 


‘ONOHLHdI(q{ HLIM TAMOA AO NOLLOVALNO?) 


19=33 ‘OX l=vo Ub=lad bask ole v=ho 0 


L 9 ai F € Zz 
: sjreaoid Ws0F Buoy UT [aMOA 4S1Y OY} PUL 4OVI]UOD sjaMoA asoyT, “9 § 


390 


4 |] 


lin aaD 
©o=m0 oko ™=070 (M=3M) M=O>9 (‘9x7 20 =00 ‘30 ‘09 
ZI II OL 6 9 Z 
‘(m= o=n1M ook m=ol.) m=ov =o” 
9 S 4 c z I -@ ST 


ynsor oy} pur “19}Je 9sOY} YI 9L.1]UOS OUT] OY} V1OJoq sjaMOA DYT “C § 


mol|luoan 


I40 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


ACCENT. 


§ 9. There are three kinds of accent in Greek . 


The acute ; as in tls, who ? 
The grave ; “tis, Some one. 
The cercumflex; “ avto, to him. 


There are two fundamental laws of accent: 
VERBAL, explained in 3, 6; and NoMINAL (includ- 
ing nouns, adjectives, and participles), given in 
57. 


BREATHINGS. 


§ 10. Every initial vowel or diphthong has a 
breathing mark over it: 


(’) is called the smooth breathing, and is not 
pronounced. {6d10s, avras. 

(‘) is called the rough breathing, and gives the 
sound of &. apa, héra, avtod, hautou. 


Note that the breathing is placed over the 
second vowel of the diphthong. 
Initial p always has the rough breathing. pha. 


MOVABLE vr. 


§ 11. Movable vy may occur at the end of the 
following : 


1. All dative plurals in -ov(v). maow(v), axov- 
gact(v). 


APOSTROPHE ; CRASIS. 141 


2. All verbs with the ending -ov. ‘ornou(v), 
AVovat(V). 

3. After -e of the third person singular of 
verbs. édaBe(v), HKovce(r). 

4. After éori; as éori(v). 


So also o is movable in o#rws, thus. Before a 
vowel, aS ovtws v; but before a consonant, 
oi'T@ Kal.) 


APOSTROPHE. 


$12. In the prepositions a short final vowel 
may be dropped before a word beginning with 
avowel. £L.g. am attod, from him, éf’ @, at 
which; we? nav, weth ws. 

Note that the elision is marked by an apos- 
trophe, and that a smooth mute, as 7, 7, changes 
to the corresponding rough mute, ¢, 0, before a 
rough breathing. 

arrd, but, also suffers elision ; as adn’ epol. 


CRASIS. 


§ 13. When two vowels, or a vowel and a diph- 
thong, come together in two words,.as Kai éyw 
or To évavtiov, they are usually joined together ; 
as Kay or tovvavtiov. This is called craszs 
(mixture), and is indicated by the coronzs over 
the contracted form. 7 


1 But in the New Testament often s before a consonant. 


142 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


PUNCTUATION. 


§ 14. The Greek has four punctuation marks : 
the conima and the period, as in English; the 
interrogation mark (;), as the English semi- 
colon; and the point (*) above the line. which 
equals English colon or semicolon. 





2. ACCIDENCE. 


§ 15. Accidence treats of NOMINAL Znflexion, 
the declension of nouns, adjectives, and partici- 
ples, and of the conjugation of verbs. 


INFLEXION. 


§ 16. In Greek ALL nouns, adjectives, and par- 
ticiples have zzffexion ; z.e. an ending or suffix 
which is added to the stem or substantial part 
of the word. There are three sets of endings or 
suffixes, and according as a noun takes one set 
or the other it is said to belong to the frsz, 
second, or third declension. 


§ 17. Nouns of the first declension have the 
stem ending in-a. This is therefore called the 
A-declension. 

Nouns of the second declension have the stem 
in -o. O-declension. 


GENDER AND NUMBER. 143 


Most nouns of the third declension have 
stems ending in a consonant, hence the term 
Consonant Declension is used. 


GENDER. 


§ 18. All nouns in Greek are either mascu- 
line, feminine, or neuter gender. 

Nouns denoting male persons are masculine. 

Nouns denoting female persons are feminine. 


§ 19. Outside of these ser rules the gender 
may be determined very largely by the declen- 
sion to which the noun belongs: 


1. Nouns of the A-declension ending in a, 7, 
a@ are feminine. ‘Those ending in -s are mas- 
culine. 

2. Nouns of the O-declension in -os are mostly 
masculine ; those in -ov are neuter. 

3. In the third declension the gender varies 
according to the ending of the stem. See 
Lessons ‘XV, XVI; XVIIL, and AIX. for the 
discussion of these caine 


NUMBER. 


§ 20. In the Greek of the New Testament 
there are two numbers, singular and plural, as 
in English. 


144 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


CASE. 


§ 21. There are five cases in Greek : 

1. Nominative, as in English. 

2. Genitive, SOURCE Or WHENCE-CASE. Eng. 
lish possessive or objective with of. 

3. Dative, WHERE-CASE, TO or FOR which any- 
thing Is or Is DONE. English remote or zzdzrect 
object. 

4. Accusative, WHITHER-CASE. English drect 
object. 

5. Vocative, case of address. 


§ 22. First oR A-DECLENSION.' 
apxh, 7, Ceginning. cota, xy, wisdom. adpa, y, hour. 
Stem apxa-- Stem coguia- Stem wpa- 
S.N.V. apxq copia apa 
G. apxfis codias apas 
D. apxq codia dpg. 
A. &pxqv codiayv apav 
P.N.V. dpxat codiat apat 
G. dapxav codiay apav 
D. apxats codpiats apats 
A. 4apxas codpias apas 
S6£a, 4, elory. 
: Stem dofa- 
S.N.V. 86§a P.N.V. 8é£€ar 
G. 86s G. So0fdv 
D. 86€y D. S6€ats 
A. 8d€av A. 8d€as 


1 Cf. 55 for table of endings in the A-declension. 


SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. 


tTpopyrys, 6, PROPHET. 
Stem mrpogyra- 


mpopytns | 
TpoPHTov 
mpodtiry 
TpopyTHv 
TpoP> Ta 


<Pouoz 


P.N.V. 


G. 
D: 
A. 


145 


Tpopyrar 
Tpopyntav 
Tpopyrats 
Tpopyras 


a. Most nouns of this declension have the nom. in a, », 


or a, and are feminine. 


6. Some end in -s, and are masc. Eng. pabyrns, atsct- 


ple; veavias, young man; KpiTys, judge. 


Cc. yh, 9, earth, contracted from yéa, is declined through: 
out as dpxy, but with the circumflex accent. 


§ 23. SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. 
Adyos, 0, word. So0ddos, 6, servant. 
Stem doyo- Stem dovdo- 
S.N. Adyos SodXos 
G. Adyou SotvXouv 
D. Adyo SovAw 
A. Aédyov SotAov 
V. Adye Sotrc 
P.N.V. Adyou SodAor 
G. Adyev SovA@V 
D. Adyots SovAots 
A. Aédyous SovAous 
vids, 507. 
SN. ités Stem vio- 
G. viod 
D. vie 
A. vidv 
V. vié 


1 See 51 and 54. 


” 
avOpwiros, 77071. 


Stem avépwio- 


” 
avOpwrros 
avOpatrov 
avOporw 
mv 
avOpwirov 
avOpwrre 

»” 
avOpwrrot 
avOporwy 
avOpaois 
avOpatrovus 


P.N.V. viol 


G. vtdv 
D. vtots 
A. vtots 


146 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


Sapov, 76, g7/t. 
Stem dwpo- 
S.N.A.V. 8apov P.N.A.V. 86pa 
G. Sapov G. S8apev 
D. S4peo D. Spots 


a. "Inoots, Fesus, is Inoov in the gen., dat., and voc. 


§ 24. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

Mase. fem. Neut. 

SiN; 0 7 TO 

G. Tod THs Tov 

D. te TH Te 

A. Tov THY 76 

P.N. ot at Ta. 

G. Téav TaV TOV 

D. ois Tats Tots 

A. tots Tas Ta 


§ 25. ApyECTIVES OF THE A- AND O-DECLENSION. 


Kadés, 200d. 

S.N. Kadds Kady Kaddov 
G. Kadod KaA TS Kadov 
D. Karo Kady Kado 
A. Kaddév KaAHV Kadov 
V. Karé KoA} Kadov 

P.N. Kadol Kkadat KOAG 
G. Kartdav Kadav KaAav 
D. Kadois KaXais KaXots 
A. kadots Kaas KaAG 


PRONOUNS IN -os. 


WStos, o7e’s own. 


S.N. tos i8{a Sov 
G. tdSlov t&las iSlov 
D. Ble 8a Slew 
A. WWiov i&iav  iBrov 
V. Wee iSia = YSov 
P.N.V. ror rar téza 
G. istev iStov iSlov 
D. idfois Slats iSlors 
A. (Blovs iSias Sa 
§ 26. PRONOUNS IN -os. 


147 


piKpds, sazad/, 


pLKpdS  pLLKpd 
PiKpoD —LLKpGs 
Bikp@ = Keg 
PLKpOv pLKkpdy 
BLKpe puKpd 
Bikpot = ukpat 
PLKp@y = LLKp@v 
HLKpots puLKkpais 
PiKpovS pLKpas 
Cf. 62-64, 


HLKpOV 
puKpod 
piKkp@ 

HLLKpov 
PLKpoy 


BLKpa 
PLKpa@v 
PuKpots 
pLuKpa 


ovtos, ¢iis (one) ; éxeivos, that (one) ; autos, he, himself. 


S.N. otros 

TOUTOU 
TOUTW 
TOUTOYV 


OvTOL 
TOUTMV 
TOUTOLS 
TOUTOUS 


v 
POONA PON 


iJ4 
auTH 


TAVTNS 
TAUTY 
TAUTHY 


avTat 
TOUTWY 
TAvVTALS 
TavTAS 


TOUTO 
TOUTOUV 
TOUTW 
TOUTO 


TAavTA 
TOUTWY 
TOUTOLS 
TavTa 


a. avros and éxetvos are declined like xaAds, above, 
except the neut. sing. of each is airé and éxetvo in nom. 


and acc. 


b. avros is used as the pers. pron. of the 3 pers., he, 
she, it ; but in the od/igue cases only. When used with a 
noun in any case, it means Azmself, etc.; ¢.¢. 6 avnp avtos, 
the man himself. But when the art. precedes the pron., as 
6 avTos avyp, it means ¢he same (man). Cf. 69-10. 


148 


§ 27. RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
6s, who. 
oS 1 6 ot ai 
ov 7S ov ov av 
@ 1 rn ots ais 
ov av o ovs as 


§ 28. Consonant OR THIRD DECLENSION. 


MutTeE STEMS. 


Xapis, q, Lace. 


Stem yapir- 
S.N. xépts 
G. yxdprros 
D. xdpute 
A.  xdpw 
V. xdpts 
P.N.V. xdputes 
G. xXapltrev 
D.  xaptor 
A. yxdptitas 
vve, yn, 2zght. 
Stem vuxr- 
S.N.V. vté 
G. vuktds 
D.  vuxrt 
A. voxra 
P.N.V. vixres 
G.  vuKtav 
D.  vvét 


A. vt«tas 


Cf. 127-132. 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


LINGUAL 


éXtis, 1, hope. 
Stem eA.d- 


éXtrls 
éX1rldSos 
éXmrlBu 
édrrlda 
éArrl 
éX1ridSes 
éXTrid8ev 


éXtriot 
éA1r (Sas 


apxav, 0, ruler, prince. 


Stem apxort- 


apXov 
apXovTos 


ww 


apXovTe 
apXovTa 
apXovrTes 
apxdvTev 
apxovert 
apXovTas 


NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 149 


§ 29. Neurer Nouns or THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
STEMS IN -ar. Cf. 106. 
cdpa, 76, Jody. 


Stem owuar- 


S.N.A.V. capa _P.N.A.V. copara 
G. ceparos G. cwopartev 
D. copate D. copacr 


Ovopa, TO, 2a/1E. 


Stem ovouar- 


S.N.A.V. dvopa P.N.A.V. ovépara 
G. ovdparos G. ovopdatev 
D. ovépare D. ovépace 


§ 30. Neurer Nouns or THE Tuirp DECLENSION. 
STEMS IN -eo. Cf. 135. 


yévos, T6, race. 


Stem yeveo- 
S.N.A.V. yévos P.N.A.V. yévn (yevea) 
G. yévous (yeveos) G. yevdv (yevewv) 
D. yéve D. yéveor 


§ 31. Srems IN -. AND -ev. THIRD DECLENSION. 


modus, 4, cety. Cf. 112. 


Stem 7roX- 

S.N. amddus P.N.V. éAets 
G. mddews G. modeov 
D. wmode D. wédAeor 
A. éA.Ww A. éXeus 
V. wor 


150 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


Bactrets, 6, k77¢. 


Stem Bacidev- 


S.N. Bacvreds P.N.A.V. Bacrrets 
G. Bacrtréws G. Bacréov 
D. Baorr«Zt D. Bacrctor 
A. Baciréa 
V. Baotrcd 


§ 32. Liguip SreMs oF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


alov, 0, age. nyepov, leader. 
Stem awy- Stem 7yeuor- 
S.N.V. alov =P. aidves S.N.V. ryepev P. yepoves 
G. aldvos aidvey G. ryepsvos — Hyepovey 
D. aiave aidcr D. ryepove TYEpOore 
A. alava aladvas A. 1yepova nYEROvas 
§ 33. SYNCOPATED STEMS IN -ep-. 


mathp, 6, father. Cf. 113. 
Stem marep- 


S.N. aarp P.N.V. aarépes 
G. ‘martpds (7raT€pos) G. mTatépwv 
D. warpt (zarépt) D. warpdaot 
A. tatépa A. tartépas 
V. wartep 

avqp, 6, wan. Cf. 114. 
Stem avep- 

S.N. dvip P.N.V. dvSpes (avépes) 
G. dv8pds (avepos) G. avipdv (avepwv) 
D. dvbpi (avépr) D. dvSpacr 
A. avSpa (avepa) A. dv8pas (dvépas) 
V. dvep 


ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. I 51 


a. pytnp, mother, Ovyarnp, daughter, and yaorip, belly, 
are nouns declined the same as TATyp. 


§ 34. The following are nouns of the third 
declension that have irregularities of form or 
accent. Only forms of the New Testament are 
here given. 


yovu, T6, kuee. Plur. yévara, yovarwv, yovacr. 

yer}, 1, woman, yvvarkds, yuvaikt, yuvatka, yovor. Plur. 
yuvaikes, yuvarkdv, yuvartl, yuvaikas. 

Opié, 4, Zaz, tplxa. Plur. tplxes, tprxav, Oprki, tplxas. 

kvov, dog. Plur. kbves, koi, kivas. 

ovs, 76, car. Plur. @ra, aot. | 

tovs, 0, foot, 7o8ds, woSt, wéSa. Plur. wé8es, woSav, root, 
wodas. 

UEwp, 76, water, Waros, VSaTt. Plur. vara, V8drov, Vacr. 

xelp, 9, Zand, xeupds, xerpl, xetpa. Plur. xetpes, xeupav, 
Xepol, xetpas. 


§ 35. ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 


STEMS IN -eo- STEMS IN -p- 


GAyOHs, fru. 
Stem adynec- 


adpov, foolish. 
Stem adpop- 


S.N. éAnOAs adndés adpwv adpov 
G. dAnBots ad povos 
D. det adbpove 
A. adnO4 &AnbEs adpova adpor 
V. dn Q€s adpov 
P.N.V. dAnets adn OF adpoves adpova 
OF dAnPav appdvev 
D. aAnPéor adpoct 
A. dAnfets dA OA adpovas cipova 


152 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


§ 36. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT 
DeEcLENSION. Cf. 164-165. 


mas, all. péyas, creat. 
Stem rapr- Stems peya-, ueyaNo- 
S.N. ads Tard Wav péyas peydrn péya 
G. wavtés wacns twavTéds peyadov peyddns peyadou 
D. wavti waon mavTl peyddw peyddy peyaro 
A. TavTa Tacav may péyav peyadnv péya 
V. av TATd Wav peya. peyardn péya 
P.N.V. wavres madcat mavTa peyddor peyddar peydda 
G. ravtTev Tacav mavrav pcyddkov peyadhov peyahov 
D. waot Tacos Tact peydAous peydAats peyddous 
A. mavtas mécas wavTra  peyddovs peyddas peyada 
modus, 712Ch, many. 
Stems 7oXu-, toAXo- 

S.N. odds modAh trodd P. moddot amoddal moda 
G. toddot rodAfs troAdod TOAA@Y troAA@v troAA@v 
D. wodkdX® trodkAq TroAAG tmodXots troAAais trodXois 
A. wodtv modAhv odd ToAAovs Todds ToAAd 
§ 37. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Add -repos for the compar., and -raros for the superl. 

lox upds, lox up6-repos,! (lox vpd-ratos), 
SLY ONE. StYVOng-er. strong-est. 
2. Add -wyv for the compar., and -toros for the super. 
ToXvs, ahe-twv, ahe-toros, 
much. more. most. 


1 When the penultimate vowel is short, as in codpés, the o 
is lengthened before -repos and -raros; e.g. copds, copwrepos 


(copwratos). Cf. 225. 


CARDINAL NUMERALS ; PRONOUNS. 153 








§ 38. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
ayabds, cood Kpeloowv KpatTioTos 
Kakos, dad Xelpov 
Kahds, 200d KaAAlov 
péyas, great pelLov péyto-ros } 
piKpds, s7zall dcowy — €XaX LETS 
mods, 721Ch telov aeto Tos 


a. Comparatives in -wy are declined like dppwy, § 35. 


§ 39. CARDINAL NUMERALS. 
eis, o7e. tpets, three. Téroapes, four. 
N. eis pla év tpeis = tpla Téroapes Ttéccapa 
G. évds pias évds TPLOV TETTAPOV 
D. évi pid évi Tpicl TET T APL 
A. €va plav év tTpeis tpia tércapas téccapa 


a. The cardinal numerals from 4 to Ioo are indeclinable. 

6. Ordinal numerals (ap@ros, etc.) in -os and -ou are 
declined like adjectives in -os. 

c. For the declension of otdeis (otd€, axd not, + eis, one), 
see 221. 


§ 4u. Pronouns. Cf. 68 and 213. 


éya, J. Personal. ov, you. 

S.N. éyé S.N. of 

G. p00, pov G. cod 

D. pol, por D. got 

A. épé, pe A. oé 
P.N. pets, ewe P.N.  dpets 

G. tpev G.  tpdav 

D.  ypiv D.  vptv 

A. mpds A. wpds 


1 Occurs but once, 


154 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


Reflexive. 
euautod, mzyself. ceavtod, thyself. 

S.G. €pavrot, -fs weavtod, -fs 
D. €pavte, -F wEeavTH, -7 
A. pavtov, -hv weauTov, -hv 

P.G. jpav airav : UVpBaY adTav 
D. piv adtrois, adtrais tptv adrots vpty adrats 
A. 7pGs attots, airds teas aitovs wtyds aitds 

éavtod, himself, herself, itself. 

S.G. €avtod, -fs Ps EQUTaV 
D. €avto, -F €avtois éavtais éavrois 
A. éautév, -hv, -6 €avtots éavtds éavTa 
§ 41. luterrogative. Indefinite. 

tls, who. tls, Some one. 

S.N. tls ti P. tives tiva S.N. tls tl P. tives tid 
G.  tivos tlywv TLOS TOV 
Dy .rive Tio Til Tisl 
A. tlva ti tlvas tiva Tia Th Tivds TLVG 


a. Tis, some one, is an enclitic. Cf. 196-198. 


§ 42. The indefinite relative éatis (65, who, 
and tis), whoever, has the following forms: 


S.N. doris, WTIs, 6,7.  P.N. oirives, attives, dtiva. 
§ 43. PaRTICIPLES. 
Avo, Loose. 


Present Active. 


S.N. Atvov Avovra Atov 
G. Avovros Avotons AdvovTos 
D. dAdvovte Avotioy AvovTt 
A. dtovra \vovray Atov 


PARTICIPLES OF Avw. 155 


P.N.V. Avovtes Atvovoat Atvovra 
G. Avovrov Avove dv AuévTev 
D. Avover Avotoats Avover 
A. XAvovras Avotoas Avovra 


a. For the pres. part. of eiuc, az, see 183 and 184. 


Aorist Active. 


S.N. Atoas Avoaca Atoav 
G. XAtoavtos Avodons AvoavTos 
D. Aboavti Avedon Avoavre 
A. XAbocavra Atoacayv Atoayv 
P.N.V. Atoavres Atoacar Atboavra 
G. Avoedvrov Avcacav Ave avTey 
D. YAtoacr Ave dcats Atoact 
A. YAtboavras Avedoas Aicavra 
Perfect Active. 
S.N. AeAvKds AeAvKVia AeAUKOS 
G. XeAuKSTOS AeAvKulas \eAUKOTOS 
D. dedAvKéti AeAvKvia. AeAuKOTL 
A. XedAvKOTa AeAuKuiay AeAUKOS 
P.N.V. XedAuKétTes AcAvKviat AcAuKOTA 
G. XeAuKOTeV AcAvKULOV AeAUKOTAV 
D. Aedvedor AeAvKvlats AeAvKOoL 
A. XeAvKOTas AeAuKulas AeAUKOTA 


6. So likewise the 2 perf. act.; as éords, éorvia, éards, 
standing, from torn, Co make stand. 


Aorist Passive. 


S.N. AvBets AvOetora Avdev 
G. Avbévros Avdetons Avvévros 
D. AvOévre Avdeloy Avdévre 
is 


Avbév Avbeio-ay Avbey 


156 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


P.N.V. AvOé€vrtes Avbetoar Avbévra 
G. dAvévrov Avbero dv AvvévTwv 
D. AvOetor Avbeioats Avbeior 
A. Avbévras Avbeloas Avbévra 


c. So likewise the 2 aor. pass.; as omape’s, orapeica, 
orapev, from oreipw, sow. 


§ 44. Participles in -ewy and -awy contract as 
follows : 


Aar€wv 1 Ladéovra Aahéov, speaking 
become Aadév Aadotoa Aadotv 

Aadotyros Aahovons AadodvtTos 

fawv 2 {aovca taov, Living 
become {év {aca Lav 

{Lavtos toons {avtTos 


§ 45. Seconp Aorist PARTICIPLES OF IRREGULAR 
VERBS. 


SiSwpr. — Sots, ovving. Baive. — Bas, going. 
S.N. S0is Sotca Sv S.N. Bas Baca. Bav 
G. 8dvros Sovcns S6vtos = G. Bavros Baons  Pdvros 
ere. etc. 
a. So the pres. part. 880%s. 


riOnpr. —Oels, lacing. wintw.—trerav, falling. 
S.N. Beis Oetora Bev S.N. werdv mecotca trecdy 
G. B€évros Belons PévTos G. mrexdvTos tmerovans merdvTos 
etc. etc. 
6. So the pres. part. rvBels. ¢. So all 2 aor. ptcs. in -év. 


1 See §§ 5, 8; 8, 4. 2 See §§ 5, 1, 2; 8, 3. 


THE VERB. 157 


- ° O ° 
lornpr. — otras, Standing. yiwaokw. — yvots, krowZng. 
S.N.oras otdoa ordv S.N. yvots yvotoa (yvdv) 
G. ordvtos oraons otavtos G. yvdvTos yvovons yvovTos 
etc. etc. 


§ 46. All participles in -wevos are declined 
like xaXdos, § 25. 


THE VERB. 
Voice. 


Si4(m bhere are: tutee voicessin, Greek <sthe 
active, middle, and passive. Of these the active 
and passive are the same as the active and 
passive in English. 

The middle voice represents the subject as 
acting upon itself or in some way that concerns 
itself. 


1. The Direct Middle where the subject acts 
directly upon itself; ¢.g¢. Novw, J wash; Novopan, 
I wash myself. 

2. The Indirect Middle where the subject is 
represented as acting in some way for itself ; 
e.g. ayopatw, I buy, ayopafoua, [ buy for my- 
self; vinta, I wash, virtopat Tas xetpas, [ wash 
my own hands. 


§ 48. The uses of the middle voice are numer- 
ous, and are best learned from the lexicon. 


158 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


Often the sense of the verb changes in the 
middle; e.g. weiOw, [ persuade; welOopat, I per- 
suade myself, I obey. 


Mood. 


§ 49. There are five moods in Greek: the In- 
dicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and 
Infinitive. The Indicative, Imperative, and In- 
finitive correspond very closely to the same 
moods in English. The Subjunctive is most 
often translated by the English fotential. The 
principal uses of the Subjunctive are explained 
in 87, 95-97, 158. See also under Syntax. 

The Optative mood is rare in the New Testa- 
ment, and hence is not given with the para- 
digms. For the forms that occur and the uses 
of the same, see § 70 and § 71. 


Tense. 


§ 50. The tenses of the Indicative mood are 
seven. The present and zmperfect denote con- 
tinued or repeated action; the aorzst and future 
denote an indefinite action; the perfect, pluper- 
fect, and future perfect denote completed action. 


§51. The tenses of the subjunctive are the 
present, aorist, and perfect; the latter is very rare 
in the New Testament. 


THE VERB. 159 


§ 52. The tenses of the Indicative are distin- 
guished as primary and secondary. 


PRIMARY: = Present, future, perfect, future perfect. 
SECONDARY: /wiperfect, aorist, pluperfect. - 


§ 53. The principal parts of a Greek verb are 
the first person singular of the present, future, 
(first or second) aorist, (first or second) perfect, 
indicative active; the perfect middle, and the 
first or second aorist passive ; e. g. 

Avw, Atdow, é€Avoa, A€éAvKA, AeAupor, eAoOnv 
Kplvw, KpivO, éxpiva, KéxpiKa, Kekptar, éxplOnv 


§ 54. There is no difference in meaning nor 
in translation between a first aorist and a second 
aorist, between a first perfect and a second 
perfect. 


$55. The tenses of the verb are divided into 
nine classes or tense systems, each having a 
distinct tense stem. 


. Present including present and wiper fect. 

. Future “future active and middle. 

. first aorist “ — first aorist active and middle. 

. Second aorist “ second aorist active and middle. 


_ first perfect “ first perfect and pluperfect active. 

. Second perfect “ second perfect and pluperfect active. 

. Perfect middle“ perfect and pluperfect middle and 
passive and future perfect. 

. first passive “ first aorist and future passive. 

. Second passive“ second aorist and future passive. 


WO co N AWM BW DN 


160 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


§ 56. 1. ACTIVE VOICE OF dive. 
Present. Imperfect. Future. 
INDICATIVE. I. Avo éXvov iow 
S. 4 2. Aves éAves —— NDoeLS 
3. Aver eAve voee 
[ I. AVopev éXvopev vcopev 
ite 2. vere évere cere 
| 3. Avovar éXvov Avrovet — 
SUBJUNCTIVE. | I. Avo 
S. 4 2. Adys 
3. Avy 
I. Avopev 
P. 4 2. Avnre 
3. Avoor 
IMPERATIVE. s, | 2: Abe 
"| 3. Avéro 
2. AVETE 
P. 4 3. Avévrev or 
Avérooav 
INFINITIVE. Aveuv More 
PARTICIPLE. Atav, Nicov, 
Atovra, - AVorovca, 


Atov (§ 43) Adcoov 


INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


” 


S: 


IMPERATIVE. S 


INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


ACTIVE VOICE OF Avo. 


161 


I Aorist. Lier ject. 1 Pluperf. 
[ t. ed\voea ALUKA (€)AeATKeELV 
/ 2. €Xvoas AéAUKAS (€)AeAUKeLS 
a edvoe héXuKe (€)AeADKEL 
I. &Lvoapev AeAtKapey (€ )AEADKEL- 
pev 
} 2: éXvoare AeAVKaTe  (€)AcAUKEL- 
; TE 
ee éX\voav AeAVKaor  (€)AEAUKEL 
or -kav cay 
I. \vrw [AeAUK@ 
2. Avoys AeAYKYS 
| 3. Avoy AcADKY 
| I. Avowpev AehdKopev 
2. AvoHTE Ach vKyTE 
| 3. Avowor edKoot] 
[ 2. Atoov [A€AuKeE 
| 3. Avodart AehuKéro 
(2. Nurare AeAvKere 
3. Avodvrev or 
[ Avedtacav edvKéTorav] 
Atorat AeAvKEevat 
AVeas, AeAvKebS, 
AVoaca, AeAvKvia, 


Atoav ($43) DAeduKds (§ 48) 


162 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEk. 


2. MIDDLE VOICE OF Avo. 


Present. Imperfect. Future. 
[NDICATIVE. | T. Avopar éLvopny Avoopar 
S. 4 2. Noy, Aver éX\vov voy, Avoret 
L 3. Averar éXveTO Avoerar 
| I. Avopeba €Avopeda Avodpeba 
P. | 2. Aver Oe evec be vorer Ge 
3. AVovTaL éX\vovTo Avoovras 
SUBJUNCTIVE. I. Avopar 
2. dvy 
3. AvHTaL 


( 
Sal 
ies Avaopeda 
P. / 2. Adobe 
Ls. 


+ 
AvovTaL 


IMPERATIVE. S (2. Avov 
3. Avér Ow 


2. Aver Ge 
P. { 3. Avér8wv or 
Avéc8woav 


INFINITIVE. Aver Oar Atoeor Par 
DARTICIPLE. Avdpevos, \vodpevos, 


Avopevn, -y; -OVv 
AVSpevov (§ 46) (§ 46) 


INDICATIVE. 
J 
| 


SUBJUNCTIVE. /[ 


IMPERATIVE. 2. 
sf 


MIDDLE VOICE OF Avo. 163 
I Aorist. Perfect. Pluperf. 
. Xvodpnv éAvpaL, éLeXDp nv 
. vow AeAvora éhéXvo-0 
. voato AéAvTAY éXéXuTO 
» Avodpeba AceAdpela EherATpEBe 
. Avoacbe AéAvO-Ge éhédvuo Ge 
. &X\voavTo AeAvvTar éXéXuvTo 
» AVowpar AeAvpEvos w 
. Noy AeAvpevos 1S 
. Adonrar AeAvpLEvos 7 
. Ave dpeba AeAvpévor Gpev 
. Avono Ge AeAvpévor HTE 
. AVrovrat AeAvpEvoL Wore 
doar [A€Avero 
3. Avedcbw AceAto Ow 
. Avoacbe Avo Ge 
. AvodoOwv or AcdAtoOwv or 
Avedobwoav Achicbworav]} 
Avoac Bat Aeddo Bar 


INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Avordpevos, -n, AeAupEvos, -1, 


-ov (§ 46) 


-ov ($ 46) 


164 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


3. PASSIVE VOICE OF Avo. 


fut. Perf? 1 Aor I future} 


INDICATIVE. I. [AcAvoopar  éAvOnv AvoAcopat 
S.{ 2. Aedkvog,-cer EADONs AvOyoy, -cer 
3. AeAvoerar e0On Avoqoerar 
| I. AeAvodpeba eXVOnpev Avoynodpe8a 
P.} 2. AedvoerOe eADONTE AvoAcer Ge 
3. AcAvoovtTar] eAkvAncav  AvoAcovrar 
SUBJUNCTIVE. Avbd 


I 
a AvOqs 
3 Av0q 
I. AvOdpev 
ie pet Avo Are 
a Avdaore 
L 
| 


IMPERATIVE. s, {2 AVOnte 
a. AvOqTe 
2 MONTE 
s Avbévrwv or 


AvOqTecav 
INFINITIVE. AeAboer Bar Avdjvar AvoAcer bax 


PARTICIPLE. AcAvordpevos, Avdels, AvOnodpevos, 
1, -Ov Avbeiora, -1), -Ov 


(§ 46) Avdev ($43) (§ 46) 


1 All other tenses of the passive voice are the same in form 
as the middle. 


SECOND AORIST, PERFECT, ETC., OF Air. 165 


$57. Srconp Aorist (ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) AND 
SECOND PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF hkeltro. 


2 Aor. Act. 2 Aor. Mid. 2 Perf 2 Pluperf 
INDICATIVE. 
(I. €Autrov euro env AAoura ~=—S [ENA ary 
S./ 2. dues éXltrou AéAoutras = ENA ars 
| 3. €dutre éXlarero héXoutre éhedoltrer(v) 
I. €Alrropev eAuré we8a AeAoltrapev éXeAolrrepev 
P. 1 2. édtaere éX treo Oe NeAoltratre €NeAOltreTE 
L 3. @durov éXltrovto AeAolitact  édeAolrrecav, 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 
(I. Altra Altrapar [AeAoltrw 
S. 2. Alarys Alay AeAolmrys 
3. Alwry Alarnrat AeAolrry 
(I. Altropeyv Avie pela AeAolrapev 
P. | 2. Ntiwnre Alaryno Ge AceAolanre 
L 3. Alarwort Alrrovrar Aedoltroct | 
IMPERATIVE. 
5, {2 Altre Autrod [ AéAourre 
"| 3. Auréro Autréc Bw AeAouTrérw 
(2. Alcrete _ Altrec Ve AeAoltreTe 
P./ 3. Aurévrov or AurérPwv or AeAouréroorav] 
Aurétocav dArrécOwcav 
INFINITIVE. 
Aurretv Aurréo Bat [AeAourrévar | 
PARTICIPLE. 
Aurrev, Aurépevos, -n, AeAoutreds, 
Autrotoa, -ov (§ 46) Aeourrvta, 


Aumdy (§ 45, c) -w6s (§ 43) 


166 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


§ 58. FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE 
(LiguID FORMS) AND SECOND AORIST AND 
SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE OF ¢atve. 


ful. Ac. 


I. dave 
5. 2. daveis 
| 3. pavet 


I. havotpev 
P./ 2. haveire 


| 


| 3- pavotor 


INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. [ I. 
se a 


& 
Ie 
Pe 2; 
L 3: 
IMPERATIVE. s, { 2: 
3: 
ze 
Pia: 
(NFINITIVE, davety 
PARTICIPLE. davdv, 
davoica, 
davoty 
(§ 44) 


Fut. Mid. 


pavodtpar 
davet, dav 
daveirar 
havovpeba 
daveio Ge 
pavotyrar 


daveto bar 


davovpevos, 


ya eames 


($ 46) 


1 Aor. Act. 


éedyva 
éedynvas 
ednve 
edt vapev 
eprvare 
Edyvav 


djve 
barns 
Paya 
djVvopev 
bjvyre 
diyvect 


dijvov 
dnvarw 
bivate 


dynvavrev or 
dynvatocay 


pivar 
divas, 
ojvaca, 


divav 


(§ 48) 


FULURES AND AORISTS OF ¢aivw. 


167 


VAC. Wid. “2, Aor. Pass. 2L/0b Lass. 
INDICATIVE. I. ébnvapny éhdvyv davycopar 
S.4 2. ébyve ehayvns pavyce, -o7 
i éptjvaro ehavy davyioerar 
[ I. Epyvapeda éhavynpev cavynodpeba 
Le 2. éprvacbe éehavyte  havycec be 
| 3. €bhvavto éhavycav davycovrat 
SUBJUNCTIVE. I. Phvopar have 
S.4 2. oqvy davis 
(3. dhynrar davyj 
(I. hyvdpeba davaepwev 
P. + 2. pyvynobe pavite 
3. Pyvevrar pavace 
IMPERATIVE. 5 {2 bivar pavybe 
3. dynvacbw davyto 
(2. divacbe pavyre 
P. { 3. dyvac8wv or davévtwv or 
myvac8wrav davytacav 
INFINITIVE. bjvacbar davqvar havycerOar 
PARTICIPLE. byvapevos, davels,  chavyocpevos, 
1, -OV davetoa,  -y, -oVv 
(§ 46) davev (§ 46) 


(§ 43, c) 


168 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


IGYU 
Sioylig 


oylg 


1.0200\lg 
aLaoylg 
Aasriaoylig 
yoylig 
Sioylig 
oylig 


(“oylig) 
(sloylig) 
(moylig) 


(,0n00yiQ ) 
(2490yL@) 
(ast/ooyig) 


(20ylk) 
(s290\iQ ) 
(moylig) 


Lyip 
Sly 
oy 


(lay) 
(sliayip ) 
(my) 


*H2UIUNLQNGS JuUdSIAT 


1.0L0\Ip 
3La3zyIp 
asnaoyid 


ayid 


S23YIh 
OV 


(2.0203\1 ) 
( 3L339\ Ip ) 
(43r02\1p ) 
(192\1 ) 
(si92\1) 
(mv ) 


"WL1WIIPUT JUISA4Y 


"AAILOY 


drat 
sori 
ons 


~ = 


r1oonhe 
ston. 
Asdoris 


brie 


sdrie 
oie 


(linrht) -€ } 
(sliorhs) +z 
(mors) “1 


(ana0nriL) °€ ] 
(s199N1L) +z + * 


(aavloprht) +1 | 


(axnr12) °€ 
| 


(sprit) -z fs 
(mp1) *1 | 


fal 


: payopur snyy oie Ysafzuvue “(-oylug) Moyle pue 
‘B20; “(-32XKIP) MIXIP “ouoy ‘(-vTIL) OTL JO SaSsUd} dSdU J. 


‘yoojsod ut 


pue juasaid oy} Ul payoeij]U0D oe M0 pue ‘w> ‘oo Ut saIoA ‘EG § 


“SdYaA LOVYLNO’) 


169 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


aoy lige 
Saoy lige 
Anoy lige 


amylig 


Agoylg 


AvOMLAo\ylig 
10 
AmLAno\ylig 
aLaoylig 
mLaoylg 
aovlig 


r0V\lig 
aio lig 
Arm ylig 


(20493) 
( s30yliQ3 ) 
(200y 492) 


(amoyg) 


(a1320\LQ ) 


(4n00.130\Ui9 


10 
Am1LAo0y lig ) 


Rees) 
(mapoylig) 
(20Vhg) 


(,0moylie) 
Cee eg 
( arrlmoyle ) 


9X)? (32V7P?) 

Sy? (S297?) 

anoyy2 = (409? ) 
9afsaGuy 

agoyrp (4m2\1p ) 


eet 
Sorli19 
Aon113 
‘ 7 


Aon. 


‘(pp § 998) yG2I27,40q yuasatd 


Apyid (4193Y1 ) 
‘anigwuUyuy guasadg 


Avoid (Av0M13939\IP 


IO 10 
AmLAnOYIp AMLA02V1) 
IL13VYyIp (2139\71p ) 
OLY (m133\71p ) 
VIP (22V/P) 


‘aLUypDOAIG~Uly JuasSadd] 


10M YI (.0mayip) 
atlyid (ethayip) 
aaoyip  (aarlmvip) 


aon. 


Anoop nis 
10 
AMLAg IL 


aLonie 
oun, 
one 


1.0071. 
aLoTiL 
asnoris 


(907/2 113) FoF 
(s>01/ 113) °Z 
(Aonrl 113) I 


(amp) 


(4190721) 


oii se 


Rare 


(9230712) 7, | 
(msa0M12) °€ 


(aompi1) - 
( atlivrlt) 


} 
| 
\ 
J 


ef 


| 


a 


(aarloprae) *1 


Gury2) zJ 8 


NTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


= 
4 
vy 


ESSE 


170 


warmyug  (imtAmoyke) 
39Dmylig (epnloylie) 
ngrtimylig (cprrlmoylie) 
imim\lig (m2hoylig) 
yoylig (“oye ) 
rvrlm yg (ivrlmoylig) 
wiraoylig (1900 lig) 
39-0n0ylig (29.090YLiQ) 
wgrtgoylg (ngsr/ooylig) 
wLAoylig (1130VliQ) 
yoylig (ioylig a20\e) 
wnaoyle (10700) 
anoylig? © (aooyligs) 
2LA0ylgs (31390VliQ9) 
Astaoyligs (431lo0ylig>) 


WLAMYIp  (MLAM>2VIp) 
39olyip  (390liayid ) 
nerroyip (vg2ImM2\1P) 
wmilyid (roLk2yi) 
Lyi (“ayip) 
wieyip  (rnrImay7p) 
"91 IUNQNS Juasahf 
wiaaoyip — (1N.LA09V1 ) 
90BYIP  —(99.:099VI) ) 
vestaoyip (npar/0xyip) 
MLIIVIP (10433\7 ) 


Lid aayid (liayip aay) 


iriaoyid (1nl02\1 ) 


"WLUOIPUT JUISIAT 


“ATACIW GNV HAISSV G 


anoyjg2 = (40373) 
32913 (2139y7p2) 
aadaoyih? — (437/091) 


WiAoML, (MLAMDIL) °f | 
spore (2p0livr2) Z | 
wgeriothe (npsrmnnr2) °j | 
woth, (slr) °€ | 
brie (lions) +z 
rotors (vorlm vrs) ry 
voLiwtia (12400712) *€ ) 
sgnnmi, = (99.0907/1L) *Z L 
verdors. (nperlowrit) *1 | 
wore (roL30V1L) °€ 
brie (inns aavrliz) +z | 
were (arovrt) +] | 
Aone, (4ovr149) °€ 

320112 (22901119) +z 
astomity (asrov119) +7 | 





O1dnoylige (o1s00ylig> ) oLanoyis (0.10913 ) oLamrit, (01007113) e | 


3g0noylge (99.090 Lie>) sgorVIh2 «= (39.099V71P>) sgovrisg § (99.0907119) *Z +g 
neetaoylgs (vpsrlooylies)  wgrtaoyid? (vgrrosyip2) — gari—prir4g (wgrvovrts) *1 | 


171 





oL1noyligs (0130Y4Q>) oL3aYi9 (0133913 ) ovo. (orapri13) *€ | 
aoylge = (aooyliga) gore (209713) ody = (noprht?) *z 5S 
Alrigoylgs (alirlooylig>) — alurigoyr? = (alirloayi? ) Auroriisg (abrloorhs) +1 j 
p9afraguey 


Soastinoylig (soasriooy ig) Soaatinoyid (soastioayip ) soasdothas (soasvlows) 
mgimjlvd puasadd 


wgonoylg  (109.030ViQ) meoByip  (7109.093\7 ) wgonth,  (17p9.090T/72) 
“a2IygwUyuy yuasadg 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


amponoyug  (Ampo0s0ylig Amgopyip (Amp0ryIp = amgonTlra (Amp.0>011i2 
10 10 iO 10 10 IO 
anomgonoylg An0mp.0z0ylig) avomgop ip A009 0291p) AvOMgoODTIL ADOMB020MIL) “f° +g 
sgoaoylg (39.0309) govyid = (99.0927) sgnnrit = (99.0907/L) *z | 
@gonoylg  (mp0z0\liQ) agopyip  (M9.929VI) mgopti,  (Mg0>0rNIL) “f) 
goylig (acy) aoyid (aor ) connie (aoprhs) -z) © 
*anipposaguly quasarg 


172 


2 Aor. 


Pres. and Impf. 


ere OT 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


CONJUGATION OF pt VERBS. 


§ 60. Verbs in we differ from verbs in w in 
the Present and Second Aorist Systems only. 
See Lessons XXXI. and XXXII. 


§ 61. Synopsis of fornpt, TiOnus, and SiSapi, 
in the Present and Second Aorist Systems. 


L[nadic. 
lornpe 


torny 


TlOnpe 


ér(Onv 


S(Sapu 


” 


edlSouv 


eoTHy 


 ( iorapae 








a, 
& torauny 
rg | Tenor 

= > D 

a er Oéuny 
y | Si8opnar 

a €5.86pny 
che | @éunv 
Q = | ed6pnnVv 


Sub). 


ict® 
TL00 


$18 


oTe 
6a 
$a 


ACTIVE. 
Lmper. 
torn 


TiPer 


S(dSov 


ore 
Bés 
S65 


Lnjin. 


€ , 
iorava. 
TiBévar 


Sr86vat 


oTThVat 
Octvat 
Sovvat 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 


io T@par 
TIWOGpar 


SSap.ar 


OGpar 
Sapar 


ictaco 


Ti8eco 


Sidoco 





toracbar 


Tiber bar 


8800 6a 





Béo Bar 


SocBar 


Fart. 


ioras 
TiBels 


Sid0%s 


oTas 

Beis 

Sovs 

e lA 
ioTapevos 


TWEWLEVOS 


8186 evoc 





Bénevos 
Sd6pevos 


§ 62. 


Plur. 


CONJUGATION OF pt VERBS. 


PRESENT SYSTEM. 


» torn 
. lorns 
. lornoe 
I. torapev 
Plur. 3 2. 
3 


. toract 


lorarte 


[ I. loryny 
Sing. 1 2, 
| 3. tory 


lorns 


. lordpev 
. orate 
. toracav 


I. tore 
Sing. 2: 
2 


. tora 


ec Ca 
LOTS 


| I. tordpev 
Plar3.2; 
3 


. toraoe 


iorHTe 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


Present Indicative. 


TlOnpe 
+TlOns 
TlOnoe 


7 Oenev 
+(Oere 
Tibéact 


Imperfect. 


érlOnv 
ér Bes 
ériBer 


érlOenev 
> , 
éeriOere 
éribeoav 


Present Subjunctive. 


TiOd 
TOs 
T.On 


TUWGpev 
TiOnTeE 


TiQact 


173 


S(Sap- 
Sides 


Sidoct 


SiSopev 
Sidore 


Si8dacr 


edlSouv 
é5(S0us 
é(S0u 


e5(Sopev 
ed5idSore 
@i8ocav 


$184 
S805 
S180 


S.SGpev 
S.sare 


Si8act 


174 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


Present Imperative. 


. (2. tory TBer Sidou 
Sing. ) , , 
| 3. toratre TiWéTo Sidote 
| 2. lorate T(Bere S(Sore 
Plur. 3. tordvrey or TWévTwyv or S.86vTev or 
L tordtecav TWéTor av S.86Twcay 
Present Infinitive. 
ioravar Tiévar Sr8dvar 
Present Participle (§ 45). 
torus TBels Sd0vs 
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
Present Indicative. 
| I. torapar Tear SiSopnar 
Sing. } 2. teracat TiBerar SiSocar 
3. lorarar TiBerar SiSorar 
(1. tordpeba TiOéne8a 8.86.00 
Plur. { 2. torace TiBer Be dido00Ge 
| 3- toravrar TiOevrar SiSovrar 
Lmperfect. 
I. lorapny eriBéuny eS pv 
Sing. | 2. tcraco érlBeco €S(8000 
3. terato ér Beto €8(S0To 


| [. 
Patty 4.2. 
L 3. 


Sin 


gg 


eT a 


Plur. 


Sing. | 


Plur. 


—S 


OQ NO = 


WN 


2 


Oe N WwW 


CONJUGATION OF pt VERBS. 


C , 
toTrapeba 
eo 

iorac Qe 


toravTo 


Present Subjunctive. 


. LoTowar 
. org 
. lorATar 


. toraneda 


e a 
. totnobe 


. totovTat 


Present 


loTraco 
4 , 
ioracw 


. toracbe 


. totacwy or 


c , 
toracQwcav 


TO aor 
T.OH 
TiOnTar 


TW ampe0a 
TiOno Ve 
TWovTar 


Lm perative. 


TiVero 


Ti0éc Bw 


7T(Ber Be 
TiécOwv or 
TWWéc Bworav 


Present Lnfinitive. 


toracbat 


Present Participle (§ 46). 


ioTapevos 


TBer Bar 


TBEnevos 


a 


€5r56 e800 
€5(S00-0e 
é5(SovTo 


SS apa 
S180 


SiSarar 


S.SHpc8a 
S800 8 


SidavTar 


d(80c0 


$1860 8a 


d(500-be 
$18608ev or 
8.860 0wcav 


SlSo0cAar . 


SBdp.evos 


176 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


§ 63. SECOND AORIST SYSTEM. 
ACTIVE. 


Second Aortst Indicative. 


| I. ony €0nka 1 €5oxa 
Sing. / 2. €orys €Onkas éSwkas 
Ss erry eOnke eSwxe 
I. €oTnpev eOHkapev eSoKapev 
Plur. 4 2. €ornre eOqkate eSdkare 
a eoTyncayv e8nkav éSwKav 
Second Aorist Subjunctive. 
Cr. ord Say ra) 
Sing. 7 2. orqs Qqs 805 
3. ory 07 o 
(I, oTapev Qaopev Sapev 
Plur. tpi orTire Ofre Sare 
3. TTATL Vac Sact 
Second Aorist Imperative. 
: 2. orHOe és 86 
Sing. Y, : : 
3. oTHTH Sérw S6Tw 
Zs TE Q€ére d6Te 
Blots on poe 
3. oTHTacav Vérwoav Sotacav 
or oTavTeV or Vévtwv or S6vTev 
Second Aorist Infinitive. 
oriva. Vetvar Sovvar 


Second Aorist Farticiple. 
cords (§ 45) Qels (§ 45) Sots (§ 45) 


1 No 2 aor. ind. act. of ré@nuc and dldwue occurs —so the 
I aor. in -ka is given. Cf. 285, 3, note. 


Sing. | : 


. Béueba 


Plur. 


Sing. | 


Plur. | 


CONJUGATION OF pt VERBS. 


Second Aorist Middle Indicative. 


. €erbe 
” 
. €VevTo 


Second Aorist Middle Subjunctive. 
. Oapar 


04 
. OFrat 


. Odpe8a 


. O08 
. Gavrar 


Second Aorist Middle 


. Gov 


. bér0w 


2. Oéobe 


3. Ber bworav 


or 9écbwv 


eSdpnv 
éSo0u 
€S0To 
€S6pe00, 
€500-0e€ 
” 
€dSovTo 


dovrar 


Linperattve. 
Sov 
d600w 


S6ae 
S6c8wcav 
or 86c8av 


Second Aorist Middle [nfinitive. 


Gér Bar 


d600ar 


Second Aorist Middle Participle. 


Bénevos (§ 46) 


N 


Sdpevos (§ 46) 


eh 


178 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE pt FORM. 


§ 64. The verbs efui, am, inus (compounded 
with azo, ctv, ava, and xara), eit, go (only in 
compounds), oida, know, pnt, say, are all irreg- 
ular. 


§ 65. eit (stem eo-), a7. 
PRESENT. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. Imperative 
[ IT. ety o 
Sing.{ 2. ns tobe 
3. . orl n ETT, TT 
I. éopév ay.ev 
Plur.; 2. éoré ne eore 
ie 3. elo wort eotwoav 


Infinitive. elvar 


Participle. dv, ovva, ov; gen. dvtos, ovens, etc. (183). 


IMPERFECT. FUTURE. 
Indicative. Indicative. Infinitive. 
| I. vy (qpnv)! Evopar ever Par 
Sing.{ 2. ys (joba) eve, eon 
t 3. WV eorar Participle. 
| I. npev (qpeOa) érdpeba éo-djrevos 
Plur. +33 nTe eve Oe 
3. qWorav EvovTar 


+ Ch 18.0 


IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE pt FORM. 179 


S$ 66. adinue (stem €-), revzzt. 
The following forms of this verb occur in 
the New Testament: 


INDICATIVE ACTIVE. — (Pres. adeis, as though from adéw ) 
Adina, adbiewev, Apiopev, adiere, aplovor. Imperf. 
noe. Fut. dpfjow, adqoes, etc. Aor. apiKa, adfj- 
Kas, etc. 

INDICATIVE MID. AND PAss.— Pres. dplepor.! Fut. ade- 
Ojropat. Perf. 3 per. plur.ddéovrar. Aor. pass. &béOnv. 

SUBJUNCTIVE ACT.—2 aor. af, ddapev, abate. Pass. 
Aor. &e0q. 

IMPERATIVE ACT. — Pres. dptérw. 2 aor. des, dpere, 

PARTICIPLE ACT. — 2 aor. adels, adévres. 

INFINITIVE ACT. — Pres. ddvévar. 2 aor. act. adetvar. 





a. In® compounds with ovv, the pres. ind. 3 per. plur. 
has ovvidot, and ovviover. Subjv. cvvioot and 2 aor. 
guvect, and with ava 2 aor. ave. Aor. pass. ind. dvéOn. 

6. Pres. part. cvviets and ovviwv are found. The former 
is more regular and occurs in cuviévros, ovvidyres. dvévres 
2 aor. act. part. also occurs. 


§ 67. etut (stem t-), go. 
But few forms of this verb occur, and always 
in compounds. 


INDICATIVE. — Pres. -taov.  Imperf. -qeu, -yeoav. 
INFINITIVE. — -lévan. 
PARTICIPLE. — -lév, -mtoa, -idv, regular like dv, otea, 
ov (183). 

1 Conjugated like the mid. of ri@nu. 

2 Such forms only are here given of the compounds of tinue 
as might be difficult to recognize. The lexicon ought to be 
consulted for all verb forms 


180 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


§ 68. vila (stem 1-), now. 


This verb is a second perfect and conjugated 
regularly ofa, oidas, etc. The 3 per. plur. has 
icact once. tote in 2 per. plur. is also found. 

IMPERFECT. — 7Seuv,! qSets, etc. 

FUTURE. — el8qoovet. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. — €160, elSdpev, eidfre. 

IMPERATIVE. — tore, know ye (occurs once). 


INFINITIVE. — el8évav. 
PARTICIPLE. — elSds, elSvia, elds, like AeAuKds (§ 48). 


§ 69. ypl (stem ga-), say. 

This verb is found in pres. ind. dni and 3 
per. sing. and plur. dyot and gaci. Imperf. édy, 
he sata. 


§ 70. The following forms of the optative 
mood occur in the New Testament: 


Tic Presented Cnse. 
€xol, Jédor, Exovev, ely, Suvvaiunv, SvvatvTo, TAO XOLTE. 
2. Furst Aorist. 
mAEovdoal, TEpiacetoal, KaTevOtvat, moupoatey, Wyra- 
pyoeiay, evgaiunv. 
3. Second Aorist. 
payor, TYXoL, dwn, EVpotev, dvaiunv, yévorto, Aa Bot. 
4. Furst Aorist Passive. 
TAnOvvOein, AoyiHecy. 


1 In fact a 2 pluperf., but the perf. and pluperf. have in this 
verb the sense of the pres. and imperf. 


OPTATIVE MOOD. TENSE SYSTEMS. 181 


It may be noted (a) éyou, Oédor, duvatuny, Svvawvro, 7Ae€- 
- ovacan, TEeplogevoat, KaTevOvvar, evEalunv, payor, TUXOL, 
TacxorTe, dvalunv, yévorro, form the Optative by the ad- 
dition oft, which, with preceding vowel, forms a diphthong ; 
this diphthong is always long. (6) etn, rAnBuvOetn, Aoyt- 
aGety form the Optative by adding ww; in the case of dd 
the iota is subscript. (¢) €xouev, evporey, rroujoaev are 
also made by adding ty, the in the third person plural 
changing toe. (2) Wyradyjoeay differs from rouoaev 
in that e and a have changed place. 


§ 71. The following examples will illustrate 
the uses of the optative: 
1. The Optative of Wishing. 
Rom. 15:5. 6 de eds . . . Ody duty, now may God 
grant unto you! 
2. The Potential Optative. 
Acts 26:29. eifaiunv av 76 Oe, J could wish to God. 
3. Lndirect Question. 

Luke 1:29. dtedoyitero rorards ely 6 domacpds ovTOS, 
she was discussing what manner of salutation 
this might be. 

4. The Conditional Optative. 
1 Cor. 14:10. ei rvxou, ef zt should chance. 


TENSE SYSTEMS. 


§ 72. No one verb has all nine tense systems, 
but the following table shows the various tenses 
(as far as found in the New Testament) in Ava, 


182 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


loose, BarXw, cast, ypahbo, write, and Pbeipa, 
destroy. 


Present .... w%&- BarrA%- ypap%- pberp%- 
Future .... dwo%- Bare%- ypab%- hbep%- 
I Awrist. ... dAvea- ypaya- d0epa- 
BOF ish ct she Bar %- 

1 Perfect ... XedvKa- PBeBAnKa- 

a EEL ACL Rs tio ke yeypada- 


Perfect ( Perf.  dedv- BeBAn- yeypap- 
Mid. | Fut. P. d\duve%- 


ty ae eae Avbe(y)- PBAnde(n)- 
Fut. pono %- BrnOno %- 


| 


SEP MOAaT ypade(n)- pbape(n )- 
‘ Fut. p8apno %- 
§ 73. PERSONAL ENDINGS. 
Active. Middle and Passive. 
Primary. Secondary. Primary. Secondary. 
I. pe v pear nV 
Oiie2.as3 (rt) s oat co 
| seat, Te a TOL TO 
[ I. pev BEV pela pela 
| SP die bi TE oe oe 
| 3. vou, aoe v, cay VT vTO 
§ 74. The personal endings of the imperative 
rac Active. Middle and Passive. 
| 2. O 2. TE as oo 2. oO 
S./3. To P.;3. vrevor S.j 3.000 P.+ 3. cOwv or 
{ |  Tecav obwoay 


AUGMENT. 183 


§ 75. The endings of the infinitive are: 


pele i ev, contracted with € to ew. 
| var, evar. 


Mid.and Pass. o®ar 


§ 76. The tenses of the indicative are formed 
by adding to the verb theme, with certain modi- 
fications, the following suffixes. 


Pres. Fut. Aor. PAypeo0 LUpery. 


Active: -%- -0 %- -oa- -Ka- -KEL- 


Middle and Passive have the same suffixes 
except in perf. and pluperf., where there is 
none. The aorist passive has -@e- for I aorist 
and -e- for 2 aorist. 


AUGMENT. 


§ 77. 1. When the verb begins with a con- 
sonant the vowel e is prefixed to the theme in 
the imperfect and aorist; ¢.g. €Av-o-v, €-du-ca. 
This is called syllabic augment. In the perfect 
the initial consonant is placed before the aug- 
ment; ¢.g. AéAv-«a. This is called reduplication. 
In the pluperfect the reduplicated form may be 
augmented ; ¢.g. é-Ae-AU-KEL-V. 

2. When a verb begins with a vowel this 
vowel is lengthened in all past tenses: a=%, 


184 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 


€=n, o=o. Such an augment is called temporal 
augment; eg. ayo, lead, ijyov; Epyouat, come, 
npxKouny; axovw, hear, hxovoa. An initial diph- 
thong may lengthen the first vowel; e.g. airéw, 
ask for, ntnoa; vyoua, pray, nvyomny. 

3. Verbs beginning with two consonants ora 
double consonant (¢, &, yr) have the augment and 
mo reduplication in the perfect and pluperfect. 
A mute (§ 2) followed by a liquid X, yp, », p, is an 
exception to this; ¢.g. cpive, judge, has perfect 
Kéxpixa, and caréo, call, has perfect KéxdnKa. 

4. Verbs beginning with a rough mute 4, y, 8, 
have the corresponding smooth mute 7, «, 7, in 
the reduplication; e.g. $iréw, love, we-hirn-xa ; 
Oedopmat, behold, re-Oéa-wat. 


THE EiGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 


§ 78. It is necessary in the study of the Greek 
verb to determine the theme or root, for on this, 
with certain modifications mostly of tense and 
mood signs, the various tenses are built. This 
theme may or may not correspond to the theme 
as seen in the present indicative. More fre- 
quently the present stem is a strengthened form 
of the theme; ¢.g. Wa, Joose, has theme and 
present stem Av- the same, while xrérTe@, steal, 
theme x«der-, has present stem «Xerr-. Aap- 
Bava, receive, theme XaB-, present stem Nap Bar-. 


THE EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 185 


With reference to the relation of the theme 
to the present stem the verbs in Greek are 
divided into eight classes : 


§ 79. First CLass.—Verb stem remains un- 
changed throughout. The present stem is formed 
by adding simply the variable vowel % to the 
theme : 


Theme. Pres. stem. 
A€éyw, Say dey- rNey% 
viKdw, comguer vika- yiKa% 


§ 80. SEconp Crass. — Strong vowel forms. 
Some verbs have a theme ending in a mute, § 2, 
preceded by a short vowel, principally «¢ or v. 
The present theme of these verbs is formed by 
lengthening this vowel, « to e, v to ev, and the 
addition of % : 


Theme. Pres, stem. Fut. 
melOw, persuade  m6- me % Trea % 
hevyw, fice vy- hevy% hevé% 


§ 81. Tuirp Crass. — Verbs in -rtw or the 
T-class. Some verbs have the theme in a labial 
mute z, 8, ¢, that form the present stem by 
adding 7% to the theme: 


Theme. Pres, stem, Bute. 9 
KNérta, steal kXer- KAentT% = KxAeW% 
Kpitre, Aide Kpug- Kputt% = kpup% 


a. Kpvr-tw is for kpvd-re. 


186 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
§ 82. FourtH C Lass. — Jota class. 


I. Some verbs having a theme ending in a 
palatal mute «, y, x, add « % to form the present 
stem. This «% with the mute gives oo%, rarely 
Ce. 

Theme. Pres. stem. Fut. 
Kynpicow, Preach  KypuK- Knpvao%  — knpvE% 
maracow, smite  maray- mataco%  matag% 


2. When 1% is added to a theme in 6- the 
present stem ends in €%: 


Theme. Pres. stem. Fut. 
Bamrite, baptize Barrid- PBanril% Barric% 
cwlw, save owo- Tvl % cw % 


3. A theme in a liquid, X, pw, v, p, may add 6% 
for the present. A% becomes AA% : 


Theme. Pres. stem. Fut. 


ayyé\dw, announce ayyedX- — aryryeAX% ayyerc% — 
Badrdrw, cast Bad- Barrx% Bare% 


4. But with vy and p the « usually passes over 
to the preceding vowel and with a or e forms a 
diphthong : 

Theme, Pres, stem, Fut. 
alpw, take away —ap- aip% dpe% 
haive, sow cav- paw % pave% 


THE EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 187 


§ 83. Firra Criass. —n-class. The present 
stem of some verbs is formed by adding v% to 
the theme: 


Theme, Pres, stem. 
tive, drink Tt mriv% 


1. The suffix may be -av%. 


Theme. Pres, stem. 
¢ , ° ec e (0) 
Gpaprave, 5272 o.papT- apaptav% 


2. Under this class (1) come several verbs 
that insert a nasal yp, v, y, before the final mute: 


Theme. Pres. stem. 
AapPdave, rece’ve Aa f3- Aap Bav% 
tvyx ave, happen TUX- Tuyxav% 


3. The suffix may be -vusgu, after a vowel 
-VVUMLL. 


Theme. Pres. ind. 
Selkvupi, show deuK- SecKVUpL 
Lovvupe, o7rd Cw- Coovvupe 
OpvuUpL, Swear op- (00) OpVUpL 


§ 84. Sixtu Ciass.—Verbs in -cxw, the tn- 
ceptive class. A few verbs form their present 
stem by adding ox% or iox% to the theme: 


Theme. Pres. stem. 
ywooke, know yvo- ywwok% 
evpicke, find eup- evplak% 


188 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


§ 85. SEVENTH CLASS. — ue added to simple 
stem. This class includes most of the verbs of 
the s-Conjugation, which form their present 
and imperfect tenses zwzthout the use of %. 


Theme, Pres. ind. 
ternpt, make stand = ora- (-OT HAL 
dypt, say pa- pyc 


§ 86. EigutnH CrLass.— Mixed class. Verbs 
of this class are among the irregular verbs and 
form different tenses on entirely distinct stems, 
See the list of irregular verbs. 


Themes, 
éoOiw, cat echi- ay- 
Opdw, see 6pa-  om- to 
TPEXW, UN TpEX- Spap- 
hépw, dear pep- Ol- — EVEK- 


§ 87. The following verbs may be classified 
according to the principles laid down above. 

dogalu, dKove, dAcihw, TUTTw, AavOdvn, xalpw, Kpalw, 
orehiw, ViTTW, ApXojat, dyopale, dvotyu, TEOn pt, ddaoKw, 
eyelpo, dyyehru, pbavw, Caw, amroKreiva, TPE, $eiBopua, 
Exo, EpwTaw, Paryvopt, pavOaver, aepinp UTOTATTW, [LEVW, 
Jedw, mouvOdvopat, KaTadyvupt, exreive, avgavw, aoOvncKw, 
airéw, €vTéAAOpat, Sidwpu, ExKOTTW, ypadu. 


§ 88. The following table gives the principal 
parts of the most common irregular verbs in the 
New Testament. The aim is to give only such 
forms as occur. A rare compound or a variant 
reading may in some few cases present a form 
that is not given. 


184 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


"40913 = 40Q19 20L3\)9 
= ony? ‘S7 *% ‘lo’ ZT IY} OJ punoj usyo st v ‘low I oy} “Burpvor syIOF{ pue 309389 UY 7 


Alipao WLAMIPD pulp mokono anissof ‘rdlado 
Ce ee Pee moligyo as 471 ‘map 30 
nord 0300 aspayg *».02d0 
(z) Alrloyoup .03YOLD 
(z) PYmYoup “DO3sXpup ‘myoup = Ao.agsap ‘“Mayyoun 
alipavLy3uD 1DA19L49.LD AILMOLD ]2y ‘AI9LNOLD 
aligXo3a0 n3m210 
AligX male (z) vhm3ap ‘n3maal 
aligXioale ‘o>10Ale 31000 uago ‘mAi0av 
(‘y1ed) ‘marog 998 ‘marog/oad 
soasrlonpull. aygop9 ‘laaariprlo 
(2) Aosdonl 
pulsdorlle ‘polsdorl lt oolsdorp urs ‘oanrdorln 
Alig.onowl. (z) poxluwp poaowle .020¥D ADIY ‘ROMY 
Aligdu rvorldle oad. volt dp Avarw aynz ‘ody 
(Z) 40x | OV2- 
aligrd li. WOR AEN) es Ge 2707000 1 
AliyX te (z) aoknhle 30 poa ‘oko 
‘soy top *ssvq ‘fsa pp fred "78140 ‘ANIM "JUasadgd 


"suIIOJ oY} Jaye (z) Butoejd Aq pajousp useq aavy sjoayiod 
puoods pu” sjsiiov puosas ayy, ‘Aluo uoTysoduoo UI sind90 }T }eY} Sa}OUSpP WOJ B a1ojaq uay gly 


‘SdNaA UVINOANAT AO ATAVT, 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


190 


aligaX339 vorlaX a> 


aligdrh. vorldah lids 
Aliglangs 
den res 


LEE MURR 
Beer emo Ore 


alighags 

(1.1ed) $799X23Q 
(z)akpodds rrlrindhad 
aligomaks rorlomahs 
alighashs rorlluarhoh 

alighynog]» 
alighyg reriliy 2g 


"ssDq “AOP ‘ssod ‘fsa 


omhrle 


PHAR 


(‘y1ed) $m»3999 


( z)opndhad 
numaks 


(z)vao0had 


valiysog) 
mil? 


2p fred 


et 


ndr9Ale 
nokrluu 


0309? 
DMQI 
n.oligs 


1001393 


ntERT 
oiprodda 

(z) amaha 
(z) alrloashs 


(z) aoyng2 
(z) alig}a- 


"S140 


m3Xm9> 


vorlo.02 
mdsha 
monks 
rorlooliang 


M009 


[ool | 


(-ssed z) 
rvorloolidng 


372Q 
opodd 
vorloomah 
rvorlooliasd 


oye 
ronlo.olig)- 


"IANINT 


( ‘maaXm> 
ANODE See ae 
| SoaXn9 

. é 
anh gas ‘aoy9 
wap ‘rir 
Gn astvs dish 
Avau ag ‘ozikhs 
agp ‘rorlnang 
UL29S ‘O3M0Q 

/ 
7 ‘ 

9218 ‘1VIMQI9 


Pu1g *M3Q 


ypaq ‘039 
juvar ‘071039 
a2oys ‘raaw13Q 
agra ‘opndd 
mouy ‘oromark 
autojag vorloark 
ysum ‘rorloyaog 
aorsyy “oyyng 
os ‘marg 


"JUaIsatg 


Ig 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


aligid™ > vorhd3» D109 
Alip.ovyn9 
aligns ronlliya> oly 
(29s 
‘alignnma- : 
(-y1ed *jor) 
Align.103 (z) Sm1.03 
“onl.t.02 
pwliag>. 
(z) alpp.a 
(xed) Soasrlom9- 
pliX.o2 
Alipsdas oulidas 
(z) mgoyleye 
‘SSO0q ‘AOP "SSUq ‘fad 2K fred 


vAid > 
oo kk 
rareye) 
DY 
pon 
OADYM 9 


(-afqng ) mapeda» 


‘noligdama 
4 c 
DOIYDMI 


DOVDM a= 


(nur) (z) alto» 
‘(suery ) nolto> 


(z) AoAng?- 


(z) a0pyle 


"75140 7 


maid» * 
~~ 


MOND 
mADQd>» 

‘moligda 

030M 


MDVD ~ 


moo 
rorlaoanp- 
mokyrx9 


0093 


G23 


moldas 
ronlodn 


vorlo.onay3> 
4 c 


*IANIN 


adpnl ‘maidn 
yvaAg “ODXm 
Jaan ‘oroym 


unos ‘mamgdam 
¢ 
1102 "M2\0m 


UANG ‘770 


gas ‘rb107 
aip ‘or.oliag 
11102 SON?O 
Ang ‘MLL 
pais ‘rlaaamd 
avy ‘OX 


‘ 
pur ‘oxoidas 
‘ 
$0, Ole 
os ‘vorloXda 


"YUasadg 


ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


192 


(qed) 
(z)aldn.0> Soasldnz.09 
ror'rhdd > 


(‘yed) 
soasrlAnd.u3 (z}vXvd.u3 


0013.11.03 
oipadds 
n3lidd > 

(z) Alirloga.scs 
pz0d.3 
D.ONIY1L3- 


DYMO LIL (z) 10.031t3 ‘0.0313 
/ k «& 


(jared) DM L9.L 
Aligoliy.2a Soarv oly 23. 
(zed ) Soa 
aliglrlrsida dlr 1a1id>x 
Aligoi32z39 ornare (7) VM IOUrL 
(z) npAou2L 
nwvdo> 
Aliya ‘pwndm 


Alig.olarl > voruarlarl 
(1d) soxlgorlar 
ror oly>y- 
soasrirlliy3- (z) oplyrs 


"SSD *40P Se aay way *Lbay 


(z)Aoin> 
poly23 
« 


(z) Aor!3139103.2 
0.01919 
k 


(z) Aogv.L3 


(z) 10Q13 


po0nm 


(z) aogor's 
(z) aogny2 
(z) aogoy2 


"St40 


ogled 
omz0d.u 


ror!n0.032 
vorloi.z 


0s ‘00131L.0 

sv ‘oruid 

yvasg ‘aakid 
usvay ‘rovloanpAns 
op ‘mond 

710s ‘may 

[vf OL 

YULAP ‘MAIL 

Uy ‘mMlyurlre 


as2mungii17 ‘oars 113 


O079L 


aponssag ‘npr 
Aafjns ‘oXovn 


Amdms ‘jrod UII 
4? . 


‘yorlopo 


rorloprlluy 


"PANIMT 


aas ‘odo 

Avans ‘rnaarlo 
Aaguamas ‘orolartrdl 
wsvay ‘mangaor 
uUapply ag ‘MADgAvY 
ayn ‘mang rloy 


‘WUasI4d 


ANS, 


TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERB». 


(‘ssed z) 
(z) aldnXs vorloolidX a2tolas ‘d10X 
(z) aldvpps> ndr39p2 mdrs9p hossap ‘mdianp 
aligsdd a rorll.drs pwldry Ao.L13 md3 Aps ‘rll 
(z) aohap2 r0rloZaap aayf ‘oharsp 

(z) aowhaale 

AligXzale (z) vXoalap- ‘paale ©.070 Avaq ‘dah 

(‘ssed z) 

ronloolanp 
(z) alana ‘rorlaoan vag gv ‘oamp 

(z) vXasr2 
‘(z) vXnri92 (z) aoXa13 uaggvy ‘mavXhar 
(-y4aed) (z) aorlodgs uns ‘oX3d4 
(z)akpnd1s- soarrriodgs1 pip2dp2 ysiinou “op3dn 
AligX3.13 (Z) 4ova23 = rl 394 ADIQ ‘OLMIL 
AMEE 

alig>19 ronl3p>L 0413994 ‘puliga molg 290g ‘rluipis 
Alipory213  wrlory2134 = oY3.194 DO3V2L2  .03V34- pula ‘mrvrt 
align.o3 ro11.00.03.0 010.03.0 0.0.03 00.0 ALDS ‘M90 
(z)alndt03 —wrlrnd1.03- pp2d102 mMp2d10- w4nz ‘Op32dL0 
(z)alyp103- mryn103- ~— vwyvL.03- DY19.1.03- MY3L0- Puas ‘OYY2L0 


‘SSOJ “AOP ‘ssuq ‘sad ep ed Oe g "78140 ‘2ANINT ‘JUISIAT 


194 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREKFK. 


§ 89. To locate a verbal form at once is the 
most difficult thing a beginner has to learn, 
It is intended, therefore, that in the following 
pages the student shall have a special oppor- 
tunity for mastering a large part of this main 
difficulty. Of the most common irregular verbs 
there are here gathered into small space the 
forms that occur, and by a mastery of these 
pages a great deal will be done towards gaining 
a rapid and easy understanding of the Greek, 
read as Greek. 

After a thorough acquaintance with the 
paradigms and the principal parts of the ir- 
regular verbs, nothing may prove of greater 
profit than repeated drill on these forms. 


§ 90. akovw,! hear. 


HKOVOV, aKOVOUGL, AKiKOa, akovon, akovcw, 
akovaas, akovav, akovoducba, AKkovELs, AKNKOACL, 
axovabn, aKoveTe, akovcOnceTal, nKovcaper, 
akovovtas, akouvcOeiot, akovom“er, aknKearTe, 
AKOUGNTE, AKOVE, AKOVGEL, AKOUVTATE, HKoVCA, 
AKOVOVTOS, HKOVGTON, AKNKOOTAS, AKOVGETAL, AKOVEL, 
QKOUGUTW, AKOVTWCl, AKOVTOVTAL, AKOUGAL, AKOv- 


1 The aim is to give a// forms of these verbs, but such com- 
pleteness can hardly be expected. The various editors give 
often a different form for the same passage, and no concordance 
is, as yet, published which gives W. and H’s. reading. 


IRREGULAR VERBS: STUDY OF FORMS. 195 


TATWTAV, AKOVTAVTES, NKOVTATE, UKOUCETE, TKOUE, 
akovoecQe, a&KovovTt, AKOUGAVT@V, GaKOVOVTES, 
aKovGoVal, akovoVTAa, HKoVoAaS, aKoUcacl, aKov- 
gacda, KOVoE, akovodyTwY, aKovELY, aKoOvETO, 
AKOVOVTMV, GKNKOAMLED. 


§ 91. AVITTHLL, 7AzSe Uf. 


avéoTN, aVacTas, avaTiCETal, dvacTH, aviota- 
Tal, AVATTMOCL, aVacTICwW, avdoTa, AVATTHVAL, 
avecTNTaY, avaoTICEl, avacTicas, avacTdvTeEs, 
avictacbat, avactncovta, avdornbi, avéotyoe, 
AVIOTAMEVOS, aVacTaca, avacTday. 


§ 92. avotyw, open. 


avolka, avovEov, nvolyOnaar, avepyora, nvoiyn, 
avolyel, avox Oban, avoléavtes, avery pevas, 
dvewxOnoar, avolynoeTat, avolEas, avepy evn, 
_ dveex On, dvewye, avolEn, avolyw, davewyLévos, 
ivoike, dvewypever, avolEoat, avéwée, nvoly On, 
dvewyuevor, jve@x On, dive gryperns, vee Onoar, 
ave~ypLerny, volynoav, avewypévous, davoiyar, 
nuéwee, avoryOncerat, avoiEar, avewy Ojvat. 


§ 93. atrobvickw, de. 


> / 2 if > / b] / 
aTéGavov, aroOvicKkav, anobvicKe, amroOvi- 

/ , ’ 
oKopmeV, aTobvncKev, aToOavoytos, ameOdvere, 


196 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


aToOvncKkoval, aTobadvapev, atrobavoertes, atroba- 
veital, aTréOvnoKev, aTroOaverTi, aTobavn, atrobvn- 
oKovTes, aTobavety, atroOvncKopev, atroPavovTa, 
avréGave, atofavev, amobavobvta, amebavoper, 
atroQaveta Oe. 


§ 94. atréddupi, destroy, kz. 


aT@\eca, aToAAUpEéVNY, aTrONéT AL, ATTOANTAL, 
aToNow, amo\AUMAL, aTrOAOMEVOU, ATOAWADS, 
AT@NETO, aATOAEITAL, aTwWAETwWoLY, aTror\écbaL, 
aToN€oas, ATOANVE, ATOA@, aTroAAVMEOA, ATrO- 
Neon, ATroAAVMEVOL, ATOAETEL, ATTOAETNTE, ATTO- 
AetoOe, aroAdNvmEVOIS, ATwWAOVTO, aTwXECED, 
ATONOVYTAL, ATWANVYTO, ATONWAGS, ATTOAWAOTA, 
GATONAUMEVOU, ATOAWVTAL. 


§ 95. ATOoTEAXNW, send. 


’ / 3 / > / -_ > 
aTéEgTANKA, ATOTTEAAN, ATTOTTELAAS, ATTOCTA- 
/ an / 
NEVTL, ATOTTEAM, ATréoTELNAa, aTEcTAApéEVOS, 
an / : / 
ATECTAANV, ATOTTAADMG!, ATOOTENAELV, ATTOOTEL- 
/ 
AavTEsS, améoTE\Nas, ATOoTENNEL, ATrOTTELAN, 
/ val 
ATOCTELNAVTL, ATOCTELAOY, aTrTOTTENEL, aTrO- 
/ > / > / > / 
OTEANXW, ATETTAAKALEV, ATTETTAAN, ATETTAXAKAS, 
/ 
ATETTAAMEVOL, ATETTAAKAGL, aTrooTENNOMEVA, 
/ 
ATETTANKATE, ATETTANMAL, ATETTANKE, ATETTAA- 
/ > ’ b] 
MEVOUS, ATOOTENAOUGI, CTETTELAAY, ATTOOTELAAL. 


IRREGULAR VERBS: STUDY OF FORMS. 197 


§ 96. adinpt, remzt, forgive. 


abyaes, abes, apfjxas, apletar, Hie, addéwv- 

Tal, aya, adels, adiévai, apieto,  adhiy 
adinaw, apijcw, adapev, adévtes, abéOncar, 
apixapev, adbete, adjoe, adpyxate, adie, 
adiycovet, apeOy, aleuev, adjxav, adiere, 
abeOncetar, adetvat, adel. adnKes = -xKas, 
agpiovot, adlopev. 


§ 97. -Baiva, 20, come, dva-, KaTa-, €u-, weTa-. 


Baivor, EBnv, Biocetat, Baivérw, Balverv, Bas, 
BeBnxa, Batvovtos, éBnuev, Baivw, &Bacvor, 
avtwov, Bawovtwv, Bn, Bavti, BéBnkxe, EBarve, 
Ba n Ba Bnke, € 
aivovot, Bivat, Baivovaa, Bion, Balver, Baivere, 
p Bivat, B jon 
Baivovaay, Baivovras, &8n, Bavra, BeBnxKorTos, 
Bav, Baivouerv, eBnoar, BeByjKxawev, PBavtes, 
BHO, PBaivov, Bato, Bite, Balvovtes, dvdBa 
(for avadBn0.). 


§ 98. Barro, cast. 


BarXovtwv, Bareiv, Baro, BddreE, éBEBXANTO, 
BePBAnpévos, Bare, BeBrnKOTOS, Bairropev, Bardo, 
éParov, BadrXovtes, BEBAnKE, Baddopuevorv, &Bar- 
Nov, BdddreTat, BéBAntat, Baddete, PBAnNOeion, 
Barwor, Badrdovot, Barodci, BrNOr, Barodca, 
BeBrAnuévov, BrnOijcerar, BddrdXovtas, &Bare, 


198 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 


EBrIjOn, Bary, BANOHvat, BarXrovaear, EBAHOncay, 


Barnte, BeBrAnpEevnv, BrAHOnTL, BrnOEv, BNOnon, 
Brnréov (a verbal, Luke 5 : 38), BaddAcpeva. 


§ 99. yivopat, de, become. 


Eyev On, YEVOMEVOS, YLVOMLEVOL, YEYOVA, YEVOMEVOL, 
ylvovTat, éyévovTO, yivwvTal, yévovTal, yivomevn, 
éyéverbe, yeyevnuévov, yeyévnabe, yeyovaper, 
ryevomev@v, eyeyovelt, yevntat, yivov, yevomevn, 
ylivetat, yeyovas, yévnobe, yiverPat, yevéoBar, 
yeyovévalt, yeyevnoOar, yevnOhvar, yevnoopevor, 
yevnbévtes, éyevnOncav, yivécOw, yivopevor, 
ryevomevov, yevnbévtas, eyevouny, yévapmat, ywo- 
peOa, yevoueda, yevnOitw, éyévov, éylveTo, 
ylvomeva, yeyovact, yevoméevols, yevnOnTte, yevo- 
Mévns, YEevioeTat, ylvouévav, yéyovas, yevopéevonr, 
ryeyovoTt, yéyovav, yeyovate, éyéveTo, yevouévnr, 
yevérOw, yiverOe, yeryovel, yevomevat, yeyovuta, 
yevnacabe, yevopeva, yeyovotes, éeryevniOnte, yeryo- 
vos, yéyove, yevnOévtwv, yévoito (optative, mostly 
in the phrase pa) yévorto, may tt not happen, 
God forbid). 


§ 100. Yyiwookw, Luo. 


yvooOnceTal, ylvOoKwV, YyVO, ylvwoKeETat, 
yLvarKo, yVOOL, yvool, ywwacKev, EyvaKa, yVver 
TOMAL, EYLVOTKOY, YLVOTKEL, YVOTW, YYMDoVTAL, 
éyvaKe, yvooOértes, eyvMKaTE, ywWOoKETE, YLVO- 


IRREGULAR VERBS: STUDY OF FORMS. 199 


TKNTE, YIVOTKOMEV, YLVHTKOLAL, Eyvov, eyvoaOn, 
yvous, VOTE, YVOS, yLvackels, yYooONTA, yVaVAL, 
EyVO, YUOTN, YVO, YVOTETAL, EYLVWTKE, EYVMKELTE, 
EyYWOTAL, YVOVTA, YiWOTKwMOL, YLYwWoOKOVTES, 
yVOVTEs, ylvwoKomevn, Eyvocar, yvoocedbe, éyve- 
Kav = -Kacl, éyvoKeval. 


§ 101. SiopL, 7ve. 


eédaxapev, Sid0v5, Sovs, Sd, b0@, Siddact, &d(60- 
cav,' SHcove1, édwxav, Sacv, SoOncetat, dédHKe, 
deda@xet, Siddpevov, dedwoxercav, Sédaxa, €didour, 
édwxas, Sidotar, d@c@, 6007, Sdiddvat, Sodvat, 
d00Avat, dn and dof, irregular forms for d@, 6:60, 
did, dan = optative doin, dacets, SdTw, edidov, 
did@at, ddan, Sidote, SiddvTL, Cd@xKaTE, Sedopuévor, 
déd0Tat, Sobelaon, Sedopévny, Edwxe, dace, Sdper, 
éaxa, diddvra, €500n, dobeians, Sovtos, SM@copmeED, 
Sate, Sobetcat, Sidov, das, So0cicav, édoOncar, 
Sovra, déSmxas, Sid0vtes, Sorte. 


§ 102. EPXOPAL, COME, LO. 


EOw, epywopat, epyopuat, €devoomat, éAndrvGa, 
ArOov, Epyopevos, HpYovTo, EO, EOwv, EMOodaa, 
Abeta, épyéoba, édevoovTat, 1)dOeTe, ér\nrvOas, 
epyomeba, Epyn, éXOetv, Epyntat, EpyovTat, EXOwat, 
érjrvbe, EXOovans, Epyou, édevVcETal, EAnAVEeL, 
énOdvros, HAGE, EXOovTL, EAXNAVOELcaV, ENOOVTOD, 


1 Cf, similar form in @w, § 104, latter part. 


200 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


EpyerOar, édOov, édndvOviav, €dOovta, epyeobe, 
ENOovtes, ENModaat, eknArAvVOoTES, HAOomEV, EANXv- 
Odra, ArAOes, EXOovTas, EOE, Epyouévyn, EpyeTat, 
épyomevns, MpxeTo, EAOns, Hpyou (a commonly 
occurs for % in the 2 aor.; as 7A@av, éato. 
A few forms in -evos are omitted.) 


§ 103. | evpiokw, fizd. 


evpnans, EUpiaKovTes, EUpnKa, EvpicKw, EvpnOn- 
coueba, evpéOnv, evpebeis, evpeOa, evpioKor, 
evpicxel, epyn, ebpetv, evpov, evporevy (opt.), 
evpiaxomev, eupav, evpes, EvpéOn, EvpyceLs, Evp?)- 
Kamev, evupe, evpéOnaav, etpapevos,! evpeOaor, 
evpisxopcba, eUpmpev, evpeOivat, EeEvUploKETO, 
EUpyaouval, EevpNTe, EvpoVTES, EUpomEr, EUpPHCEL, 
eipeOn, etpnkévat, etpovoa, etpwot, evpaper," 
espotoat, evpeOnTe, Eevpycomer, EUPNCETE. 


§ 104. é€xo, have. 


eye, e&eus, Exel, Exyov, Exynka, TY, Eyxety, 
v 7 5 Vv na be J v 
eyo, Eyomev, Elxe, EaXNKE, TYMmEv, Elyov, EXD, 
eyéerw, Eymper, C&er, eyouev, EoxXNKapev, €XO- 
pévais, Exyes, E£eTe, Eyovtas, EyeTe, EEovar, eyou 
and exovev (opt.), EXNTE exover, EYE, EXELS: 
éyomeva, EaXNKOTAS, ExWaL, EYWV, EXOVTA, EXOD; 


1 Cf note, p. 189. 


IRREGULAR VERBS: STUDY OF FORMS. 201 


eiyav, eiyooav, both = eiyov, eiyauev = elyoper, 
éaynxora (nearly all the forms of the pres. act. 
part. occur). 


§ 105. toTnp, cause to stand. 


(CTOMEV, LTTNGL, TTHTEL, TTAS, ETTNKAS, EGTNGE, 
éoTws, oTabels, oTioal, oTHONS, TTI CATES, TTI- 
GOVTal, GOTHGNTE, GTAaVTOS, cTAOHVal, EcTavat, 
OTHVal, oTHoETE, OTHOL, EoTHKaAMEV, ETTNKOS, 
EsT@TOS, oTADHGETAL, EcTNTAV, ETTNKOTES, EOTH)- 
Kaol, otabévta, elotnKel, éoTadnv, éEaToTa, 
aotabncecbe, eiatHKeLcav, éoT@TEs, aTabévTes, 
EsTNKOS, TAaGa, oTAOH, EaTHY, ETTHKE, ETTATAS, 
ETTNKOTWY, EOTN, OTHTE, ETTWTMV, ETTAON, ETTN- 
cav, éaTabnaav, eiaTi Keay, TTITn, ioTAVOpMED, 
éotos. W. and H. give ior- throughout the 
plupf. instead of elar-. 


§ 106. AapBav, Zake, receive. 


eiAnha, AauBavev, éhaBov, AaBETo, AdBa, 
AapBdavyn, AapBaverv, AaBeiv, AamBave, éXap- 
Bavov, AnpreTat, A\dBeTe, auPavers, nmrropca, 
AdBwot, AapBavete, AaBov, eraBes, ecidAndas, 
AaBotcat, AapBavovot, éXaBeTe, eiANndos, ap- 
Bavovtes, AjprrecOe, EXaBe, einde, NaPBovrTes, 
AaGBn, AapwBaver, AnprAovTat, EXaBopev, NapPa- 
vopevos, AaBovdaa, AAByTE, NapwPavopevov, NaBor 
(opt.), eiAndes = -das. 


202 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


§ 107. tivo, drink. 


[wérwxe], midv, river, Tivo, Tio, Tivel, 
mieTal, ele, erLVvov, TiveTe, Tlecal, TINTE, TIVELY, 
miei, Telv, TivovTes, Tin, Tivyn, Tivoval, TiV@dL, 
mice, Lov, Tie, TiWMEV, TLVETW, ErrlOpeEV, TLETE, 
 rlovaa, TIWaLD. 


§ 107 a. TwintTe, fal. 


TENTWKAV, CTETA, ETETOV, TEIN, TETWV, TET OY, 
TWIMTEl, TWETELTAL, ETETE, TETOVTAS, TETTWKOTA, 
€TETAV, TETETE, TETELV, TWETOUVTAL, TeETOVTA, 
TITTOVTWVY, TWEeTNTE, TETOVTES, TETTMKULAV, Té- 
cwot, TéemTmxes (for -Kas), Emumrtev. 


§ 108. TION WL, Put, place. 


téOeixa, Deis, TiOévat, TIOnml, OH, TEAR, é7/Oet, 
Onow, €Onka, ov, TeberKas, OévTes, Peivar, Ofoeis, 
Ay, , / a , / 
étiGovv, TiPéact, TiOnot, On, TLCéeT@, Oépevos, 
reOnvat, Octo, Onoe, TiPerat, Oadpmev, OécOe, 
TiOeis, €Onxav, EbecOe, éTéEAnV, TeAaat, TLOEVTES, 
4 ” , ” 597; , 
eOnxas, eOevto, Oére, EOnKke, é7EOn, TEOcixarTe, 
éTeOnaav, TéEOerTaL. 


§ 109. haive, show, appear. 


: / / fa f / 
éehavn, phavicetat, pavact, dhaivetar, paivy, 
havopev, phaiver, paveira, dhaivov, daiverbe, 


IRREGULAR VERBS: SYNTAX. 203 


éhavynsav, daivopuévov, pavn, daiwopévwr, dai 
vovTt, Paivovtat, paivouivy, pavns, paivoct. 


§ 110. hépw, dear. 


v > , ” » eee 4 > , 
nveyKa, évexGetons, oloer, évéyKxate, nvéyOn, 
, by ; 
pépete, Epepov, pepwpeOa, hépe, pépovaar, hepo- 
4 
mevot, héperv, hépyn, pépovar, Edepe, -HnvéeyKare, 
dpepomevns, hépynte, Peper, olaovar, evexOeioar, 
, yA / td ’ , - is 
-pepeTat, epepdpeba, hepecOar, -evéyKas, -pépns, 
nveyKe, ebepovto, -pépovtTat, Hveyxav, bépovtes, 
4 > A 
pepomevnv, veyKas, evexOnvat, pépov, pépovaat, 
éveyKn, -evEeyOcis, -pépwot, -eveyKe. 





3. SYNTAX. 


§ 111. It is not the purpose of this introduc- 
tory work to deal largely with Greek syntax. 
No study, however, of the New Testament, in 
the Greek, can be prosecuted without at least a 
modicum of knowledge of the Greek syntax. 
It is therefore within the scope of this little 
work to furnish that modicum. 

It is believed that the examples and prin- 
ciples here set forth will prove of great value 
in assisting the beginner to keep his bearings 


204 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


amidst the various forms of construction which 
render the Greek so rich a Janguage, and at the 
same time make it appear so difficult to the 
learner. 

The inductive study of syntax is valued by no 
one more highly than by the author, and I hope 
that the following principles may not be looked 
upon as vues that are to serve as pegs upon 
which the student is to hang his subjunctives, 
infinitives, genitives, and datives. The study 
of the syntax should begin with the examples 
and not with the principles, with the Greek text 
and not with a work on Greek syntax. 

The New Testament, written as it was by 
several different persons, cannot but present 
the peculiarities of style that belong to these 
authors. This variety of style often passes 
over into a different syntactical expression. 
Accordingly, what is a very common form of 
construction in the writings of Paul may not 
be found in the Gospels, and Luke may use 
expressions that do not occur elsewhere. 

The aim has been in the following examples 
to give those that are representative of the 
language as used by all the writers of the 
New Testament. 


SYNTAX : SUBJUNCTIVE. 205 


THE Moops IN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES. 


§ 112. The indicative in independent sen- 
tences is the natural one and needs nothing 
said about it here. 


Subjunciive. 


§ 113. The first person plural of the subjunc- 
tive, either present or aorist, may be used to 
denote a command or exhortation. ‘The nega- 
tive is pn (1 Cor. 15: 32), daywpev Kal miwper, 
Let us eat and drink. 1 John 3:18, pi) ayatre- 
pev Royo, Let us not love in word. 


§ 114. The distinction between the present 
and aorist is that the present denotes what is 
continued, extended, or repeated, while the aorist 
denotes the fact simply without any continued 
or extended action. This distinction is generally 
true of the present and aorist in all moods 
except the indicative. The aorist subjunctive 
and imperative do not refer to fast time, but 
to the present or future. The aorist infinitive 
may refer to past time. 


115. In questions of doubt or uncertainty the 
subjunctive is used in the first person, rarely in 
the second or third. Mark 12:14, ddpuev 7) py 
dapev; Shall we give or shall we not give ? 


206 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


$116. The aorist subjunctive is used with 
the double negative ov Ha), to express a strone 
negation. ipa 6:35, 0 Epxopevos 7 pos Ee OU 
pn Tevdon Kal 0 TLaTEv@V eis ewe OV [2 bu- 
cet, he who comes unto me shall not hunger, 
and he.who believes on me shall not thirst. 
Note that the future indicative is thus also 
used. 


§ 117. The aorist subjunctive may express a 
negative command. Matt. 7:6, 1) d@Te TO ayLov 
Tois KuaiVv, unde BadnTe TOs papyapitas Luav eu- 
Tpocbev TaV yoipwr, give not that which is holy 
to the dogs, nor throw your pearls before swine. 

Optative. | 


§$ 118. The optative is used to express a wish 
that refers to future time. Luke 20:16, py 
yévorto, may this not happen. See § 71. 


In DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 
Subjunctive. 


$119. Final clauses denoting purpose are intro- 
duced by iva or 67s and take the subjunctive, 
more rarely the indicative; negative uw. Mark 
\ D] / / es 9S , 

3:14, Kal éroincey dwdeKa... Wa Mow pmeT 
avtTov kal iva amoatéXXn avTovs Knpvocev, and 


SYNTAX : CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 207 


he chose twelve in order that they might be wrth 
him, and that he might send them to preach. 
Acts 9:17, 0 KUptos amréotanrKkév me... OTS 
avaBréWns Kal wAncOAs mvevpatos aylov, the 
Lord has sent me that you might look up and be 
filled with the holy spirit. 


$120. Object clauses after verbs of exhorting, 
commanding, and entreating, take the subjunc- 
tive with fa, more rarely é7ws; negative ux). 
Matt. 14:36, apexaddovy a’tov iva movov 
axpwvrat TOU Kpactédov Tov iwatiov autor, they 
entreated him that they might but touch the hem 
of his garment. Mark 13:18, mpocetyeode dé 
iva pry yévntar xeyw@vos, and pray ye that tt 
happen not in the winter. 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


$121. A condition stated szmply without any- 
thing being implied as to fulfilment has in 
Greek, as in English, the simple present, future, 
or past (aorist) indicative in the condition, with 
the same tense in the conclusion. 

Matt. 4:6, ef vids ef Tod Oeov, Bare ceavTov 
Kato, tf thou art the Son of God, cast thyself 
down. Matt. 26:33, e¢ wavtes cxadadicOnoov- 
Tat €v Gol, éym ovdémoTe cKavdariaOjoopat, tf 


all men shall be offended in thee, I never shall be 


208 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


offended. 2 Cor. 5:16, ef kal éyvmxapev Kata 
, ’ > \ an 5° 7 , 

capka XpioTov, adXa voy OVKETL yLVOTKOLEV, ANA 

if we have known Christ according to the flesh, 

yet now we know him no longer. 


§ 122. Conditions Contrary to Fact.— When dv 
is added to the conclusion where e¢ appears in 
the condition, a non-fulfilment is implied. The 
same tense of the indicative is used in both 
parts. 


§ 123. The zmperfect denotes present time, 
and the aorzst or pluperfect denotes past time. 

Imperfect: John 5:46, ef yap éructevere 
Mavoet, émictevete av éuoi, for tf you were now 
believing in Moses, you would now be believing 
in me. Implying that they are not believing in 
Moses. ? 

Aorist or pluperfect: 1 Cor. 2:8, ef yap 
Eyvooav, ovK av Tov KUpiov Ths dSdEns éectatpo- 
aav, for if they had known it they would not 
have crucified the Lord of Glory. 1 John 2: 109, 
el yap €& nuav noav, wewerynKkercay av pe? Hud, 
Jor of they had been of us, they would have re- 
mained with us. 


§ 124. Future Conditions. — Clauses that refer 
to future time are introduced by éav, which is 
followed by the subjunctive (vavely the indica- 


SYNTAX : RELATIVE CLAUSES. 209 


tive). In the conclusion the future indicative © 
accurs or the present with future sense. 

Matt. 9:21, €av povoy apopat tod iwariov 
avtod cwOijcowat, If L shall but touch his gar- 
ment, [ shall be saved. John 15:10, édv tas 
evTohds fou THpianTe, peveite ev TH Aydt pov, 
if ye shall keep my commandments, ye shall re- 
main in my love. 


§125. The negative in the condition is 
usually ju, in the conclusion always od. 


RELATIVE CLAUSES. 


§ 126. Clauses introduced by relative words 
as os, who, and ozrov, where, follow the same 
principles as conditional clauses when referring 
to present, past, or future time. The relative 
word stands as the conjunction in the room of 
et. Where an éap-construction is implied, the 
relative word usually takes the place of the eé 
and the ay remains, as 6s av. More rarely ds 
éav is found. 

Luke 8:18, 05 av yap éyn, SoOjcetas ait, 
whoever has, to him shall it be given. Mark 
14:9, Ovov éav KnpvxOn TO evayyédovy,.. . 
erroinaev aitn AadnHOnceTa, wherever the Gospel 
shall be preached, that which she has done will 
be told. 


210 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 


$127. Temporal Clauses introduced by OTE, 
when, ws, until, are followed by the same con- 
struction as relative conjunctions, § 126; 67e ap 
is always written ora. Mark 6: 10, éxet pévere 
fos dv eEEXOnTe exeiOev, abide there until you 
go out thence. Matt. 21:40, 6rav obv €XOn oO 
KUpLOS TOD ApTEXOVOS, ri mrounoer; when there-- 
fore the lord of the vineyard cometh, what will 
he do? 


§ 128. More rarely ews appears without ap. 
Luke 22:34, od dwvycer onpepov GnéxTop Ews 
Tpls pe arapyion eiSévat, the cock shall not 
crow to-day until you deny three times that you 
know me. 


INFINITIVE. 


§ 129. The infinitive is used to complete the 
meaning of such verbs as bre:v, wish, divacbat, 
able; @dmitew, hope; &yreiv, seek. This con- 
struction is the same as in English. If this 
infinitive has a subject different from that of 
the principal verb, this subject must be in 
the accusative. ebr. 6: 11, émOvpodpev oé 
écactov buoy tiv avtiy évdetxvuc Gat OTrOUOND, 
we moreover desire each one of you to exhibit 
the same earnestness. 2 Cor. 11:16, uy Tis pe 


SYNTAX: INFINITIVE. 21II 


Od—&y addpova eivat, let no one think me to be 
n dbp 


Joolish (that I am foolish). 


§ 130. When the subject of the infinitive is 
the same as that of the principal verb, this 
subject is not commonly expressed, and _ all 
attributes are in the xominative case. Rom. 
1:22, dacKxovtes eivar cogol éuwpavOncar, they 
were made foolish by declaring themselves to 
be wise. 


§ 131. Words of saying and in general ex- 
pressions of thought may be followed by the 
infinitive with the cases as above. See last 
example in $129 and in $128. 


§ 132. The infinitive may be used as a sub- 
stantive, and in this construction may take the 
article in any case. This substantive phrase 
(while keeping its verbal force) is governed as a 
noun, and often takes a preposition. 

I Cor. 14 : 39, TO Narely on K@AVETE YAWoCALs, 
forbid not the speaking with tongues. Acts 
14:9, €yet wiotiw Tod cwOhvar, he has faith 
that he will be healed, lit. faith of being healed. 
John 1 : 48, rpo tod ce Piturov hovica, before 
Philip called you. 


§ 133. The infinitive is frequent after éyévero, 
at came to pass, where the infinitive, with or 


212 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


without a subject accusative, is the subject of 
the éyévero. Luke 6:1, éyévero dé év caBBat@ 
SvatropeverOar adtov, it came to pass as he 
journeyed on the Sabbath. Luke 3:21, éyévero 
df EV TO BarriaOjvar admavtTa TOV NaOV . . . AVEW- 
xOfivae TOV ovpavov Kal KataBhnvat TO TvEdpa TO 
dytov ér avtov, and when all the people had 
been baptized (ev to BarticOjvat) tt happened 
that the heavens were opened, and that the ae, 
Spirit descended upon him. 


§ 134. dote, so that (to be distinguished from 
adore as an introductory word, and so, therefore), 
takes the infinitive (indicative twice), negative 

/ a] / ¢ \ \ ¢e \ 
pn. Mark g: 26, éyéveto mael vexpos WaTE TOUS 
modrovs eye OTL ATéBavev, he became as one 
dead, so that the most said that he was dead. 


§ 135. The infinitive is common after mpiv or 
mpw 1}, before. Matt. 26:34, mpiv adéxTopa 
dovijca, before the cock crows. Acts 7:2, mpi 
) Katoukhnoat avtov év Xappay, before he dwelt in 
Charran. 


PARTICIPLE. 


§ 136. Verbs of hearing, seeing, knowing, and 
perceiving, may be followed by the participle. 
This construction is a form of indirect discourse 


SYNTAX : NEGATIVES. 214 


and is rendered by such a clause in English. 
Acts 7:12, axotvoas &é€ “lax@B évta oitia els 
Aiyurtov, and Jacob having heard that there 
was corn in Egypt. Luke 8: 46, éyw yap éyvev 
diva éEedXnrAvOviav am éuod, for [ know that 
power has gone out from me. 1 John 4:2, 
Tav TVEdpa 0 OmodXoyet Incotv Xpiotiv év capKi 
EXnrvOoTa, every spirit which confesses that Jesus 
Christ came in the flesh. Yor some other ex- 
amples of the participle see 190-193. 


NEGATIVES. 


§ 137. wx) is the usual negative in the condi- 
tional, relative, and temporal clauses, ov the 
negative of the main clause. 


§ 138. ju) is the negative of the imperative, 
pe) Oavpatete, marvel not. 


§ 139. ju) is used in asking questions where a 
negative reply is expected. John 21:5, zravdia, 
pn TL Tpoadayov éyete; Little children, have ye 
aught to eat ? 


§ 140. od is used in questions where an 
affirmative answer is expected. Luke 17:17, 
ovy of déxa éxabapicOncav; were the ten not 


purified ? 


214 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESIAMENT GREEK. 


§ 141. The double negative ov pm is used to 
express a strong negation. See §116. Matt. 
24 : 34, ov pn TapérOn 1) yeved avTn Ews Av TavTa 
tadta yévnta. This generation shall not pass 
away until all these things come to pass. 


§ 142. When a strong emphasis is desired 
several negatives may occur in a_ sentence, 
provided the simple negative as ov or py be 
followed by the compounds, as ovdé, ovdév, or 
pndé, wndév. 1 John 1:5, oxotia ovK éotu €v 
avT@ ovdepia, no darkness 1s in him at all. 
Mark 1:44, épa pndevi pndev eimns, see to tt, 
speak née er a word to any one. But where the 
negatives are simple, the effect is as in English. 


§ 143. In general, ov is the negative of state- 
ment or fact; while wy is the negative of con- 
ception, possibility, or contingency. 


USES OF THE CASES IN GREEK. 


§ 144. It is supposed that the student is 
already acquainted with the simpler uses of the 
cases that have come up in the course of the 


_ lessons. 
Genttive. 


§ 145. Time within which is put in the geni- 
tive. Matt. 28:13, vueros éXOovtes éxrevrav 
autov, they came in the night and stole him. 


SYNTAX : USES OF THE CASES. 215 


§ 146. The agent after a passive verb, usually 
a voluntary agent, is expressed by d7é and the 
genitive. Mark 1:9, éBarric@n bd “Iwdvou, 
he was baptized by John. Matt. 11:7, caXapov 
UTO avés“ov aarevopevorv, a reed shaken by the 
wind. 


§ 147. The genitive may be used as a fpred- 
tcate after eiwi. 1 Cor. 1:12, éym pév eps 
IlavAov... eyo dé Xpiotov, [ am of Paul... 
and [am of Christ. 


§ 148. Verbs of ‘touching, begging, hearing, 
tasting, and the like, are usually followed by the 
genitive. Luke 5:13, #ato avtov rXéyov, he 
touched him, saying. Mark 8: 23, cat ériiaBo- 
Levos THS yeElpos Tov TuProd, and he took hold of 
his hand. Luke 5:12, éde7@n adtov r\éywr, he 
begged him, saying. Matt. 17:5, axovere avoid, 
hear ye him. John 8: 52, od pi yevoetar Oavatou 
els TOV ai@va, he shall not taste death forever. 


§ 149. Words denoting fulness, deficiency, 
plenty, and want, take the genitive. John 
1:15, wAnpns yaptTos Kal arnOelas, full of grace 
and truth. Luke 1:53, rewavtas évérdnoev 
ayabav, he filled the hungry with good (things). 
James 1:5, e¢ dé Tis buwv AElTETAL Todias, and 
af any of you ts lacking in wisdom. 


216 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


$150. The genitive follows the comparative 
degree of the adjective. Mark 12:31, pelfov 
TOUT@V AAAN é€vTOA) OK EaTLV, no other com- 
mandment ts greater than these. 


§ 151. The genitive follows verbs of accusing, 
condemning, and the like. Acts 19:40, xal 
yap Klivduvevomev éyKaretobat otacews, for we 
are in danger of being called to account for the 
disturbance. Mark 15:3, kal katnyopouy atov 
ol apxtepels Toda, and the high priests accused 
him of many things. 


§ 152. The genitive follows most adverbs, as: 
yopis, péxypt, ws, omicw, eumpocbev, éyyus. 
John 1:15, 0 dmlcw pou épyomevos éutrpoabév 
fou yéyovev 6TL Tpa@Tos pov Hv, he who comes 
after me was before me, because he was prior 
Zo me. 


Dative. 


§ 153. The dative is used after words signi- 
fying /keness, agreement, or their opposites. 
John 8:55, €copar dpotos vyiv wevorns, [ shall 
be like you, a lar. 


$154. The dative follows verbs of appreach- 
ing, joining, following. Luke 15:25, Kal as 
Epxouevos nyyloev TH oixia, and as he went he 


SYNTAX: USES OF THE CASES. 217 


drew near to the house. Mark 2:14, axorovde 
pot, follow me. 


$155. mictevo, believe, and trpocKkuvéw, wor- 
ship, are commonly followed by the dative. 
Matt. 21 : 32, ovx emiotevoate avTo, ye believed 
him not. John 9:38, cal mpocexvynoev avo, 


and he worshipped him. 


$156. The dative is used after efué and yivo- 
pac to denote the possessor. Acts 8: 21, ov« 
gotiv cou pepls, no part ts to you (you have no 


part). 


§ 157. Cause, means, manner, degree, and 
instrument are put in the dative; the latter 
usually with a preposition. Rom. I1:20, 7H 
amtiatia é£exrdaOnaar, because of their unbeltef 
they were broken off. Rom. 8:24, TH yap erwior 
écwOnuev, for we are saved by hope. Mark 
10:48, 7oAA@ parrov Expatev, he cried much 
more, lit. more by much. Luke 22:49, Kupee, 
ev TataEomenv ev payaipn ; Lord, whether shall we 
strike with the sword ? 


§ 158. Time when and place where are in the 
dative ; more commonly with ev. Luke 12: 20, 
TAUTN TH VUKTL THY ruXY cou aiTovaLW a7ro God, 
this night they ask from thee thy soul. 


218 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMZMN@ cREEK, 


Accusative. 


§ 159. Verbs of motion zowards require the 
accusative case. The motion may be odjectzve or 
subjective, still the same case occurs, and with 
a preposition, as es, wapd, or mpos. Luke 1:56, 
uméctpeev eis tov otxov, he turned into the 
house. Mark 5:23, wimres mpos tovs mddas 
avtov, he falls at his feet. John 1:1, 0 Adyos Hv 
mpos Tov Beov, the Word was with God. 


§ 160. Extent of ¢27e and space is put in the 
accusative. John 7 : 33, ts ypovov pixpov pe? 
vpov eipi, yet a little while 1 am with you. 
John 6:10, éAndakoTes odv WS TTadloUs elKooL 
mévte, when then they had gone about twenty-five 
furlongs. 


§ 161. Zzvo accusatives may follow verbs of 
saying or asking something of some one; also 
doing something to some one. Matt. 7:9, 
Ov alTnoel oO vids av’Tov aptov, whom shall his 
son ask for bread. Matt. 4:19, Toijowm vas 
anreeis avOporov, I shall make you fishers of 
men. 


§ 162. The infinitive has the subject in the 
accusative. See § 131. 


SYNTAX : PREPOSITIONS, 219 


§ 163. PREPOSITIONS. 


avrt, zstead of. 
amd, from. 

éx, out of. 

apd, before. 


Genztive only. 


év, 272. 


Dative only. : 
es ae with. 


Accusative only. ets, znto, to. 


Sud, through. Gen., Dat., { él, upon, at, to. 


era. Kata down. and rapa, from, by, to. 
tg 5 : 
ae peta, wth, after. Accus. | mpds, fo, at. 
n 
mepl, about. 
ALCUS:. AOL); 
vmép, above. 
e , 
v16, wader. 


§ 164. dvti, zvstead of, oddvTa avti Tod ddovTos, 
a tooth for a tooth. 

aémé denotes SEPARATION, amo Tns TadiAalas, 
from Galilee; avo waons apaptias, from every 
sin. SOURCE, padete am’ émod, learn of me. 

Sua, eenzt7ve, THROUGH, eloepyomevos Sta THS 
Ovpas, entering through the door. MEANS, o 
Koopos bt avtov éyéveto, the world was made 
through him. Accusative, ON ACCOUNT OF, FOR 
THE SAKE OF, 61a TO dvoua pov, for my name's 
sake ; 81a tobdto, on account of this. 

eis denotes motion toward, either real or 


220 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


implied, avéBn eis TO dpos, he went up into the 
mountain. TIME, eis ai@va, for everlasting. 

Used metaphorically to denote REST or a 
CONDITION, 0 @v €ls TOV KOATTOV TOV TraTpOs he 
who 1s tn the bosom of the Father. 

ek denotes motion ouT oF, where there has 
been a close union, dav) é« TOV obpavar, a Voice 
out of heaven. TIME, é€x Tovtou, after this (time). 
PLACE, €« deEtav, on the right hand. 

év, IN, €v TH ayopa, in the market-place ; &¢8o- 
Lévov €v avOporois, given among men (so often 
with plural nouns). INSTRUMENT, wata£oev 
ev TH payalpn; Shall we strike with the sword? 

éti, with the genztive, UPON, with verbs of 
RESTING, GOING, STANDING, é€7rl THs yNs, upon the 
earth. TIME, émt Kndavédiov, in the time of 
Claudius. 

With the dative, WHERE, éwi mpupuvy, at the 
stern; éwt Tivakt, upon a charger. 

Accusative, motion toward, tiOéacww él Tip 
Auxviav, they put it upon a lampstand, cvvnxOn 
OxNOs Todds er’ avTov, a great multitude was 
gathered to him. 

KaTGd, motion FROM ABOVE DOWNWARD. Gevt- 
five, Opunoe KaTAa TOD Kpnuvod, they rushed down 
the steep place. An opinion or judgment AGAINST 
any one, ei Tu éyete KaTa TLVOS, if you have any- 
thing against any one. 


SYNTAX : PREPOSITIONS. 221 


Accusative, ALONG, THROUGH, ACCORDING TO, 
Kata Tas Yopas, throughout these places; Kata 
Tov vomov, according to the law. 

eTA, ASSOCIATION WITH. Genitive, 0 twatip 
pet e€mov éeotiv, the Lather ts with me. 

Accusative, AFTER, denoting succession, pera 
Sé tavta eirev, and after this he said. 

Tapa, gewitive, FROM THE SIDE OF. From, 
always of a person, AauPavopev trap’ avTod, we 
receive from him. 

Dative, BY THE SIDE OF. Something is or 
is done by some one or something, zap’ aUT@ 
éwevav, they remained with him. 

Accusative, TO, CONTRARY TO, #AGe mapa THY 
@drvaccay, he went to the sea; Tapa tiv bidayny, 
contrary to the teaching. 

tepi, genitive, ABOUT, CONCERNING, yéypamrTae 
Tepl avtou, tt 7s written concerning him. 

Accusative, ABOUT, AROUND, qrepl O€ évdexaTny, 
and about the eleventh hour, wep Tipov, around 
Lyre. 

mp6, BEFORE, 7po T@v Oupar, before the doors ; 
mpo KataBorns Koopov, before the foundation of 
the world. 

tpés, accusative, after verbs of motion, a7nAGe 
mpos avtovs, he departed to them. Where the 
motion is not objective, éuayovto ody mpos adX7- 
hous, and indeed they contended with one another. 


222 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 


PROXIMITY, 0 Adyos Hv pds Tov Ocdvr, the word 
was with God. Dative, NEAR, wpos T@ dpe, by 
the mountain. Genitive but once, Acts 27: 34, 
Jor the advantage of. 

GUV, WITH, €vropeveTo ory avTots, he proceeded 
with them. 

Umép, genitive, FOR SAKE OF, Wuy7v jou vrrép 
cov Onow, [ shall lay down my life for you. 

Accusative, ABOVE, 0v6€ Sodros Urrép TOV KUpLoD, 
nor ts the servant above hts master. 

t16, genitive, always with the passive voice 
to denote the AGENT, ¢Barrtic@n b76 “Iwavov, he 
was baptized by John. 

Accusative, UNDER, U7r0 THY ouKHY eidov oe, T 
saw you underneath the fig tree. 


The student should by no means consider this 
short treatment of the prepositions exhaustive. 
Many of them occur more than 1000 times in 
the New Testament, and often with varying sig- 
nificance. Only the most fundamental uses have 
here been indicated. 

In all cases constant reference should be made 
to the lexicon. | 


INDEXES. 





GREEK 


N.B.—All references are made to pages. 


INDEX, 


Occasionally more particular 


reference is made in parenthesis. 


A, in contraction, 139; @ 
changed to 7, 15; to a, 48 
(note). 


aya0ds, comparison, 15 3. 
ayyéddw, class of verbs, 186. 
dyw, 2 aor., 118 (v. 13). 

at, short in endings, 23 (top). 

aipw, 186. 

dxovw, 2 perf.,67 (top) and 112 
Cee): 

adnO7s, decl., 151. 

dv, in apodoses, 208 ; in temp. 
clauses, 210; in rel. clauses, 
200. 

dvnp, decl., 45. 

avolyw, forms in N. T., 195. 

amd, w. gen., 219. 

dméddum, forms in N. T., 196. 

amooré\\w, forms in N. T., 
196. 

dmrrTouat, w. gen., 215. 

avTds, pers. pron., 30 (top); 
intensive pron., 29 (bottom); 
position and meaning with 
art., 29, 30, 147. 

avrov for éavrod, So. 








apinut, conjugation, 179; prin. 
parts, 189; forms in N. T., 
107. 

-aw, contract form in, 168. 

B, the 

euph. 


classification among 
MOUtes oe FO g cron les 
changes before a, 49. 
Baivw, prin. parts, 190; forms 
TN ae O's 
Baddow, prin. parts, 190; forms 
AEN cond te 1) 7s 
Baovrevs, decl., 150. 
IT, classification among the 
MULES Wel SO) U2) 5a 0 euDn, 
changes before o, 49; before 
My 117 (top). 
yaornp, decl., 151. 
yevouat, w. gen., 215. 
ylvouat, 89 (bottom); prin. 
parts, 190; forms in N. T., 
198. 
yivwoxw, 89 (bottom); prin. 
parts, 190; forms in N. T.. 
198. 


Q 225 


226 ESSENTIALS OF NEW 

ypdgow, 2 aor. pass. éypagny, 
69 (bottom). 

A, classification among the 

mutes, 138; dropped before 

a, 49; euph. changes before 

a liquid, 69 (mid.); inserted 

in dvnp, 45 (bottom). 

dé, 30. 

det, impers., 9O. 

déouar, w. gen., 215 (mid.). 

dn\ow, conjug. of contract 
forms, 168. 

did, Ww. gen. and acc., 219. 

dldwut, conjug. of, 173; verbs 
in -m, 87, 88; redupl., 89 
(bottom); aor. in xa, 88 
(note); prin. parts, 190; 
forms in N. T., 199. 


K, in contraction, 138; in aug., 
15; lengthened to 7, 48; in 
aor. of liquid stems, 79; 2 
aor. pass., 69 (bottom) ; 
fut. liquid stems, 78; -ew, 
conjug. of ¢iAéw, 168; vari- 
able vowel, 4, 13 (top), 15 
(mid.), 48 (top); contraction 
OF €a6;.1°2: 

-eal, for -eoat, 13. 

édv, w. subj., 39, 208, 209. 

éauTov, decl., 154. 

éyelpw, fut. of, 78. 

éy, decl., 29, 153. 

ec for e€ in aug.,16 (note). See 


under e. 


TESTAMENT GREEK. 


el, 7f, 207, 208. 

eidov, 57 (bottom). 

eiul, conjug., 178; w. dat. of 
poss., 217; -enclitie; 31. 

eiut, go, in composition only, 
179. 

eirov, forms of, 58 (top). 

els, W. acc., 219. 

els, decl., 151; compound, 83. 

éx or €&, w. gen., 220. 

€xetvos, 27. 

é\doowv, 147 (a). 

édmls, decl., 51, 148. 

éuauTov, decl., 154. 

éumpoobev, w. gen., 216 (mid.). 

év, w. dat., 220. 

érl, w. gen., dat., and acc., 
220. 

épxouat, prin. parts, 191; forms 
in N. “Ic, 190: 

evploxw, prin. parts, 191; class, 
187; forms in N. T., 200. 

éxw, prin. parts, 190; forms in 
N. T., 200. 

-ews, -ewv, in the gen. of the 3d 
decl., 44, 45. 

€ws, construction of, 210. 


Z, double consonant, 12 (a); 
verb stems in -fw, 186 (2). 


H, see under e. 

-ns, adjs. in, 84, 85. 
©, classification among the 
mutes, 138. 


GREEK 


Oe, in aor. pass., 68. 

OvycKkw (Oav), only w. prep. 
aro-; prin. parts, 191; class 
of verbs, 187 (bottom). 

Oplé, decl., 151. 

duyarnp, decl., 151 (top). 


I, close vowel, 138 (3); added 
to pron. and adv., 52 (note) ; 
in redupl., 89; sign of the 
opt., 181. 

Unut, see ably. 

-wv, in acc. sing., 51 (bottom). 

iva, conj., construction w. final 
clauses, 206; w. object 
clauses, 207. 

tornut, redupl., 89; inflection 
of forms, 173; prin. parts, 
191; forms in.N. T., 201. 

“Lwy, -\tTOS, Comp. and superl., 


86. 


K, for classification of mutes, 
138; before a, 49; before p, 
117 (top). 

-ka, in verbs, 88 (note). 

kakés compared, 153. 

kahés compared, 153. 

kaTd, w. gen. and acc., 220. 

kAalw, prin. parts, 191. 


A, 138; verbs in -AAw, 186. 

AauBdvw, class of verbs, 187; 
prin. parts, 192. 

Aelw, 2 aor. of, 165. 

Aw, Conjug., 160. 


INDEX. 227 

M, 138. 

méyas, decl., 152; compared, 
153. 


peta, W. gen. and acc., 221. 

“yh, neg. in cond,, rel., final, 
temp. clauses, 213; in wishes, 
206; w. imp., 213; w. dubi- 
tative subj., 205 (bottom); 
double neg. od uy, 206 (top) ; 
in asking questions, 213. 

mnTnp, decl., 151 (top). 


N, 138; in 5th class of verbs, 
187. 

v, case ending, 51 (bottom). 

-vat, infin., 76, 183. 

-vot, in 3d per. plur., 4. 


&,, double consonant, 4 7 (top). 


O, in contraction, 139; length- 
ened to w, 48; to ov, 52(132); 
connect. vowel, see under e. 

6, 9, Td, art. decl., 146; pro- 
clitics, 21 (note). 

o, diphthong, 8, 4. 

oida, conjugation, 180. 

buvuue (ou-, omo-), class of verbs, 
187. 

bvoua, decl., 42. 

éricw, w. gen., 86 (note). 

daws, in obj. clauses w- subjv., 
207. 

dpdw, prin. parts, 192; aug: 
ment, 112 (v. 1). 

8s, rel. pron., 33 (bottom). 


228 ESSENTIALS OF NEW 


8oris, forms in N. T., 154. 

ov, ovK, ovx, 28 (note 2); see 
under “7. 

ovdels, decl., 83. 

ovs, ear, decl., 151. 

ovros, decl., 147; use and mean- 
ing of, 26, 27. 

-ow, verbs in, 168. 


II, for classification, 138; be- 
fore ¢, 49; before 6e in aor. 
pass., 69. 

wapd, W. gen., dat., acc., 221. 

was, 64. 

mwarnp, decl., 45. 

mepl, w. gen. and acc., 221. 

mlvw, class of verbs, 187; prin. 
parts, 192: formis-in°N. 1, 
202. 

misrevw, foll. by dat., 217 (top). 

modus, decl., 44. 

modus, decl., 152; 
ef 

mous, 51 (top); decl., 151 (top). 

amply, w. infin., 212. 

mpés, w. gen., dat., and acc., 
220. 

mpbabev, w. gen., 216 (middle). 

mMp@Tos, W. gen., 216 (middle). 


compar., 


P at beginning of a word, 140. 


2, forms of, 3 (note); classifi- 
cation, 138; euph. changes 
w. mutes. 49; linguals change 
to o before a lingual, 69; 


TESTAMENT GREEK. 


dropped in nouns, 53 (bot- 
tom); in eva, eco, and ago, 
13 (a), 17 (@), and 56 (a); 
movable o, 141 (top). 

-oat and -co, see under o. 

-cav, 3d per. plur., 15 (top), 
88. 

geauTov, decl., 154. 

o7Té\Xw, prin. parts, 193. 

ob, decl., 153. | 


T, for classification, 138; euph. 
changes with other linguals, 
69; dropped before c, 49. 

-TNs, Masc. nouns in, 22, 23. 

TlOnu, see 8g and go. 

Tis, decl:, 1543" see. 95. 

ris, déecl., 1546 tee 7G, 

Tpets, decl., 153. 

TUYXavw (TVX) class of verbs, 
187 (mid.); prin. parts, 
193. 


Y, close vowel, 138 (3). 
vdwp, decl., 151 (top). 

vu, diphthong, I0 (¢). 

vids, decl., 145. 

brd, w. gen. and acc., 222. 


®, classification, 138; euph. 
changes, 49, 69 (178). 

galyw, conjug., 166; class of 
verbs, 186; prin. parts, 193; 
forms in N. T., 202. 

pépw, 188 (mid.); prin. parts, 
193. 


GREEK INDEX. 229 


X, see reference under ¢. 
xelp, decl., 151 (top). 


xelpwv, see Kakds. 


Q, see under o. 

w, augm. for o, 15 (36). 

wy, part. of elul, 70. 

-ws, in adverbs, 86. 

W, double consonant; 19 (a) | wore, w. inf. and ind., 212, 80 
and 138. (note I). 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


See remark, page 225. 


Absolute gen., 74 (note 3). 

Abstract nouns, w. art., I12 
(v. 1, latter part). 

Accent, nominal, 24; verbal, 2; 
gen. and dat. of oxytones, 20; 
monosyllables of 3d decl., 42; 
in contr. syllables, 78 (top) ; 
in enclitics, 29 (note). 

Accusative case, 144; uses of, 
218. 

Accusing, verbs of, foll. by gen., 
216. 

Active voice, 157. 

Acute, see under Accent. 

Adjectives, compar. of, 85; 
agree w. nouns, II; attrib. 
and pred., position of, 27 (64). 

Adverbs, formation of, 86 ; foll. 
by gen. case, 216. 

Agent, see under Genitive. 

Alphabet, 137. 

Antecedent, assim. of rel. to 
case of anteced., 115 (v. 24). 

Antepenuit, 2 (0). 


Aorist, 158, 159; use of, mean- 


ing of, 55, 56; 2 aor. diff. 


from I aor. in form and mean- 
ing, 57; aor. in ka, 88(note); 
Attic redupl. in aor., 118 
(v. 13) ;)saccent of 2 acr, 
part. and inf., 62; aor. pass., 
suffix of, and act. endings, 
68, 69; sense of aor., 61 
(mid.) and 205. 

Apostrophe in elision, 141. 

Article decl., 146; proclitic, 27 
(note); w. atrés, 29, 30; w. 
adjs. to give position, 27. 

Augment, 15 and 183. 


Believing, verbs of, foll. by dat., 
25 (note 2). 


Cardinal numerals decl., 153. 

Cause expressed by dat., 217; 
by part., 72-73 (top). 

Classes of verbs, 184. 

Close vowels, 138 (3); stems 
of nouns ending in, 51 (bot- 
tom). 

Command expressed by imp, 
83. 


230 


ENGLISH 


Comparative, see Degree. 

Comparison of adjs., 85; of 
advs., 86. 

Compound verbs, 32, 33; nega- 
tives, 214. 

Condition and conclusion (pro- 
tasis and apodosis) syntax 
of cond. sent., 206-208. 

Conjugation of w-verbs, 160; 
of mut-verbs, 172. 

Consonants, division of, 138 
(top); euph. changes of, 49 
and 69; movable consonants, 
140; at end of words, 42 
(note); consonant stems of 
3d decl., 53. 

Contraction, 138, 139; of verbs 
in -aw, -ew, -ow, 168; in parts. 
of same verbs, 156. 

Coronis, 139. 

Crasis, 139. 


Dative, meaning of, 144; uses 
of, 216-217. 

Declension of nouns, 7 and 142; 
A-decl., 19-23; O-decl., 6-11; 
3d decl., 41-46 and 50-54; 
irreg. nouns of 3d decl., 151; 
of adjs., 26-27; adjs. of 3d 
decl., 85; of participles, 
154-157; of pronouns, 153- 
154. 

Demonstrative pronouns, 26, 
27: 

Dependent clauses, syntax of, 
206-210. 


INDEX. 231 

Deponent verbs, 32. 

Diphthongs, 138 (4); contr. 
w. vowels, 139 (8); in aug., 
15. 

Double consonants, 138 (2); 
negatives, 214. 

Doubt, questions of, exprs. by 
subjv., 205. 


Elision of vowels in prep., 141 
(mid.). 

Enclitics, 29 (note). 

Endings, pers. end. in verbs, 4, 
182; case endings in nouns, 
2B Ae, AG? ST. 

Exhortation exprs. by subjy., 
205. 

Extent, see Accusative. 


Feminine gender, 143. 

Final clauses, 206. 

Following, joining, approach- 
ing, verbs of, foll. by dat., 216. 

Fulness and want exprs. by 
gen., 215. 

Future, formation of, 47-49; in 
liquid verbs, 77-78; syntax 
of fut. w. od uy, 214 (top). 


Gender, 143. 

Genitive case, meaning of, 144; 
accent of oxytones, 20; in 
3d decl., 41 (bottom) and 51; 
syntax of, 214-216; prep. w., 
219; gen. abs., 74 (note 3), 

Grave accent, 9 (note), 


232 ESSENTIALS OF NEW 
Hearing, verbs of, foll. by gen., 
II (note). 


Imperative, 82, 83; endings of, 
182; used in commands, 83. 

Imperfect tense, meaning of, 
14; aug. in, 15; secondary 
tense, 159; used in cond. 
sent., 208. 

Impersonal verbs, 90. 

Indicative, 158; in cond. sent., 
207-208; w. Wore, 212; pers. 
end. of, 182; suffixes in, 183. 

Infinitives, 76; 2 aor. inf., 62; 
syntax of, 210-212; endings 
of, 183. 

Inflexion, 142. 

Irregular, nouns of 3d decl., 
151; comparison, 153; verbs, 
189-193. 


Labial mutes, 138. 

Likeness, words of, foll. by dat., 
216. 

Liquids, 138; verb stems in, 
Jisig: 


Manner, see Dat.; exprs. by a 

part:, 72 (2). 
Means, see dat. 
ut-verbs, 87-90; 

of, 172. 
Middle mutes, 138 (2). 
Middle voice, 157. 
Moods, 158. 


conjugation 





TESTAMENT GREEK. 


Movable consonants, 140-141 


(top). 
Mutes, 138; euph. changes, 
49, 69, 117 (top); verb 


stems, 186. 


Nasals, 138 (2). 

Negatives, 213; see under od 
and m7. 

Neuter, see Gender; neut. plur. 
w. sing. verb, 18 (note); 
neut. acc. of adjs. as advs., 
86 (mid.). 

Nominative case, 144; of 3d 
decl., 41. 

Number, 143. 

Numerals, 153. 


Objective case, 144. 
Open vowels, 138 (3). 
Optative, 180-181. 
Oxytone, 20 (bottom). 


Palatal mutes, 138 (2); verb 
stems in, 186 (top). 

Participle, 70-73 and 37, 39- 

Passive voice, 12, 157; second 
pass., 69. 

Penult, 2 (bottom). 

Perfect tense, 65-67; primary 
tense, 159. 

Periphrastic forms, 112(bottom). 

Personal endings, 4 and 182- 
183. 


Motion toward exprs. by acc., | Place exprs. by dat., 217 (bot- 


218. 


tom). 


ENGLISH INDEX, 


Pluperfect tense, suffix in act., 
89. 

Predicate position of adjs., 64 
(3d. sent.). 

Prepositions, 219-222; suffer 
elision, 141; in compound 
verbs, 32. 

Present tense, 3, 4; primary, 
159. 

Primary tenses, 159. 

Principal parts of verbs, 159. 

Proclitics, 21 (note). 

Pronouns, pers. pron., 29; in- 
tensive pron., avTés, 29, 30; 
interrog. and indef. pron., 
75; rel. pron., 33; refl. pron., 
80, 81. 

Pronunciation, 137 and 138 (4). 

Punctuation, 142. 

Purpose, exprs. by final clauses, 
206. 


Quantity of a syllable, 2 (4, 4). 
Questions of doubt exprs. by 
subjv., 205. 


Recessive, see Accent. 
Reciprocal pronouns, 81. 
Reduplication in perf., 66; in 
2 aor., 118 (v. 13); in pres. 
system, 89-90; Attic redupl. 
in perf., 112 (v. I). 
Relative clauses, 209. 
Result exprs. by wore, 212. 
Rough breathing, 10 (c), 140, 
Rough mutes, 138 (2). 


233 
Semivowels, 138 (2). 
Smooth breathing, 140. 
Subjunctive, 35-36, 38-39; 


syntax of, 205-210. 
Subscript iota, 7 (@). 
Suffixes, 183. 
Superlative degree of adjs., 85; 
of advs., 86. 
Systems, tense, 159, 181-182. 


Tasting, verbs of, foll. by gen., 
215 (mid.). 

Tenses, primary and secondary, 
159; tenses of ind., 158; of 
subjv., 35; of inf, 76; of 
part., 71-72. 

Time, w7thin which exprs. by 
gen., 214 (bottom); when, 
dat., 217; how dong, acc., 
218; use of part. to express 
Hime, 372. 

Touching, verbs of, foll. by 
gen., 215. 


Union and approach, words of, 
foll. by dat., 216 


Voice, 157. 

Vowels, short and long, open 
and close, 138 (3); contract. 
of, 138 (4), 139. 

Vowel declensions, 142 (bot- 
tom). 

Vowel stems in verbs, 48 (mid.). 


Want, words of, foll. by gen., 215. 
Wish, exprs. by opt., 181. 


Printed in the United States of America, 








Date Due 

































2 
a a ee 

P wh 

- ; ‘ 
i ve 4 





+ 
¥ 
* ba 
y eS 3 
2 4 BG 4 _ | 4 
4 , . ig 
’ % “ . 
. 4 
3 





Po 


, my 
z ) 7 
S ; 
5 
hs 


| 
-— 
ra 


PRINTED|IN U.S.A. 


t 


Hg 








: il 


